Download міністерство освіти і науки україни національний університет

_____________
)
(
.
,
)
«____»________________2013 .
.
,
.
,
,
.
________________
«___» ___________________ 20__ .
41.28 – 27.06.2013
2013
1
811.111
:
.
,
.,
.,
, 2013. – 245 .
.:
,
.
.
:
.–
,
.
4
.
-
,
,
–
–
–
,
.
-
.
,
ISBN
©
©
,
,2013
,2
2
,
.
,
.
4
.
-
,
,
–
–
–
,
.
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
,
.
,
.
,
,
.
,
,
.
3
PART 1
UNIT 1
MY FAMILY AND MYSELF. APPEARANCE AND CHARACTER
Study the vocabulary
Members of the Family
Masculine
Feminine
father
mother
son
daughter
brother
sister
husband
wife
When you have children, you are a parent.
If you are a male parent, you are a father.
If you are a female parent, you are a mother.
If one of your children is a boy, he is your son.
If one of your children is a girl, she is your daughter.
When a couple gets married, the man is the husband, and the woman is his wife.
A brother and sister both have the same parents.
Different Generations
Masculine
Feminine
Great-great grandfather
Great-great grandmother
Great grandfather
Great grandmother
Grandfather
Grandmother
Father
Mother
Son
Daughter
Grandson
Granddaughter
Great grandson
Great granddaughter
Great-great grandson
Great-great granddaughter
Relatives and Extended Family
grandparents: the parents of your parents.
grandfather: the father of your father/mother.
grandmother: the mother of your father/mother.
grandchildren: the children of your children.
grandson: the son of one of your children.
granddaughter: the daughter of one of your children.
great grandfather: the father of your grandfather/grandmother.
great grandmother: the mother of your grandfather/grandmother.
uncle: the brother (or brother-in-law) of your mother/father.
aunt: the sister (or sister-in-law)of your mother/father.
cousin: the child of your aunt/uncle.
nephew: the male child of your brother/sister.
niece: the female child of your brother/sister.
The In-Laws
The in-laws are the members of the family of your spouse (the person you are
married to) or via a marriage in your family:
4
father-in-law: the father of your spouse.
mother-in-law: the mother of your spouse.
son-in-law: the husband of your daughter.
daughter-in-law: the wife of your son.
brother-in-law: the husband of your sister.
sister-in-law: the wife of your brother.
Note: To refer to more than one brother-in-law or sister-in-law etc. we have an S to
the brother/sister part.
e.g. My brothers-in-law are fun. My sisters-in-laws are crazy.
The Family Mix
Nowadays in many countries a person can get married more than once. These are the
terms used to describe the "new" members of the family when someone gets
remarried.
"Step-" means that you are related as a result of one parent marrying again.
stepfather: the (new) husband of your mother but not your biological father.
stepmother: the (new) wife of your father but not your biological mother.
stepson: the son of your (new) husband / wife (he is not your biological son).
stepdaughter: the daughter of your (new) husband / wife (she is not your biological
daughter).
stepsister: the daughter of your stepmother or stepfather.
stepbrother: the son of your stepmother or stepfather.
Sometimes one of your parents gets married again and they have more children.
half-brother: the brother you have only one parent in common with .
half-sister: the sister you only have one parent in common with.
Even if your parent didn't get married (and had the child outside of marriage), they
are still your half-brother or half-sister.
Personal Information
Personal information questions are the basis for any conversation in English and so
are important for when you meet somebody for the first time. They are the building
blocks from which the rest of the conversation can develop.
Some common questions and a correct form for the answer are as follows:
Names
What is your name? - My name is _______.
What is your surname / last name? - My surname / last name is _______.
Do you have a nickname? - Yes, my nickname is _______ or No, I don't.
Work & Occupation
What do you do? - I am a _______.
Where do you work? - I work _______.
Do you like your job? - Yes, I do. or No, I don't.
Marital Status
Are you married / single? - Yes, I am. or No I'm not.
Do you have a boyfriend / girlfriend? - Yes, I do. or No, I don't.
What is your partner's name? - My partner's name is _______.
Age
5
How old are you? - I am _______ years old.
When is your birthday? - My birthday is on the _______ of _______.
Where were you born? - I was born in _______.
Contact Information
Where are you from? - I am from _______.
What is your address? - My address is _______.
What is your phone number? - My phone number is _______.
What is your cell phone number? - My cell phone number is _______.
Do you live with your parents? - Yes, I do. or No, I don't.
Do you live alone? - Yes, I do. or No, I don't.
Who do you live with? - I live with my _______.
Do you live in a house or an apartment? - I live in a/an _______.
What is your e-mail address? - My e-mail address is _______.
Free time activities
What do you do in your free time? - In my free time I _____.
What are your hobbies? - My hobbies are _______.
What type of music do you like? - I like _______ music.
What types of movies do you like? - I like _______ movies.
Do you like to read? - Yes, I do. or No, I don't.
Do you have any bad habits? - Yes, one of my bad habits is _______.
Physical Descriptions
The language for physical descriptions in English is quite specific depending on
the physical characteristic you are describing. When giving physical descriptions, the
two most common verbs to use are be and have, however, they are quite specific.
We use be for: height, weight, skin colour.
We use have for: hair (length), hair (style), hair (colour) and facial features.
Height
Short - Medium height - Tall
Weight
Skinny - Thin - Slim - Medium weight - chubby - fat - overweight - obese
Skin Colour
Fair-skinned - Tanned - Dark-skinned
Hair (Length)
Short - Medium length - Long
Hair (Style)
Straight - Wavy - Curly
Facial Features
Beard - Black Eye - Moustache - Pimples
Other Features
Mole - Scar - Wart - Wrinkles
Examples:
Chris is medium height. Tanya has blonde hair. Albert is overweight. Donna has
curly hair and is tanned. Tony is tall and has medium length hair.
If you want to combine hair characteristics together in the same sentence, then the
6
structure is:
Length + Style + Colour + Hair
Michael has short curly black hair. Mary has long wavy brown hair.
Exercise 1.Tell your fellow students about yourself.
1. How would you introduce yourself (first name, last name, age, grade, school)?
2. Where do you live (or come from)? (city, country)
3. What's your favourite hobby? How long have you been doing it?
4. What else do you like doing in your free time?
5. Do you have a friend? What kind of a person is he/she? What do you like doing
together?
6. What was the last book you have recently read? What was it about? What were
the names of the main characters? Did you like the book? Why?
7. Do you like to travel? Where in the world would you like to go if you had
enough money? Why?
Exercise 2. Match the definitions.
1. family reunion
a. son of your sister or brother
2. cousins
b. daughter of your sister or brother
3. stepmother
c. family that lived a very long time ago
4. in-laws
d. children of your uncle and aunt
5. great-grandfather
e. husband of your sister
6. niece
f. daughter of your children
7. ancestors
g. get-together of an extended family
8. brother-in-law
h. father of your grandparents
9. nephew
i. parents of your husband or wife
10. granddaughter
j. your father’s new wife
Exercise 3. Write the jumbled word in each sentence correctly.
1. Our mbiation ambition was to be the first to climb the mountain.
2. Unfortunately, we were not uccessfull ___ as the Japanese got there first.
3. We were disappointed but we weren’t evasdtsted ___.
4. The Japanese had problems but we had some rioseus ___ difficulties.
5. All the people on our expedition showed a lot of uracoge ___.
6. It was an unforgettable urnejoy ___ for us all.
EXERCISE 4. Complete the description with the words in the box.
cheerful; hard working; outgoing; reckless; reliable; sensible; sociable
sympathetic
Robert is a ___ boy, always with a smile on his face. He’s a good listener, too, and is
always ___ if you have a problem or if something goes wrong. And if you ask for
help, he’s very ____ - he won’t let you know. At school he’s very ___ and gets good
marks. He’s a very ___ person and would never do anything ___. Robert is a popular
student with lots of friends; he is very ___ and ___.
7
Exercise 5. Work with a partner. Ask and answer the questions. Use these words.
You can answer with more than one word.
Afraid, great, hungry, shocked, thirsty, angry, happy, nervous, tired,
confused, healthy, sad, terrible, worried.
1. You get a thousand dollars from your friend. How do you feel?
2. You have a test now. How do you feel?
3. You lifted weights for fifty minutes. How do you feel?
4. You are flying a plane for the first time. How do you feel?
5. You want to eat. How do you feel?
6. Your family buys a new house. How do you feel?
7. The baby is crying/ how do you feel?
Exercise 6. Complete each sentence with a word from the box.
alone; angry; kind; lonely; nervous; only; sensible; sensitive; sympathetic; unique
1. Don’t shout at her. She’s very ___ and will be upset.
2. She’s very ___ to animals.
3. She has no friends and is really quite ___.
4. He was the ___ person I knew at the party.
5. I’m very ___ about tomorrow’s exam.
6. He’s very ___ and wouldn’t do anything silly.
7. She’s a ___ artist; there’s really nobody else like her.
8. I was very ___ when he broke my favourite glass.
9. He has lived ___ since his wife died.
10. My friends were very ___ when my dog died.
Exercise 7. Complete the definitions with the words in the box.
bore
layabout chatterbox
gossip
snob
troublemaker
1. A ___ a person who likes about other people’s business.
2. A ___ is a person who causes difficulties for other people.
3. A ___ is a person who can’t stop talking.
4. A ___ is a person who dislikes people of a lower social class.
5. A ___ is a person who talks in an uninteresting way.
6. A ___ is a person who is extremely lazy and never does any work.
Exercise 8. Complete these sentences with a word from the box. You can use a
dictionary to help you.
direct; impatient; punctual; efficient; competitive; confident; creative
1. I can do my job quickly and well. I’m very efficient.
2. I always have a lot of new ideas. I’m very ___.
3. I hate waiting for anything. I’m very ___.
4. I want to be the best! I’m very ___.
5. I say what I think. I’m very ___.
6. I always arrive for meetings on time. I’m very ___.
7. I’m not afraid to speak English! I’m very ___.
8
Exercise 9. Fill in all the gaps using the new vocabulary.
imaginative
indecisive
picky
cynical
eccentric
egotistical
sensible
sensitive
sophisticated
thoughtful
Robin: Did you meet that guy, Richard, at the party last night?
Michele: Oh my God, he was so ___. He kept talking about how intelligent he was
and how much money he made. He even said he was thinking about becoming a
professional model. Like that's ever going to happen!
Robin: And Brad, the artist from New York, he was rather ___! He told me he
sculpts and paints nothing but frogs. He even said he wanted to introduce a new line
of frog jewelry. That's a little odd.
Michele: He wasn't strange at all. I thought he was very ___. You have to be really
creative to become such a successful artist. He was also incredibly ___ - he almost
started crying as he told me about his art. By the way, look at the ring he gave me.
Robin: Did he give you a frog ring? That's the ugliest thing I've ever seen!
Michele: It is not! I think it's really ___ . He said his jewelry is the latest trend
among the New York elite. Wasn't that ___ of him to give me one of his creations?
Robin: Not really, I think he just wanted some free advertising.
Michele: My God, you are so ___! Wasn't there anybody you liked at the party?
Robin: Yeah, Bill was really nice. He was the only ___ , clear-thinking person I
met there.
Michele: Oh, the waitress is coming. Have you decided what to order?
Robin: I'm not sure what to order. I just can't decide what I want.
Michele: You're so ___. Nothing is ever good enough for you.
Robin: That's not true! I'm just a little ___.
Michele: Well, you need to decide soon so we can order. I'm starving!
Exercise 10. It’s time to talk
Describe a person you know. Don’t say the name of the person or their job. Can
the other people in class guess who you are describing? Talk about the following:
Age
Job and responsibilities
Free-time interests
Two positive qualities
Two negative qualities
One quality of the person which is similar to you.
Exercise 11. Fill in each gap with the new vocabulary word which expresses the
opposite meaning.
cynical
eccentric
egotistical
imaginative
indecisive
picky
sensible
sensitive
sophisticated
thoughtful
1. naive
2. easy to please
3. uncreative
9
4. selfish
5. modest
6. normal
7. quick to decide
8. unfeeling
9. illogical
10. having faith in people
Exercise 12. Read the words and word-combinations.
“Character”
Jealous Absent-minded Just Ambitious Lazy, lazy-bones Attractive Liar Bore Light-minded Bright, clever –
,
Loyal Calm Mean, stingy Chatter-box Modest –
Cheerful Naughty Clumsy Neat Communicative Obstinate Compelling Outstanding Conceited Persistent Conscientious Polite Consistent Punctual Coward Reasonable Cruel Relaxed Cultural Reserved Cunning Resolute Dawdler –
,
Respectful Decent Rude Diligent Self-assured Double-faced Self-starter Envious Shy –
Fair Sleepyhead Faithful Smart Frank Sophisticated Generous Sweet-tooth Greedy Trusting Honest Weak-willed Hot-tempered Well-bred Ill-mannered Wise Impudent Industrious Irritable 10
Exercise 13. Replace the underlined phrases with the verb to be and an adjective
from the box.
determined intelligent confident ambitious generous talented reliable
brave
My brother isn’t afraid of anything. His hobby is mountain climbing. – My brother
is brave. His hobby is mountain climbing.
1. My aunt gives her time and money to other people. She gave me £200 at
Christmas!
2. Jane feels sure that she will pass her end-of-year exams.
3. Sarah can understand things quickly. She’s got lots of qualifications.
4. Petra always does what she says she will do. She won’t be late.
5. Joe wants to be successful and powerful. He wants to be a manager.
6. My dad never lets anyone/anything stop him. He’s decided to run a marathon
and I’m sure he’ll do it.
7. Sam has a lot of natural ability as a writer. She won a short story competition
in June.
Exercise 14. Give your opinion on the ideas.
1. Do you think you are a happy person?
2. What is your main interest? Education, sports, entertainment, computers, doing
practical things with your hands or anything else?
3. Are you successful in everything you do? Does success mean much to you? In
what aspect of life do you want to be successful?
4. Do you envy your friends who are more successful?
5. Have you got any problems? What worries you most? Your progress at school,
relationships with friends and family, your health, your appearance and clothes or
anything else?
6. Do your friends respect you? What kind of people do you respect? Honest,
reliable, sociable, helpful, generous?
11
UNIT 2
HIGHER EDUCATION
Exercise 1. Answer the following questions:
1. What are the general purposes of higher education?
2. Do you know if any changes have been made in the system of higher
education in Ukraine?
3. What are the most prestigious universities in Ukraine?
Exercise 2. Learn the words and word-combinations
Doctor of Science Administration
building
Tutorial Grant, scholarship –
Assembly hall Correspondence education Classroom/auditorium –
Lecture hall To fail the exam Chair Conference hall To fail in English Gym Language lab To miss classes Academic department Evening courses Pre-school education Dean's office Campus Elementary education (primary) Hostel –
Lecture To graduate from the University Lab Seminar –
To be promoted to another year Credit –
Quiz, exam Final exam/finals get "5" be fresh from school Term paper Graduation thesis Entrance exams Teaching staffMid-term exams Student body pass the exam Tutor ,
Monitor revise for the exam Full-time student Freshman –
read up for exam Sophomore Graduate ,
sit an exam ,
Postgraduate student be a quick study Bachelor's Degree Master's Degree 12
be a slow study Exercise 3. Read the text about Higher Education in Ukraine and translate it.
Ukraine’s National Higher Education System
In Ukraine, as in other developed countries, higher education is considered to be
one of the main human values. Ukraine has inherited from the past a welldeveloped and multifunctional system of higher
education. The dynamics, which is a characteristic
trait of the current civilization, increasing social role
of an individual, humanization and democratization
of society, intellectualization of labour, fast change
in technologies and equipment worldwide. All these
requires the creation of such which will allow
Ukraine to become the ever-educated nation. The establishment of the national
higher education system is based on the new legislative and methodological
grounds. It provides for the entirely new qualitative level of expert's training,
increase in academic and professional mobility of graduates, greater openness,
democratic principles of teaching and raising the youth, accession of Ukraine's
higher education system into the world community.
The higher education consists of higher educational establishments, scientific
and methodological facilities under federal and municipal governments and selfgoverning bodies in charge of education. The higher education structure includes
also the post-graduate and Ph. D. Programs and self-education. The higher
education includes two major educational levels, namely basic higher education
and full higher education. The educational level is trait of higher education by the
level of gained quality which provides comprehensive development of an
individual and which will do to get an appropriate qualification. The legislation
sets the following educational and qualification levels - junior specialist, bachelor,
specialist, master, as well as scientific degrees of candidate of sciences (assistant
professor) and doctor of sciences (Ph. D.). Educational and qualification level is
trait of higher education by the level of gained qualities which will enable this
individual to perform the appropriate occupational tasks or responsibilities at a
certain qualification level. Senior scientific researcher, assistant professor and
professor are the applied degrees.
The Ukraine's State Higher Education System includes 940 higher educational
institutions (HEI), out of which 806 are public and 134 are of other forms of
property ownership. HEIs in Ukraine are comprised of vocational schools,
colleges, institutes, academies, universities.
According to the HEIs status the following 4 levels of accreditation are set:
Level I - vocational schools and other HEIs equaled to them which teach junior
specialists by using educational and professional programs (EPPs);
Level II - colleges, other HEIs equaled to them which teach bachelors, and if
need be junior specialists, by using EPPs;
13
Level III - institutes, conservatories, academies, universities which teach
bachelors and specialists, as well as junior specialists if need be , by using EPPs;
Level IV - institutes, conservatories, academies, universities which teach
bachelors, masters and specialists if need be, by using EPPs.
HEIs' graduates are given state standard diploma after they complete education
under respective EPPs based on the results of state attestation. The following
educational and qualification levels granted to the experts exist in Ukrainian
system of higher education: junior specialist, bachelor, specialist and master.
Normative periods of training under different educational and qualification
levels are set listed below:
3 years for junior specialist (on the basis of full comprehensive secondary
education);
4 years for bachelor (on the basis of full comprehensive secondary education);
1 year for specialist (on the basis of first degree);
1 year for master (on the basis of first degree).
One of the particular features of high school in the Soviet period was that
priority was given to preparation of technical engineers and machine building
complex specialists - first of all for military complex. Most of technical higher
educational institutions were concentrated in districts with well-developed
industry. A lot of non-governmental higher educational institutions appeared
recently which leads to increasing of economic and business profile students. Since
1997 students can study at higher educational institutions on contract basis.
Higher education supplies all spheres of national economy with qualified
professionals and looks for the better ways of development and perfection.
Exercise 4. Answer the questions.
1. What is the most difficult problem for a young person?
2. Why don’t the majority of young people know what they want to be?
3. When do they make a decision about an occupation?
4. What things do you have to think about when choosing an occupation?
5. What should one do to qualify for a particular job?
6. Whom can you turn to for advice when making your decision?
7. What is the most important part of the decision-making process?
8. Is it important to be a well-educated person?
9. What role does self-education play in our life?
10. When does a person become a highly qualified specialist?
11. What does education develop?
12. Why is good education necessary nowadays?
Exercise 5. Give Ukrainian equivalents.
A lot of applicants, to seek for admission, its history dates back from, to lecture, to
appear, a scientific centre of methodical and pedagogical activities, to make a speech,
to commemorate the event, the merits in preparing teachers, to estimate the merits, in
the field of education, the first-year students, are interested in, students are to attend,
14
practical work is given much attention to, a students' research society, to get a
scholarship, to give the right to teach, on graduating, in brief, to share a room, we
have little time left, plenty of time, as for me, to look up the timetable, you are sure to
fail in your English, to idle away the time, to have a credit-test in a subject.
Exercise 6. Match words in the left column with their definitions.
1. Degree
a) A person who has completed a four-year-course of study at a
higher school, and now attends a college or University, but hasn’t
yet received a degree.
2. Graduate
b) The subject or area of studies in which students concentrate.
3.Full-time
student
c) One who is enrolled in an institution and is taking a full load of
courses.
4. Major
d) A student who has completed a course of study either at the
higher school or college level.
5. Junior
e) A third-year-student at a higher school.
6. Master’s
degree
f) Diploma or title conferred by a college, university or
professional school upon completion of a prescribed program of
studies.
7. Sophomore
g) A second-year-student at a higher school, colleges, university.
8.Undergraduate h) Degree conferred by an institution of higher learning after
students complete academic requirements which usually include a
minimum of one-year study beyond the Bachelor’s degree.
Exercise 7. Arrange the following words in pairs of synonyms.
a) to train, to give attention to, a profession, a curriculum, to name, a faculty, to
teach, to last, scientific
b) a course of study, to continue, to prepare, a speciality, to call, to educate, to pay
attention to, a department, research
Exercise 8. Choose the right word to complete the sentences.
a curriculum; education;, research; speciality; to name after; an entrance exam;
to pay attention t;, to miss; a scholarship; to pass; to attend; to fail; to graduate
from; to take an exam; to be interested in; an educational establishment; to consist
of; a subject
1. Each faculty has a ___ society where students can work on some themes they
___. 2. Many young people in our country after finishing school continue their ___ in
different ___. 3. ___ of this faculty is very interesting. It ___ different subjects such
as psychology, linguistics, history of education and others. 4. What is your future ___
? What ___ do you study? 5. Moscow State University is ___ Lomonosov, who is the
15
founder of it. 6. If you want to study well, don't ___ classes, those who ___ all
lectures and seminars don't ___ at the exams. 7. Do you get ___? Unfortunately not, I
couldn't ___ my exam in literature. 8. This student must ___ his pronunciation, his
sounds are not good. 9. When will you ___ the Institute? Next year in spring I am
going ___ my final ___. Now I am in my 4th year. 10. My daughter will take only
one ___ because she has been awarded a golden medal at school.
Exercise 9. Use the words in the box to help you complete the sentences below.
state schools; public/private schools; take an exam; pass an exam; fail an exam;
learn by heart; a uniform; do homework; write lines; strict lectures; tutorials lessons
1. When we did something wrong at school, we had to ___ ___. I remember
writing ‘I must not speak in class’ two hundred times.
2. We always had a lot of ___ to do at night.
3. At most schools children have to wear the same clothes. This is called a ___.
4. In Britain, government schools are called __ schools.
5. In Britain, ___ and ___ schools are more or less the same! You pay to attend
them!
6. Some teachers use a lot of discipline. They are very ___.
7. When I was at school I had eight ___ a day.
8. ___ are similar to lessons but with more people. Over a hundred people may
attend a lecture. You often have them at university.
9. ___ are similar to lessons, but fro only very few people, perhaps two or even
one. You get very personalized help.
10. Barbara ___ twelve exams. She ___ eight of them and she ___ four.
11. If you ___ something by __ it means that you can repeat it automatically. You
do not need to think about it.
Exercise 10. Fill in the blanks with a suitable word.
Trainer, instructor, teacher, professor, coach
1. The ___ who taught me at university was very knowledgeable.
2. She hired a professional ___ to teach her how to swim.
3. His ___ says that he is improving in all his subjects at school.
4. A new ___ was hired to school the race horses.
5. The school hired a new ___ for the swimming team.
Exercise 11. Make up dialogues using the following words and wordcombinations.
1. to apply, to enter the University, to work hard, to study different subjects, to be
interested in, future speciality. 2. a student of the full time department, to be in one's
first year, winter examination session, to attend lectures and seminars, to have credittests in, to pass exams, to get a mark, to get a scholarship, to have good holidays.
Exercise 12. Can you find all the hidden words in this word search?
Words can go from left to right, from right to left, up or down. Good luck!
16
Deadline degree
primary
nursery tutor mark school
course
secondary enroll
Exercise 13. Choose the best variant.
1. I have a lot of very difficult ________ this term.
a. exams
b. exam
c. examination
2. To _____ means to study hard in a short period of time (usually before an
exam).
a. cramp
b. cram
c. crumb
3. I thought that the ________ I wrote for my Spanish Literature class was great,
but I only got a C.
a. essay
b. article
c. work
4. Did you pass exam? No, I ________!
a. feed
b. flipped
c. failed
5. A ________ student is someone who already has an undergraduate degree, and
is trying to get an M.A., M.S., Ph.D., etc.
a. graduating
b. graduate
c. gradual
6. A Masters ______ is something you have to write in order to obtain a Masters
Degree.
a. theory
b. work
c. thesis
7. The maximum ______ for undergraduate degree students is 21 credit hours in a
semester.
a. course load
b. class number
c. load
8. A ________ student, is one who doesn't have a full course load.
a. part-time
b. part-study
c. full-time
9. When you write a ________, you're writing a formal written report that includes
both research findings and your own ideas.
17
a. text
b. research paper
c. research work
10. She is a very smart girl. She always gets good ________.
a. gradients
b. noted
c. grades
Exercise 14. Write these definitions correctly.
1. University department, e.g. of Arts/Law/Medicine Science cuatlyf ___.
2. University classes steeruc ___.
3. To complete all your university studies dragetua ___.
4. Top university teacher sporrefos ___.
5. Not as big as a university eleclog ___.
6. To finish both studying and trading yafilug ___.
Exercise 15. Read and render the text.
Education in Our Life
Education plays a very important role in our life. It is one of the most valuable
possessions a man can get in his life. During all the periods of human history
education ranked high among people. Human progress mostly depended upon welleducated people. Self-education is very important for the development of human’s
talents. Only through self-education a person can become a harmonically developed
personality. A person becomes a highly qualified specialist after getting some special
education. And professionalism can be reached only through it. Even highly qualified
specialists from time to time attend refresher courses to refresh their knowledge. We
get our knowledge of this world and life through education. Many famous discoveries
would have been impossible if people were not interested in learning something.
Education develops different sides of human personality, reveals his abilities.
Besides, it helps a person to understand himself, to choose the right way in this
world. The civilized state differs from others in the fact that it pays much attention to
the educational policy. John Kennedy said: “Our progress as a nation can be no
swifter than our progress in education”. But it doesn’t concern only one particular
nation. We know that science and art belong to the whole world. Before them the
barriers of nationality disappear. So education brings people closer to each other,
helps them to understand each other better.
Exercise 16. How important is technology in your life?
1. I buy and use as many of the latest technological gadgets as I can.
2. I use quite a lot of technological equipment, but only for my hobby.
3. I only use the technological essentials, like the phone and washing machine.
4. I prefer not to be dependent on technology.
5. As far as possible, I avoid using machines and gadgets.
18
UNIT 3
NATIONAL UNIVERSITY OF FOOD TECHNOLOGIES
Exercise 1. Answer the following questions.
1. What University do you study at?
2. When was the institution founded?
3. How many faculties are there at the University?
4. What specialists does the University train? What directions is the training held
in?
5. How many applicants are annually enrolled into the University?
6. What can you say about the teaching staff of the University?
Exercise 2. Learn the following words.
to coach up a student
to miss a lesson for a valid reason/excuse
an unexcused absence
“free” period
late-comers
a mark in a subject
for a dictation
for a test
to give an all-round education
to get an all -round education
diligent, industrious
capable/incapable
to neglect one’s studies/to be careless
about one’s studies
to lag behind the group
to catch up with a group
superficial knowledge
deep/profound knowledge
to put one’s knowledge into practice/to
apply one’s knowledge into practice
to carry on scientific work/to do research
to be a fourth-year student/to be in one’s
fourth year
to be promoted to the next year
to take post-graduate courses
a diploma work
to present/to support one’s thesis/ diploma
work
,
19
a lecture on a subject
a consultation in a subject
a test in a subject
an examination in a subject
a test-paper
a lecture-room
a curriculum
a time-table
,
Exercise 3. Read and translate the following text.
NATIONAL UNIVERSITY OF FOOD TECHNOLOGIES
There are 111 higher educational establishments in Kyiv and among them is The
National University of Food Technologies which is in Volodymyrska, 68. It was
founded in 1930 as the Kyiv Institute of Sugar Refinery Production and had 2
departments with 400 students. Now NUFT is the only technical university in
Ukraine which provides training of highly skilled specialists in 25 specialities and 15
specializations for food, meat, dairy, pharmaceutical, microbiological and other
branches of agro-industrial complex as well as for food machine building of Ukraine.
About 10 thousand students study at the University at its full time departments as
well as by correspondence.
NUFT is a higher educational institution of the 4th level of accreditation. Training
of students is provided at 11 full time departments (54 chairs) and three extra-mural
departments. In 1998 Simpheropol Technical School of food production was
incorporated to the University with a college status. The University chairs have 24
branches and 8 research and production complexes in leading enterprises, planning
and research establishment, research and production centres have been recently
founded. Preliminary department and short-time preliminary courses of the
University train entrants for higher educational institutions. The NUFT occupies 9
buildings where there are many lecture-halls, classrooms, laboratories and
workshops, six computer centres with more than 30 computer classes.
There is a special building for the library and reading-halls where our students
usually prepare their hometasks and read up for their credits and exams.
The students of the University are provided with 5 hostels, sports and recreation
facilities.
Our University trains specialists for various branches of food industry such as
bread making, brewing, meat and dairy processing, sugar refining as well as
engineers in thermal-engineering, mechanical engineers and economists at the
departments of
- Automation and Computer Systems
- Accounting, Finance and Business Activities
- Economics and Management
- Technology of Bakery and confectionary production
- Technology of Fermentation and Sugar Industry
- Technology of Meat and Dairy, Perfumery and Cosmetics Products
20
- Power Engineering and Energy Management
- Mechanical Engineering and Packaging Equipment
- Biotechnology and Environment Control
- Hotel-Restaurant and Tourism Business
- Health-Improving Products Technology and Food Expertise
- Pre-university department
Each department has its own Dean's office.
During junior years our students study basic subjects such as history,
mathematics, physics, chemistry, descriptive geometry, technical drawing, strength of
materials, elements of machines and one of the foreign languages.
During senior years our students pay more attention to the study of the, subjects
closely connected with their future specialities.
The study of theory is accompanied by practical training at specially equipped labs
and workshops, then in experimental sugar refinery and later on at various enterprises
of food industry.
Twice a year our students take their credits and exams. Our students do not only
study, they take the most active part in doing research in the students' scientific
society; they participate in social life of our University; they go in for various kinds
of sport and take part in amateur art activities.
The fourth year is devoted to practical training and to the work at the graduation
thesis. After successful presenting a graduation thesis or sitting for the State exams
students receive diplomas which qualify them to work in the field for which they
have been trained and are awarded a Bachelor's Degree. Those students, who want to
get a Specialist's or Master's Degree, continue their studies during the fifth and sixth
years.
Upon graduating from our University they get appointments in every corner of
our country. Wherever they work, they are promoters of modern food production and
technology.
Exercise 4. Answer the questions
1. What is the full name of your University?
2. When was the University founded?
3. What subjects do the students study at the University?
4. Where do the students get their vocational training?
5. Will you name the places where the final year students can work upon
graduating?
6. When was University founded?
7. How many faculties are there at the University?
8. What do you know about research institutes?
9. What specializations are the students trained in?
10. How many buildings does the University have?
11. How many students are there at the University?
12. There are 95 departments at the university, aren’t there?
13. How long does the course of studies at the University last?
21
14. Is the academic year divided into 3 semesters as it is in the British universities?
15. What degrees are conferred after graduating from the University?
Exercise 5. Make up the questions to the following answers.
1) Yes, it is. Our University is rather prestigious and students from many parts of
our country come to study there.
2) About 10.000 students study at the University.
3) The main faculties of our University are: machine-building automation,
instrument-making, computer science, automation and information technology,
economics and management and others.
4) Yes, they do. During the academic year students work hard.
5) Examinations take place at the end of each term.
6) They have practice at plants, research institutes and design bureaus.
7) Students who are interested in science do. They join the Students' Scientific
Society of our University.
Exercise 6. Match the words and their meaning.
1. boarding school
a. 2nd stage in formal education, usually from the
ages of 12 to 17
2. diploma
b. higher education provided by universities and
colleges
3. distance learning
c. 1st stage in formal education, usually from the
ages of 6 to 11
4. mortar board
d. higher education institute that provides distance
learning courses
5. open university
e. school where pupils are provided with meals and
lodging
6. primary education
f. document that proves a student has earned a
degree
7. secondary education
g. courses taken at home, usually online using a
computer network
8. tertiary education
h. academic cap topped by a flat square with a
tassel
Exercise 7. Translate the following sentences.
1. She failed her exams and will take them again. 2. She is studying to become an
engineer. 3. He has always wanted to apply for Moscow State University. 4. In
Britain the academic year runs from October to July. 5. When we came to the
laboratory the experiment had already started. 6. What were you doing at 5
o’clock yesterday? – I was writing my course paper. 7. We’ll be discussing this
question at our seminar tomorrow morning. 8. Professor Brown is delivering a lecture
to the undergraduate students now. 9. By the beginning of the academic year all the
class-rooms, lecture-halls, laboratories and workshops will have been repaired. 10. I
have carried out my laboratory work and now I am going home. 11. She went to the
library yesterday. 12. Last night he completed the experiment which he had begun
22
some months before. 13. I was reading when you rang me up. I was reading a
difficult English text then. 14. Students who are interested in science join the
Students’ Scientific Society. 15. Will they publish the results of their researches?
Exercise 8. Discuss the following questions.
1. When does the academic year begin in this country? 2. How many exams did
you pass to enter the University? 3. Do you pay for your education? 4. Do students
get grants? 5. What subjects do students study in the first year? 6. Which subject is
the most interesting for you? 7. Is there a sport center in your University? 8. What
degree do students get after four years of study? 9. What degree can a student get
after two years of further study and research? 10. What new education system is
introduced in this country? 11. What degrees do people get after graduating from a
university? 12. Why is higher education important in the life of every country?
Exercise 9. Read and render the text.
Courses and Qualifications
When she was a small child, Amelia’s teachers identified her as having unusual
intelligence and remarkable mental agility, and they put her on a special programme
for gifted children. Amelia won a scholarship to attend a local grammar school. By
the age of eighteen, she was a straight A student, and she secured place at one of the
country’s most prestigious seats of learning to read English Literature.
In the first academic year of the English Literature programme, the core subjects
were The development of the novel and Contemporary poetry. Amelia had a large
number of set texts to read. It was hard work but she loved it. Her professors were all
distinguished scholars and her courses were taught by some of the world’s leading
authorities in the field. She completes her studies with considerable success and
graduate from the university last year. In the meantime, her parents have decided that
it is time they made up for their lack of formal education and they have signed up for
a number of evening courses. Eventually they hope to meet the entry requirements for
entrance and to be able to complete a degree as mature students.
Exercise 10. Give answers to the questions. Explain your thoughts.
1. At what age do people usually begin to work in your country?
2. Do you think it is more important to make a lot of money or to enjoy your job?
3. Do you think women can have the same jobs as men?
4. Do you think you could become a workaholic?
5. Do you think colleagues will have a big role in your job? Explain.
6. Do you consider yourself as an ambitious person at work?
7. Why are some jobs more popular than others?
8. What do you think is the most interesting job and what do you think is the most
boring job?
23
UNIT 4
MY FUTURE SPECIALITY
Exercise 1. Discuss the following questions:
1. What is your future profession?
2. Who helped you to make this choice?
3. What factors influence on the choice of profession?
4. What are the main advantages of your future job?
5. What are the main disadvantages of your future job?
Exercise 2. Remember the following words and word-combinations:
automation engineer
qualitative
to acquire
to devote
to design
electronic engineers
department
to train
,
a graduate
field
to be aware of
,
to determine
obvious
,
to be in charge of
inconceivable
to maintain
to be related
to acquire
to be in great demand of
enterprise
throughout
to be engaged in
fruitfully
establishment
to research
to transmit
device
to process
to debug
,
developer
application
24
data
computation
to transfer
Exercise 3. Read and translate the text.
MY FUTURE SPECIALITY
I am a first-year student of the National University of Food Technologies. I study
at the Faculty of Automation and Computer Systems. Our department trains
specialists on such specialties: “Information Technologies”, “Computer Systems and
Networks”. My future specialty is an automation engineer.
I was always interested on computers, which have already become the inseparable
part of our life, that’s why my decision wasn’t spontaneous. I’ve chosen this
profession because the present industrial production and economics are practically
inconceivable without information systems. Among various recent trends in the
engineering profession computerization is the most widespread. Computers are
increasingly used for solving complex problems as well as for handling, storing, and
generating the enormous volume of data modern engineers must work with.
Now that the country is through a period of qualitative changes in its economy
the higher school acquire a special task to train specialists of a new type who would
combine fundamental knowledge with a high professional level and practical
training in the specific field of national economy.
Higher technical education is a component of our country’s higher education
system. The course of study lasts 5 years. A large part of study is devoted to basic
subjects. We study general subjects such as physics, mathematics, foreign languages,
history, philosophy; and special subjects such as data basis, programming,
computational methods and application of electronic computers.
The future specialist can plan technological processes of automated control,
choose optimum conditions for the automated operations, use modern control
methods.
Thus at the University we are taught both general and special subjects: Math,
History, foreign languages, Physics, Informatics, Electronics, Analogue and Digital
Devices, Information Systems and Information Software, etc.
The future specialist must know:
- the basis of general theoretical subjects;
- special subjects, which explain the main principles of automation and control;
- planning of different kinds of activity;
- technological equipment and technological processes of the field he works in.
The academic activity falls into such types: lectures, seminars, practical classes,
labs, tutorials, credits, examinations.
In order to link theoretical knowledge with the application of it in their future
profession the students have some practical training during the whole course of
education.
The department offers four year courses leading to the degree of Bachelor of
Automation and five year courses leading to the degree of Master of Automation.
25
As well-trained experts we can write and run any software and maintain any
hardware, process database control information or design application programs on a
high-level programming language base.
The graduates of the University can work as automation engineers and electronic
engineers at different kinds of enterprises, scientific and designing offices.
Thanks to their fundamental education the graduates of our faculty are in the great
demand of the industrial and commercial enterprises or educational institutions not
only in our town but throughout the Altai region and the whole country.
As for me, I’d like to get a good education and be fruitfully engaged either in a
big-sized industrial enterprise or in a municipal establishment.
Exercise 4. Match the words and phrases on the left with those on the right.
1. to work flexi-time
a working at different times: days one week, nights
the next
2. to run a business
b to work regular daytime hours
3. to have a nine-to-five job
c money you earn every month/year
4. to do paperwork
d to mange or be responsible for a company
5. to do shiftwork
e to do routine work such as writing letters, filling in
forms
6. a salary
f to be able to start and finish work at different times
each day
Exercise 5. Complete the gaps with a suitable word from the box.
patient; well-qualified; accurate; good with people; well-manned; latest methods;
sympathetic; honest ; imagination; good with money and numbers
a. You need to be ___ when you carry those glasses: they break easily.
b. There are a number of people who are ___ for this job, so it's very difficult to
choose the best one.
c. It's very important to be___ when teaching someone to drive: don't get angry
every time they make a mistake!
d. We feel that Paul is too young for this job, and doesn't have enough ___.
e. One of the things people expect from a travel guide is a ___ appearance.
f. We can guarantee that you will learn English quickly at our school; we use all
the ___.
g. I've always been___, so I'm looking for a job in banking.
h. When I explained to my boss why I was late, he was very___ and told me not to
worry.
i. In this job, we're looking for people with plenty of ideas; you need a lot of ___.
j. I'm sure nobody who works in this bar stole the money: I'm sure they're all
completely ___.
k. We expect everyone who works in our shop to be ___ and to speak politely to
the customers.
l. She's an excellent travel agent; she's very ___, so all the customers like her.
Exercise 6. Match the words with their definitions.
26
1. Overtime
a) the time around the middle of the day when you stop work
to eat your lunch;
2. Salary
b) a system in which a worker can choose what time he/she
starts or finishes work each day;
3. Flexible hours
c) not at all interesting;
4. Money
d) money that a person receives for the work;
5. Boring
e) to get money for working;
6. Colleague
f) time that you spend at work after your working hours;
7. Lunch break
g) the number of hours in the week that you spend doing your
job;
8. Working hours
h) what you earn by working or selling things, and use to buy
things;
9. Earn
i) a person who works at the same place as you;
10. Social life
j) your free time that you spend outside work doing things for
pleasure
Exercise 7. Work in pairs. Look at the list below.
Would you rather:
work in a team or alone?
work in a manufacturing industry or a service industry?
work in a large or a small organization?
be self-employed or be an employee?
work for the state or in the private sector?
be a member of a national company or a multinational company?
be based in an office or in a job involving travel?
Exercise 8. Speak on the following topics.
1. How to choose a profession. 2. I think my profession is one of the best. 3. I think
I’ll be able to use a foreign language in my future career. 4. I believe I possess the
qualities required for the profession I have chosen. 5. All jobs should be taken
seriously. 6. Experience is the best teacher. 7. You should always improve your
professional skills and work well.
Exercise 9. Choose two jobs: the job you would most like to have and the job you
would least like to have. Give the advantages and the disadvantages of the two jobs
you have chosen.
Exercise 10. Read the dialogue. What do you think about your future
profession?
Choosing the Future Profession
The problem of choosing the future profession has always been very important.
The profession a person chooses in many ways determines his future life. This is a
universal problem of our epoch. Every generation in this or that way comes across it.
For most people choosing a career is not an easy task. It is one of the most important
decisions one makes in life. The properly chosen career makes a person happy and
27
successful for the rest of his life.
There are several factors that influence the decision of young people to make their
choice. They concern material and spiritual aspects of the future profession. It is
generally believed that professions should be both prestigious and interesting.
Everybody wants to benefit from the social privileges provided by the profession. At
the same time other factors are important. Much depends on the inclinations and
interests of the person. Although it is wonderful when one's hobby becomes one's
profession it seldom happens in reality. Another important factor is social
environment. The profession of the parents often in this or that way influences the
future profession of their children. Today we have dynasties of physicians, historians,
lawyers, economists, pilots, and military officers.
It is impossible to forget about the material aspect of the future profession. It
indicates the level of the society's values. Today all professions can be classified as
prestigious and not prestigious. The problem of prestige is subjective. Nobody can
explain the meaning of this notion. "Prestigious" jobs give a chance to an individual
to enter the upper circles of the society. When the job is prestigious money is of
secondary importance. The future profession should be interesting and meet the
demands of the person.
To avoid mistakes, I discuss career prospects with my friends even today. Some of
us want to become physicians, others teachers, economists, historians, historians of
art, mathematicians, biologists, and computer operators. All the professions are very
useful. Physicians help people to be healthy and live a long life. They save the lives
of their patients. This profession requires well-educated people. Mistakes are
impossible in this profession. Physicians should be very patient and attentive with
their patients.
Teachers also should be patient and kind. Teachers should not only give
knowledge to their pupils but understand their problems, help them to become real
citizens of their country, be honest and hard working. For education to be successful,
teachers and pupils should work together. Every word and every gesture of the
teacher should be carefully chosen, otherwise the misunderstanding is inevitable.
Certainly, it is very difficult to be a teacher, because sometimes pupils do not behave
properly. They can shout, whistle, and drum on the desk. Teachers should maintain
discipline among the troublemakers. At the same time one should not forget that
discipline should work hand in hand with freedom. Freedom is welcomed if it helps a
pupil to learn. Teachers should encourage their pupils to do things successfully.
Teachers should be well educated themselves. Unfortunately both professions physician and teacher are not well paid in our country. One has to be an enthusiast to
choose one of them. I do not know how to cope with this problem but it is said that a
state declines if the government does not support health care and education.
Today the most popular professions are lawyers and economists. These professions
are prestigious. After graduating from Law and Economics Faculties it is possible to
find good jobs. Law and Economics students are better motivated to do their best
because they have clearly set goals. Their competence and knowledge, required by
the developing business economy, are well paid. To be a designer is attractive too.
28
This profession can fit creative people who know how to make things around them
look nice. For those young adults who choose the profession of a chemist, a
mathematician or a physicist the determinant factor is not prestige but interest and
inclination. To be a biologist is very prestigious and interesting today, because the
biologists are at the forefront of cloning. They are on the threshold of great
discoveries. I think that to be a sociologist or a psychologist is very interesting and
useful too. Psychologists try to help people to cope with their spiritual problems.
Sociologists study the health of the society.
One of the most fashionable and prestigious professions of today is that of a
computer operator. Although computers came into our life only in the 1960s they
quickly gained the ground of the contemporary society having become its
indispensable part. Today our life is entirely connected with computers. With the help
of computers people can do a lot of wonderful things from controlling spaceship up
to buying books and participating in virtual conferences. New programmes are
needed all the time to meet the increasing demands of our time. The roots of
computer science lie primarily in the related fields of electrical engineering and
mathematics. Electrical engineering physics and mathematics became the source of
the development of computers. Boolean algebra developed in the 19-th century made
its contribution to the elaboration of different programmes. Computers began to be
widely used 40 years ago. From the start they were used for computational support of
scientific and engineering disciplines and for business needs. Mathematicians did a
lot for the development of the computer science. The significance of Mathematics in
the general system of human knowledge constantly rises. Modern mathematical ideas
and methods are used for the control of spaceship flights, different branches of
industry, and transport systems. Applied Mathematics is part of different arts and
sciences, such as Physics, Biology, Medicine, and Linguistics.
I think that to be a historian is also very important today. People think that it is
possible to live without looking back at the historical past. But it is a mistaken view.
We cannot live without history because it is around us. By analyzing the past we can
avoid the mistakes in the future. If people do not use the experience of the past they
will inevitably make mistake in the present. Historians have always tried to
understand past human lives and societies. History helps to understand the global
historical process. Historians interpret the processes of the past to explain the
processes of the present and foresee the processes of the future.
- Have you made up your mind which profession to choose?
- No, I have not made up my mind which profession to choose. There are neither
good nor bad professions. The problem is that every profession should fit the person
to make him happy.
- What should be done to choose the profession properly?
- It is necessary to know your own inclinations and interests. A person primarily
should listen to himself and not to the recommendations given by others. He should
not keep company with the friend following his choice, too.
- Will you make the decision concerning your future profession as soon as
possible?
29
- I think the sooner a person chooses his future profession the better it is. He can
attend specialized classes to be well prepared for the entrance exams. Some people
try to postpone taking a decision. They think that they will take it later. They pretend
that such a problem does not exist at all. I think that this way deprives the person of a
lot of opportunities. Unfortunately, not everyone understands the necessity of making
a conscious choice of the future profession. Some pupils simply follow blindly in the
footsteps of their parents, relatives or friends. Such approach can bring about terrible
mistakes.
I think that it is necessary to start thinking about the future profession as soon as
possible. It is high time for discussing this problem with parents and friends.
Exercise 11. Use the words in the box to complete the sentences below.
training
application form
applicant
salary
wages
promotion
trade to work shifts
overtime
profession
1. If you are told how much money you will earn every hour, and you are paid
every week, what you receive are called ___.
2. If you are told how much money you will earn every year and you are paid
every month, what you receive is called a ___.
3. A person who tries to get a particular job is called an ___.
4. If you want a job you usually have to fill in an ___ ___.
5. When you are taught how to do a job, it is called ___.
6. If you stay with the same company but get better job with more responsibility
and more money this is called a ___.
7. If you have a job which requires a high level of education and training, such as
a doctor, this is called a ___.
8. If you have a job which requires a lot of training and you work with our hands,
such as an electrician, this is called a t___.
9. If you usually work 40 hours a week but you work 45 for extra money, this is
called ___.
10. If you sometimes work during the day and sometimes at night, then you work
___.
30
PART 2
UNIT 5
COMPUTERS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS
Exercise 1. Work in groups.
Share the information on how you use computers in your free time. Compare your
answers with the group and make the list of uses for your class. How do you think
these professions might use computers? Compare your answers.
Architects
Interior designers
Farmers
Landscape gardeners
Musicians
Rally drivers
Sales people
Exercise 2. Remember the following words and word-combinations:
1. character
,
,
,
2. hardware
, (“
”)
3. software
4. instructions
5. processing
6. to accept
7. to activate
,
8. to boot
9. to store
,
10. to install
,
11. to retrieve
12. raw
,
13. decision making
14. to convert
15. to refine
16. transmission
,
17. intelligence
18. procedures
,
19. keyboard
20. access
Exercise 3. Guess the meaning of the following international words.
Computer, diskette, processor, scanner, information, microphone, printer, modem,
Internet, interface.
Exercise 4. Translate the following word-combinations:
The term is used to …
in other words …
31
total computer system …
the computer software instructions …
processing information …
instruction called a program …
characters called data …
raw materials …
computer is used to …
mathematical and logical operations …
Exercise 5. Read and translate the text.
What is a Computer?
The term computer is used to describe a device made up of a combination of
electronic and electromechanical (part electronic and part mechanical)
components. Computer has no intelligence by itself and is referred to as hardware.
A computer system is a combination of five elements:
1. Hardware;
2. Software;
3. People;
4. Procedures;
5. Data/information.
When one computer system is set up to communicate with another computer
system, connectivity becomes the sixth system element. In other words, the manner in
which the various individual systems are connected – for example, by phone lines,
microwave transmission, or satellite – is an element of the total computer system.
Software is the term used to describe the instructions that tell the hardware how to
perform a task. Without software instructions, the hardware does not know what to
do. People, however, are the most important component of the computer system: they
create the computer software instructions and respond to the procedures that those
instructions present.
The basic job of computer is processing information. Computers accept
information in the form of instruction called a program and characters called data to
perform mathematical and logical operations, and then give the results. The data is
raw material while information is organized, processed, refined and useful for
decision making. Computer is used to convert data into information.
Exercise 6. Match words and word-combinations in column A with those in
column B.
A
B
to accept
character
data
instruction
processing
to boot
,
…
32
to compare
intelligence
to retrieve
procedures
to convert
Exercise 7. Complete the sentences using information from the text:
1. The term computer is used to …
2. A computer system is a …
2. Connectivity appears when …
3. Software is the term used to …
4. People are the most …
5. Processing information is the basic job of …
6. Computers accept information to …
7. The data is …
8. Computer is used to …
Exercise 8. Answer the questions:
a. What does the term computer “describe”?
b. Is computer intelligent?
c. What are 5 elements of a computer system?
d. What is connectivity?
e. What is software?
f. What is the difference between hardware and software?
g. Why are people the most important component of a computer system?
h. In what way do terms “data” and “information” differ?
i. How does the computer convert data into information?
Exercise 9. Describe the situation.
Exercise 10. Make up a dialogue on the situation.
Your younger brother/sister asks you about computer. He/she wants to know the
principles of operation,
what is keyboard, printer;
33
if computer has intelligence;
why it is so clever;
if it is possible to make a computer by himself/herself
Exercise 11. Read and render the text.
What is a Computer?
A computer is an electronic machine which can accept data in a certain form,
process the data, and give the results of the processing in a specified format as
information.
First, data is fed into the computer’s memory. Then, when the program is run, the
computer performs a set of instructions and processes the data.
A computer system consists of two parts: hardware and software. Hardware is any
electronic or mechanical part you can see or touch. Software is a set of instructions
called a program, which tells the computer what to do. There are three basic hardware
sections: the central processing unit (CPU), main memory and peripherals.
Perhaps the most influential component is the central processing unit. Its function
is to execute program instructions and coordinate the activities of all the other units.
By the way, it is the “brain” of the computer. The main memory (a collection of
RAM chips) holds the instructions and data which are being processed by the CUP.
Peripherals are the physical units attached to the computer. They include storage
devices and input and output devices.
Storage devices (hard drives, DVD drives or flash drives) provide a permanent
storage of both data and programs. Disk drives are used to read and write data on
disks. Input devices enable data to go into the computer’s memory. The most
common input devices are the mouse and the keyboard. Output devices enable us to
extract the finished product from the system. For example, the computer shows the
output on the monitor or prints the results onto paper by means of a printer.
On the rear panel of the computer there are several ports into which we can plug a
wide range of peripherals – a modem, a digital camera, a scanner, etc. They allow
communication between the computer and the drivers. Modern desktop PCs have
USB ports and memory card readers on the front panel.
What is inside a PC system?
The nerve centre of a PC is the processor, also called the CPU, or central
processing unit. This built into a single chip which executes program instructions and
coordinates the activities that take place within the computer system. The chip itself
is a small piece of silicon with a complex electrical circuit called an integrated circuit.
The processor consists of three main parts:
The control unit examines the instructions in the user’s program, interprets
each instruction and causes the circuits and the rest of the components – monitor,
disk drivers, etc. – to execute the functions specified.
The arithmetic logic unit (ALU) performs mathematical calculations (+,-, etc.)
and logical operations (AND, OR, NOT).
The registers are high-speed units of memory used to store and control data.
One of the registers (the program counter, or PC) keeps track of the next instruction
34
to be performed in the main memory. The other (the instructions register, or IR)
holds the instruction that is being executed.
The power and performance of a computer is partly determined by the speed of its
processor. A system clock sends out signals at fixed intervals to measure and
synchronize the flow of data. Clock speed is measured in gigahertz (GHz). For
example, a CPU running at 4GHz (four thousand million hertz, or cycles, per second)
will enable your PC to handle the most demanding applications.
RAM and ROM
The programs and data which pass through the processor must be loaded into the
main memory in order to be processed. Therefore, when the user runs a program, the
CPU looks for it on the hard disk and transfer a copy into the RAM chips. RAM
(random access memory) is volatile – that is, its information is lost when the
computer is turned off. However, ROM (read only memory) is non-volatile,
containing instructions and routines for the basic operations of the CPU. The BIOS
(basic input/output system) uses ROM to control communication with peripherals.
RAM capacity can be expanded by adding extra chips, usually contained in small
circuit boards called dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs).
There are two different types of computer, a desktop and a laptop:
Exercise 12. Translate the words from the text.
Computer, accept data, process the data, memory, set of instructions, hardware,
software, the central processing unit, main memory, peripherals, execute program
instructions, coordinate the activities, storage device, input device, output device,
mouse, keyboard, rear panel, plug, modem, digital camera, printer, scanner, front
panel.
Exercise 13. Find the explanation for the following words and phrases in the
text:
Computer, computer system, hardware, software, central processing unit,
peripherals, Input device, output device, chip, RAM and ROM, display, pixels
35
Exercise 14. Answer the questions.
1. What does the speed of computer depend on?
2. What is the typical resolution?
3. What are two measurements to describe the size of the display?
4. What company produced the first computer with a mouse and a graphic user
interface?
5. What does the desktop contain?
Exercise 15. Try to label the computer parts correctly
BASIC COMPUTER PARTS
Central Processing Unit (CPU), mouse, monitor, Compact Disk, Flash
Drive, keyboard, CD-ROM drive, Floppy Disk, Screen, Flash Disk
Exercise 16. General Terms: Scramble. Use the following words:
1) Cnoamdm ______________________
2) oCrsru _________________________
3) isDppF klyo _____________________
4) snotF __________________________
5) awHrader ______________________
6) yKoedrba _______________________
7) neuM _________________________
8) emoMd
_________________________
9) itMnoro
_________________________
36
UNIT 6
TYPES OF COMPUTERS AND THEIR FUNCTONS
I. Warming up
1. What types of computers do you know?
2. What type of computer do you personally use?
3. What is the most popular type of computer? Why?
Exercise 1. Remember the following words and word-combinations.
Input information
Output information
Analogue Computers
Digital Computers
Voltages
Arithmetic and logical operations
Physical changes
Convertor
Exercise 2. Scan the article and find out the words and word combinations
which have the following meanings:
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
Exercise 3. Read and translate the text.
Types of Computers and Their Functions
Since the invention of computers from first generation and fourth generation
computers, they have been classified according to their types and how they operate
that is input, process and output information. Below you will get a brief discussion on
various types of Computers we have
Computer types can be divided into 3 categories according to electronic nature.
Types of computers are classified according to how a particular Computer functions.
These computer types are
· Analogue Computers
· Digital Computers
· Hybrid Computers
Analogue Computers
Analogue types of Computer uses what is known as analogue signals that are
represented by a continuous set of varying voltages and are used in scientific research
centers, hospitals and flight centers.
With analogue types of computer no values are represented by physical measurable
quantities e.g. voltages. Analogue computer types program arithmetic and logical
operations by measuring physical changes i.e. temperatures or pressure.
Digital Computer type
With these types of computers operation are on electrical input that can attain two
37
inputs, states of ON = 1 and state of OFF = 0. With digital type of computers data is
represented by digital of 0 and 1 or off state and on state. Digital computer type
recognizes data by counting discrete signal of (0 0r 1), they are high speed
programmable; they compute values and stores results. After looking at the Digital
computer type and how it functions will move to the third computer type as
mentioned above.
Hybrid type of Computer
Hybrid computer types are very unique, in the sense that they combined both
analogue and digital features and operations. With Hybrid computers operate by
using digital to analogue convertor and analogue to digital convertor. By linking the
two types of computer above you come up with this new computer type called
Hybrid.
Let's look at the kinds of computers that there are, based on general performance
levels.
Personal or micro. Computers for personal use come in all shapes and sizes, from
tiny PDAs (personal digital assistant) and smart phones to hefty PC (personal
computer) towers. More specialized models are announced each week - trip planners,
expense account pads, language translators... To make things even more interesting,
categories are blending together. Phones are getting really, really smart.
Smart phone 2-4.5" screen
PDA
Tablet PC
Netbook 9-11" screen Compressed keyboard
Laptop/Notebook 14-17" screen Full size keyboard
38
Tower
Desktop 19+" monitor
Descriptions of Personal Computers. When talking about personal computers
(PCs), most people probably think of the desktop type, which are designed to sit on
your desk. (Bet you figured that one out!) The tower and the smaller mid- and minitower style cases have become popular as people started needing more room for extra
drives inside. Repairmen certainly appreciate the roominess inside for all the cables
and circuit boards ... and their knuckles.
A workstation is part of a computer network and generally would be expected to
have more than a regular desktop PC of most everything, like memory, storage space,
and speed. It's hard to tell the difference any more.
A variety of laptops/notebooks and similar PCs, like the netbook, that serve as a
middle ground between the bulkier, heavier desktops and the extreme portability of
PPCs, HPCs, and smart phones. A laptop computer is intended to be portable, with a
built-in screen. A netbook is even lighter, with a smaller screen, less storage, and is
missing features like a built-in DVD drive. Companies keep improving features and
components, like battery life and screen quality, and are producing more varieties and
styles of these smaller computers daily, or so it seems.
The market for the smallest PCs is expanding rapidly. Simplified versions of your
regular software are becoming available for the small types of PC like the palmtop
(PPC) and handheld (HPC) and for smart phones. You can carry a tiny computer like
a PalmPilot, Blackberry, or a smart phone around and enter new phone numbers and
appointments and those great ideas you just had. Later you can move this information
to your main computer. More and more of these small devices can connect wirelessly
to the Internet. Using web applications, like Google Docs and Microsoft Office Web
Apps, you can use a browser to view and even edit documents that are stored online,
and, of course, check your email. No local program is required! You just need a data
plan that you can afford!
With a Tablet PC you use an electronic stylus to write on the screen, just like with
a pen and paper, only your words are in digital ink. The Tablet PC saves your work
just like you wrote it (as a picture), or you can let the Hand Recognition (HR)
software turn your chicken-scratches into regular text. Your second grade teacher was
right. Good handwriting is important!
Main Frame The main frame is the workhorse of the business world. A main
frame is the heart of a network of computers or terminals which allows hundreds of
39
people to work at the same time on the same data. It requires a special environment cold and dry. Most main frame computers look like a bunch of tall cabinets. Not very
exciting.
Supercomputers. The supercomputer is the top of the heap in power
and expense. These are used for jobs that take massive amounts of calculating, like
weather forecasting, engineering design and testing, serious decryption, economic
forecasting, etc.
The first Cray supercomputer was introduced in 1976. It's actually
a C shape.
Minicomputer. The minicomputer has become less important since the PC has
gotten so powerful on its own. In fact, the ordinary new PC is much more powerful
than minicomputers used to be. Originally this size was developed to handle specific
tasks, like engineering and 3D design CAD calculations, that tended to tie up the
main frame.
Applications. An application is another word for a program running on the
computer. Whether or not it is a good application depends on how well it performs
the tasks it is designed to do and how easy it is for the user to use. That involves the
user interface - the way the user tells the software what to do and how the computer
displays information and options to the user.
Exercise 4. Answer the following questions:
1. How can computers be classified?
2. What is an Analogue Computer?
3. What is a Digital Computer type?
4. What is a Hybrid type of Computer?
5. What are the main kinds of computers, describe each kind?
6. What kind of computers is the most popular in your country?
Exercise 5. Match the words (1-5) with their definitions (a-e).
1. Tablet PC
a) a portable computer with a built-in screen
2. Main frame computer b) a small type of computer which you can
handle in your hand
3. Laptop computer
c) connection which doesn’t require any Cables
4. Palmtop
d) a computer with hand recognition software
5. Wireless connection e) an extremely huge computer
40
Exercise 6. Using information from text speak on.
- 3 categories of computers according to their electronic nature.
- different types of computers.
- functions of different types of computers
Exercise 7. Think and answer.
1. You are going on a business. What computer would you choose? Why?
2. You are a teleworker and do all work at home. What type of computer is the
most suitable for you? Explain your answer.
3. You are an IT manager in a large corporation. What computer is appropriate
for you?
Exercise 8. Read the text about computer games and be ready to discuss it.
Video Games: A Boon or Bane
Modern technologies like televisions and computers provide identifiable
educational. Over-use of technology, though, especially such gadgets as cell phones
and video games, presents a whole range of problems which may interfere with a
student's ability to learn and attend lessons.
Playing video games over an extensive period of time may cause social
withdrawal outside of the gaming real. Although
this does not always occur, it is possible if you do
not occupy your time with other outdoor hobbies
and activities. On a positive note, playing video
games online with gamers around the world will
allow you to socialize and communicate with
various cultures with ease. You will have the ability
to meet new online gamers each day.
It is easy to become addicted to gaming. Some
students may attempt to do this in class, which disrupts their learning. They might
also sleep less, which can slow down their thinking the next day. Kids putting in long
hours on their gadgets will give less attention to assignments and may be irritable
when they are away from their gadgets. There is circumstantial evidence linking a
rise in Attention Deficit Disorder with increased use of video games, causing many
scientists to worry about children causing permanent harm to their brains by spending
too much time interacting with such gadgets.
Persistent use of high-tech gadgetry can lead to a slew of health problems for
young and old alike. Apart from the repetitive strain injuries, video gamers are likely
to suffer from eye problems caused by long exposure to the black-lit screens. A
sedentary lifestyle - lack of exercise - discourages exercise and encourages obesity.
Taking breaks in between will dramatically improve your health if you are not
currently working your body out. Purchase fitness games that allow you to track your
body's progress over time - motivating you if you can't seem to tear yourself away
from the console.
41
Video games are definitely fun and entertaining and are also good for relieving
tension. However, too much indulgence can lead to addiction which, in turn, can have
physical as well as psychological effects on children.
Exercise 9. Read the text and select the right choice:
The text's type is:
- argumentative
- informative
- descriptive
Exercise 10. Read the text and identify the general idea:
a) Match the paragraphs with the most appropriate subtitles:
Paragraph
Subtitles
a- Addiction and lower school performance
Paragraph 2
Paragraph 3
b- Putting video-gamers' health in jeopardy
Paragraph 4
c- The social effect: withdrawal vs. integration
b) Fill in the table with the different advantages and disadvantages of video
games:
Advantages
Disadvantages
Suggested Solutions
- ………………
- ……………
- …..................
………
………
............
- ………………
- ……………
………
………
- ……………
Exercise 11. Match the items from both columns with their equivalents in
meaning.
Items
Meaning
a-Alleviating and appeasing usu. some pain
1- Withdrawal
2- Attention deficit
b-A huge number of
disorder
c-Motionless and idle
3- A slew of
d-The fact of satisfying /spoiling one's desires
4- Sedentary
e-A short attention span
5- Relieving
f- Isolation, detachment and solitude
6- Indulgence
Now you can draw your conclusions:
………………………………………
Expressing…………………………...
What is the writer's attitude towards video games? Select the best choice:
The writer upholds video games and encourages children to play them
The writer is against video games for their innumerable hazards on
gamers
The writer is unbiased (neither for nor against)
42
UNIT 7
COMPUTER ESSENTIALS
In pairs, discuss these questions.
1. Have you got a computer at home? What kind is it?
2. How often do you use it? Where do you use it for?
3. What are the main components and features of your computer system?
Exercise 1. Remember the following words and word combinations.
Accept
Process
Store
Output
Hardware
Software
Main memory
Random access memory
Read only memory
Peripherals
Input devices
Output devices
Storage devices
External devices
Port
Exercise 2. Read this advertising slogan and say which computer element each
pair refers to.
1. ) Point and click here for power
b) obeys every impulse as if it were an extension of your hand.
2. a) display your ideas with perfect brilliance
b) see the difference – sharp images and a fantastic range of colours
43
3. a) it’s quiet and fast
b) it’s easy to back up your data before it’s too late
4. a) power and speed on the inside
b) let your computer’s brain do the work
5. a) …a big impact on the production of text and graphics
b) just what you need: a laser powerhouse
Exercise 3. Find the words in the slogans with the following meanings.
1 to press the mouse button
2 clear, easy to see
3 to make an extra copy of something
4 selection
5 shows
Exercise 4. Read and translate the text
Parts of a Computer
A computer is an electronic machine which can accept data in a certain form,
process the data, and give the result of the processing in a specified format as
information.
A typical computer consists of two parts: hardware and software.
Hardware is any electronic or mechanical part you can see or touch. Software is a
set of instructions, called a program, which tells the computer what to do. There are
three basic hardware sections: the central processing unit (CPU), main memory and
peripherals.
The CPU is the most influential component. It executes program instructions and
coordinates the activities of all the other units. In a way, it is the brain of the
computer.
The main memory holds the instructions and data which are being processed by the
CPU. It has two main sections: RAM (random access memory) and ROM (read only
memory). Peripherals are the physical units attached to the computer. They include
storage devices and input/output devices.
Storage devices include hard drives, DVD drives or flash drives. They provide a
permanent storage of both data and programs. Disk drives are used to read and write
data on disks. Input devices enable data to go into the computer’s memory. The most
common input devices are the mouse and the keyboard. Output devices enable us to
extract the finished product from the system. For example, the computer shows the
output on the monitor or prints the results onto the paper by means of printer.
On the rear panel of the computer there are several ports into which we can plug a
wide range of peripherals – a modem, a digital camera, a scanner, etc. they allow
communication between the computer and the devices. Modern desktop PCs have
USB ports and memory cards readers on the front panel.
Exercise 5. Match the words from the text with the correct meanings:
1. software
a. the brain of the computer
44
2. peripherals
3. main memory
4. hard drive
5. hardware
6. input
7. ports
or processed
8. output
9. CPU
b. physical parts that make up a computer system
c. programs which can be used on a particular computer system
d. the information which is presented to the computer
e. results produced by a computer
f. input devices attached to the CPU
g. section that holds programs and data while they are executed
h. magnetic deice used to store information
i. sockets into which an external device may be connected
Exercise 6. Answer the following questions.
1. What is hardware?
2. What is software?
3. What are main sections of the main memory?
4. What are peripherals?
5. What do input devices include?
6. What do output devices include?
7. What is the function of storage devices?
8. What are ports?
Exercise 7. Speak about parts of a computer.
Exercise 8. Read and render the article
All about the Parts of a Computer
Some parts of a computer are required while others are optional. The most
important computer component is the motherboard. Every component plugs into it in
one way or another, don't forget this when you buy, you do get what you pay for.
Picking an Asus or Gigabyte board will save you headaches both at building time and
down the road.
I see a ton of computer builds that buy discount or refurbished parts and expect it
to run like a high end computer. Please, take the time to find the components with
brand names that have what you want. This will ensure that you have a great
computer for years to come. Doing this will have the computer outdating before it
dies instead of the other way around.
Motherboard. From all the parts of a computer, the motherboard is the most
important, this is where we'll start. All of your system specifications are determined
by the motherboard. To pick one, I start by selecting which CPU I want, then, I find a
motherboard the will accommodate that CPU. Then the rest of the components are
picked based on what the motherboard supports.
If you need to update any of the drivers for your motherboard, we can find out how
to identify your motherboard, then just head to the manufacturers website to
download the latest drivers or tools.
CPU. The choice is completely yours when picking out your CPU or Central
Processing Unit. From all the parts of a computer this is the most basic computer part
45
for most people, and the engine that determines how fast your PC will go. Since
overheating the CPU is a possibility, don't forget a proper heat sink and thermal
compound to keep it nice and cool. Not only is it more reliable, but a good cooler will
help your system last longer, plus it will give you the option to overclock if your
motherboard supports it. Picking the best CPU can be tricky if you're doing it for the
first time. As far as parts of a computer go, this is one of my favorite parts to pick,
and one of the easiest to install.
Hard Drive. How many storage do you want? The Hard Drives are the parts of a
computer that will determine how much data, or files, your computer can hold.
Although not thought of as providing any speed, the hard drive is responsible for
more speed of the computer than you might think.
Small files, like word files or emails don't even really count. Picture and music
files are medium sized at about 3MB to 10MB. Finally large files like movie files, are
anywhere from 600MB to 2000MB or 2GB. This can give you a general guideline as
to how much storage you want to buy. You can have a single drive in a computer, or
hook up multiples to increase storage or have them work together for more speed.
The newest technology here is the invention of the solid state hard drive, they are
much faster than traditional style hard drives for a simple reason, there are no more
moving parts.
RAM. Next in the parts of a computer is RAM. It is the computer part that
provides the get up and goes. Information that is used often by the computer is stored
here and is available at the flick of a switch. Finding the best RAM and knowing
what the RAM timing need to be set at are crucial in making your computer reliable.
Video Card. The GPU or Graphics Processing Unit, often just called a Video Card
is the part of a computer that will determine how many images, and the quality of
display you will see on your Monitor. If you run any 3D applications, a video card is
much more important than if you just use it to open emails and surf the web. As you
can see in the picture my personal choice is the BFG video card.
Sound Card. The Best Sound Cards are the computer part that will determine the
quality of sound that goes to your speakers, and how many speakers you can have.
Most computer motherboards are starting to include this part of a computer as a built
in part. If you are really picky, you may want to upgrade, but generally speaking, the
defaults are already very good.
DVD-ROMs and Blu-Ray. Now add on a DVD-Rom or Blu-Ray Rom so you can
watch movies and play CDs from it. Plus this way you can also easily install
Windows and any other software you buy.
Computer Network Card. The Computer Network Card lets you connect your
computer to other computers, or to the Internet. These days most Motherboards come
with a built in Network Card, if it does not, you will need this to connect other
computers, either on a local area network, or the internet.
Optional Parts of a Computer
All the parts below I consider optional because you don't require any of them to
have a working computer.
USB Drive. These are especially effective if you need to quickly move files from
46
one computer to another that are not connected by a network. I also often use a USB
Jump Drive to store files which I want to backup. They work just like another drive
on a computer, and they are plug and play. With a high capacity and a compact size,
they're a really nice portable storage.
External Hard Drive. Another good alternative if a USB drive doesn't offer
enough storage, the part of a computer you'll be after is an external hard drive, or if
you prefer, get a USB hard drive case and make your own. Almost all of them are
plug and play and hold a lot of information. Just make sure if you're looking at
getting one for portability, that it does not require an external power source.
Computer Mouse. Whether it's point and click to open a program, or if you need to
get the fastest response to maximize your gaming experience. I never realized how
much more I could enjoy using my computer until I got a computer mouse that I
really like. For me wire, ball mice are a thing of the past, and something that can stay
with the initial invention. A cordless optical is a must.
Computer Keyboard. Even more important than a mouse when it comes to
enjoying your computer experience is the computer keyboard. Once you feel
comfortable with a keyboard, it will let you type effortlessly. Music controls, and
volume dials built in just help to make it the master control panel for your
workstation. If you want to go with a wireless keyboard, let me give you some tips to
help you get the best one. If you don't know how to type, or would like to take some
time at learning the computer keyboard we'll try to look after you as well.
Monitor. Although it's probably the first thing that catches your eye and lets you
know a computer is there, from a hardware point of view, I have it last because it's
not something that will effect the speed of the computer. That being said, picking the
best computer monitor for your budget is still very important, simply because you
need to like what you look at.
Exercise 9. Work in pairs. Study this diagram of the inside of a computer.
Can you label these components? Compare your answers with other students in
your class.
1. hard disk drive
2. motherboard
3. memory chips
4. power supply
5. processor
6. speaker
7. expansion cards
8. floppy drive
47
UNIT 8
STORAGE DEVICES
Exercise 1. Which device or format would be most suitable for storing these
things?
1. The operating system and the programs on a home computer.
2. An electronic encyclopedia for children.
3. A movie in digital format.
4. The music tracks by your favourite artist.
5. All the files generated by a company in one day.
6. The photos taken with a digital camera.
Exercise 2. Remember the following words and word combinations.
magnetic devices
disk drive
data
floppy disk
internal hard disk
surface
concentric circles
read/write heads
external unit
flash memory
non-volatile
,
Exercise 3. Read the text and translate it into Ukrainian.
Different Types of Storage
Magnetic Storage. Magnetic devices store data magnetically. A disk drive spins
the disk at high speed and reads its data or writes new data onto it.
A floppy disk drive uses 3.5 inch diskettes which can only hold 1.44 MB of
data; it’s often called A: drive and is relatively slow. Floppy drives are becoming
increasingly rare.
The inside of a hard drive Most PCs have one internal hard drive, usually
called C: drive. It is used to store the operating system, the programs and the user’s
files in a convenient way. A hard drive can hold hundreds of gigabytes of data.
When you format a disk, or prepare it for use, its surface is divided into concentric
circles called tracks. Each track is further divided into a number of sectors. The
computer remembers where information is stored by noting the track and sector
numbers in a directory.
The average time required for the read\ write heads to move and find data is called
access time; it is measured in milliseconds. Don’t confuse access time’ with transfer
48
rate, the rate of transmission of data from the disk to the CPU (e.g. 15 megabytes per
second).
A portable hard drive is an external unit with the drive mechanism and the media
all in one sealed case. You can use it to make a backup, a spare copy of your files, or
to transport data between computers. External hard drives are connected to the USB
or FireWire port of the computer. They can be small as a wallet but can have as much
capacity as internal drives.
Magnetic tapes and drives: A tape drive and reads and writes data on tapes. It is
sequential-access – i.e. to get to a particular point on the tape, it must go through all
the preceding points. Tapes can hold hundreds of gigabytes of data and are used for
data collection, backup and archiving.
Optical storage. Optical drives use a laser to read and write data, so they are not
affected by magnetic fields; but they are slower than hard drives. Modern DVD
recorders accept all CD and DVD formats.
Portable DVD players let you watch movies or TV, play games and listen to music,
wherever you are. They usually run on batteries, have a widescreen (rectangular 16:9
format) LCD and support multi-format playback, allowing you access to many file
formats including DVD video, JPEG pictures, MP3 music, etc. They have two builtin stereo speakers or headphones if you don’t want to disturb other people.
Optical discs and drives. Optical discs can data at much higher densities than
magnetic disks. They are therefore ideal for multimedia applications were images,
animation and sound occupy a lot of disc space. Furthermore, optical discs are not
affected by magnetic fields, meaning that they are secure and stable, and can be
transported through airport metal detectors without damaging the data. However,
optical drives are slower than hard drives.
Look at the table and compare CD and DVD:
CD (compact disks) can store
DVDs (digital versatile discs) are similar in
up to 650-700 MB of data
size to CDs (both are 1.2 mm thick), but they
differ in structure and capacity. DVDs have
more tracks and more pits (tiny holes) per track,
and can store from 4.7 GB to 17 GB of data,
movies, high-definition sound, etc., so they will
probably replace CDs, DVD formats include:
DVD-ROM (read only memory)
CD-ROMs
(read
only
memory) are ‘read-only’ units, so
you cannot changed data stored
on them (e.g. a dictionary or a
game).
DVD-R or DVD+R (recordable only once)
CD-R (recordable) discs are
write-once devices which let you
duplicate CDs
CD-RW (rewritable) discs
DVD-RW DVD+RW(rewritable, so it can be
49
enable you to write onto them in erased and reused many times)
multiple sessions, like a hard
disk.
At first sight, a DVD is similar to a CD. Both discs are 120 mm in diameter and
1.2 mm thick. They also both use a laser beam to read data. However they are very
different in internal structure and data capacity. In DVD, the tracks are very close
together, thus allowing more tracks. The pits in which data is stored are also smaller,
so there are more pits than track. As a result, a CD can hold 650-700MB, whereas a
basic DVD can hold 4.7 GB. In addition, a DVD can be double-sided and dual layer,
with a capacity of 17 GB.
CDs come in three different formats:
-CD-Roms (read-only memory) are read-only units, meaning you cannot change
the stored on them (for example, a dictionary or a game).
-CD-R (recordable) discs are write-once devices which let you duplicate music
CDs and other data CDs.
-CD-RW (rewritable) discs enable you to write onto them many times, just like a
hard disk.
DVDs also come in several format:
-DVD-ROMs are used in DVD computer drives. They allow for data archiving as
well as interactive content (for example, an encyclopedia or a movie).
-DVD-RW or DVD=RW discs can be erased and reused many times. They are
used to back up data files and to record audio and video.
The DVD drive used in computers is also called a DVD burner because it records
information by burning via a laser to a blank DVD disc. However, a DVD recorder
typically refers to a standalone unit which resembles a video cassette recorder. New
DVD recorders can play all CD and DVD formats. There are also portable DVD
players – handled devices which let you watch movies or TV, play games and listen
to music, wherever you are. They come with a built-in DVD drive and widescreen
(rectangular 16:9 format) LCD display. They usually support multi-format playback –
that is, they can play many file formats, including DVD-video, DivX, CD audio
discs, MP3 music and JPEG images.
HD-DVD and Blu-ray discs
These two competing formats are expected to replace current DVD as the standard
for watching movies at home. On one side are Toshiba, Microsoft and the DVD
Forum, who support the High Definition-DVD (HD-DVD). Sony, Panasonic,
Samsung, JVC and many movie studios are behind Blu-ray format.
A Blu-ray disc has a capacity of 25 GB (single layer), 50 GB (dual layer) and 100
GB (four layer). Unlike DVDs, which use a red laser to read and write data, Blu-ray
uses a blue-violet laser, hence its name. Blu-ray dusk can record and play back highdefinition television and digital audio, as well as computer data.
Magnetic storage. Magnetic storage devices store data by magnetizing particles on
a disk or tape.
A floppy disk is so called because it consists of a flexible sheet of plastic, coated
with iron oxide – a magnetizable material. A floppy disk drive spins at 360
50
revolutions per minute (rpm), so it’s relatively slow. However, a hard drive spins at
over 7,200 rpm and stores data on a stack of metal rotating disks called platters. This
means you can store much more data and retrieve information much faster.
New disks need to be formatted before you can use them, unless they come
preformatted from the manufacturer. When the disk is formatted, the operating
system (OS) organizes the disk surface into circular tracks and divides each track into
sectors. The OS creates a directory which will record the specific location of files.
When you save a file, the OS moves the read\write head of the drive towards empty
sectors, records the data and writes an entry for the directory. Later on, when you
open that file, the OS looks for its entry in the directory, moves the read\write head to
the correct sector, and reads the file in the RAM area. However, formatting erases
any existing files on a disk, so do not format disks on which data that you don’t want
to lose is stored.
The OS allows you to create one or more partitions on your hard drive, in effect
dividing it into several logical parts. Partitions let you install more than one operating
system (e.g. Windows and Linux) on your computer. You may also decide to split
your hand drive because you want to store the OS and programs on one partition and
your data files on another; this allows you to reinstall the OS when a problem occurs,
without affecting the data partition.
The average time required for the read\write heads to move and find data is called
seek time (or access time) and it is measured in milliseconds (ms); most hard drives
have a seek time of 7 to 14 ms. Don’t confuse this with transfer rate – the average
speed required to transmit data from the disk to the CPU, measured in megabytes per
second.
How to protect your hard drive
- don’t hit or move the computer while the hard drive is spinning. Hard drives are
very sensitive to vibration and shocks, especially they are operating; when the
read/write head touching the rotating disk, it can scratch and damage the disk surface.
This is known as head crash.
- you shouldn’t turn your computer off and quickly. Wait at least ten seconds to
ensure that the drive has stopped spinning.
- check your hard drive regularly for logical and physical errors. To check and
repair a drive, you can use a disk diagnosis utility like Windows ScanDisk.
- to minimize the risk of data loss or corruption, you should install an up-to-date
virus scanner. You should also back up your hard drive regularly.
Removable flash memory
Flash memory is solid-state, rewritable memory; it is non-volatile, so it retains data
when the power is turned off. This explains its popularity in small devices.
Flash memory cards such as Compact Flash or Secure Digital are found in
cameras, PDAs and music players.
Flash drives, also known as thumb or pen drives, are connected to a USB port of
the computer. They let you save and transfer data easily.
51
Exercise 4. Read the text and decide whether these statements are true or false.
Correct the false ones.
1. A hard drive spins at the same speed as a floppy disk drive.
2. If you format a hard drive that has files on it, the files will be deleted.
3. Hard drives cannot be partitioned to run separate operating systems on the disk.
4. Seek time and transfer rate mean the same thing.
5. Disk drives are not shock resistant, especially in operating mode.
Exercise 5. Match the words (1-5) with their definitions (a-e).
1. formatted
a. a file system that defines the structure for keeping
track on the files
2. directory
b. the part of a drive that reads and records data on a
disk
3. read/write head
c. to make a copy of data or software in case the
original disk is damaged
4. head crash
d. initialized; when the tracks and sectors on magnetic
disks are set
5. back up
e. a serious disk malfunction; when the read/ write
head touches the rotating disk
Exercise 6. Look at the text above and find.
1. The CD and DVD formats that can be rewritten many times.
2. The CD and DVD formats that can be written to by the user only once.
3. The CD and DVD formats that can be read by a computer but not written to.
4. The type of cards used in digital cameras.
5. A type of drive that plugs into a USB port and lets you share photos and music
with friends.
6. The memory without moving parts; its erasable, non-volatile and used in small
devices.
7. The expression that means to “initialize a disk and prepare it to receive data”.
Exercise 7. Read the text again and make notes about the features of CDs,
DVDs and Blu-ray discs.
Capacity and format
Possible uses
CD
DVD
Blu-ray
Exercise 8. Complete these sentences with the words from the box.
capacity
storage
archiving
hold
secondary
1. There are basically three types of magnetic _____ device available to the
computer user-hard drives, diskettes and tapes.
2. The ______ of a 3.5” floppy disk is only 1.44 MB.
3. Hard drives can ______ hundreds of times more data than floppy disks.
52
4. A portable hard drive is a good choice for ______ storage.
5. Magnetic tapes are used for ____ information that you no longer need to use
regularly.
Exercise 9. Complete the sentences with the words from the box:
hard disk; access time;
floppy disk drive;
portable hard drive;
tracks;
sectors;
backup;
transfer rate
1. The first rule of data storage is to make a ______ of all important files.
2. A ______ is slower the drive and can only hold 1.44 MB disks.
3. The _____ inside your PC is made of aluminum alloy covered with a magnetic
coating. This makes the disk itself a rigid plate, hence its name.
4. The ___ are circles around the disk and the ____ are segments within each circle.
5. This hard drive is a 60 GB IBM model with a fast ____ of 8 ms.
6. The ______ is the rate of transmission of data from the disk to the CPU. This is
usually described in megabytes per second.
7. Apple’s iPod music player can double as a ____ for transporting computer data.
Exercise 10. Complete this product description with words from the text above.
The Panasonic DVD-LS91 is a top-of-the-range (1) _____, which provides pure
entertainment wherever you go.
It has a big 9 inch built-in (2) ______ LCD, so you can really enjoy movies. The
built-in stereo-speakers allow you to listen along, or if you want to listen alone, just
plug in a pair of (3) _____.
This portable machine provides (4) _____ -_____ _____, so you can play DVD
Audio/Video, CD-R/RW, DVD-RAM, DivX and MP3 files. Its compact design
features a built-in rechargeable 6 hour battery pack.
The DVD-LS91 allows 6 hours of playback, and provides a perfect way to
entertain yourself and your kids during long trips.
Exercise 11. In pairs, discuss what you should or shouldn’t do to protect your
data. Use the suggestions below.
1. Your anti-virus program regularly, since new viruses are created everyday
(update).
2. Discs in a protective case (store).
3. Passwords and security devices to protect confidential information (use).
4. On discs with permanent marker pens (write).
5. The disc into the disc carefully (insert).
6. Floppies or hard drives near magnets; they can damage the data stored on them
(leave).
Note: disc – optical media; disk – magnetic storage media
Exercise 12. Flash memory is used in many handled devices. Match the
descriptions (1-6) with the pictures (a-f).
53
1. This handheld console lets you play stored on ROM game cards, which have a
small amount of flash memory to save user data, for example high scores.
2. This flash memory card is used as ‘digital film’ to store images on a digital
camera.
3. This wireless LAN card allows laptop and PDA users to access the Internet from
any Wi-Fi access point.
4. This USB flash pen drive is the latest mobile drive for your computer.
5. It looks like an ordinary watch, but this USB drive from Edge Tech can store up
to 1GB of flash memory. It will let you save and transfer your photos, songs and data
files easily.
6. This flash-based player provides everything you need to play music and store
data on the go. It also comes with a built-in FM radio and voice recorder.
Exercise 13. Speak about.
1. The advantages and disadvantages of optical discs over the magnetic discs.
2. The storage capacity of a double-sided, dual layer DVD.
3. The difference between a DVD burner and a DVD recorder.
4. The feature of portable DVD player which allows the user to play different
formats.
5. Two possible successors to DVDs.
6. Where the Blu-ray format gets its name from.
Exercise 14. Read the following text and answer these questions.
1. What is flash memory?
2. What are the differences between RAM memory and flash memory?
3. What can devices which use multi-level cell technology do?
4. What are the differences between flash drives and external hard drives?
5. What is the advantage of using U3 technology in flash drives?
6. How much data can a flash memory card hold?
7. What is the name of the flashcard created by Sony for digital cameras?
Memory in a flash
54
Flash memory is a type of non-volatile memory that can be electronically erased
and reprogrammed. Its name was invented by Toshiba to express how much faster it
could be erased - “in a flash”, which means very quickly.
Unlike RAM, which is volatile, flash memory retains the information stored in the
chip when the power is turned off. This makes it ideal for use in digital cameras,
laptops, network switches, video game cards, mobile phones and portable multimedia
players. In addition, it offers fast read access times (although not as fast as RAM),
with transfer rates of 12 MB per second. Unlike ROM chips, flash memory chips are
rewritable, so you can update programs via software.
Inside the chip, data is stored in several floating gate transistors, called cells. Each
cell traditionally stores one bit of data. New devices have a multilevel cell structure
so they can store more than one bit per cell. The chips are constructed with either
NOR or NAND gates. NOR chips function like a computer’s main memory, while
NAND work like a hard drive.
Flash memory is used in several ways:
- Many PCs have their BIOS (basic input/output system) stored on a flash memory
chip so it can be updated if necessary.
- Modems use flash memory because it allows the manufacturer to support new
protocols.
- USB flash drives are used to save and move MP3 and other data files between
computers. They are more easily transported than external hard drives because they
use solid-state technology, meaning that they don’t have fragile moving parts that can
break if dropped. However, USB flash drives have less storage capacity than hard
drives.
- New U3 smart drives allow users to store both applications and data. They have
two drive partitions and can carry applications that run on the host computer without
requiring installation.
- Flash memory cards are used to store images on cameras, to back up data on
PDAs, to transfer games in video consoles, to record voice and music on MP3 players
or to store movies on MP4 players. They are as small as stamp, and capacity can
range from 8 MB to several gigabytes. The only limitation is that flash cards are often
not interchangeable between devices.
The future of hard drives may be hybrid hard drives. Hybrid hard drives combine a
magnetic hard disk and a flash memory into one device. This allows computer to
boot, or start, more quickly, and also reduces power consumption.
Exercise 15. Find words or phrases in the text with the following meanings.
1. permanent, able to hold data without power.
2. able to be rewritten many times.
3. different sections of a disk drive or storage area.
4. to make a copy of a file so that the original is not lost.
5. transferred to another device.
6. a peripheral device that reads and writes flash memory cards.
7. a product that integrates two different technologies.
55
UNIT 9
INPUT AND OUTPUT DEVICES
Exercise 1. Read the description of input devices and say which of them you
have ever deal with.
Input devices are the pieces of hardware which allow entering information into the
computer. The most common are the keyboard and the mouse. We can also interact
with a computer by using one of these: a light pen, a scanner, a trackball, a graphics
tablet, a game controller or a microphone.
Exercise 2. Study the vocabulary
Alphanumeric keys
Dedicated keys
Numeric keypads
Hand-held device
Button
Cordless (wireless) mouse
Voice recognition system
Flatbed
Camcorder
Edit
Dot-matrix
Ink-jet
Description language
Cathode Ray Tube
–
,
,
Exercise 3. Read and translate the text.
Input Devices
The keyboard. A standard keyboard has such groups of keys:
1. Cursor control keys include arrow keys that move the insertion point up, down,
right and left, and keys such as End, Home, Page Up, Page Down, which are used in
word processing to move around a long document.
2. Alphanumeric keys represent letters and numbers, as arranged on a typewriter.
3. Function keys appear on the top of the keyboard and can be programmed to do
special tasks.
4. Dedicated keys are used to issue commands or to produce alternative characters,
e.g. the CTRL key or the Alt key.
5. A numeric keypad appears to the right of the main keyboard. The Num Lock key
is to switch from numbers to editing keys.
The mouse. A mouse is a hand-held device that let you move a pointer (or cursor)
and select items on the screen. It has one or more buttons to communicate with the
PC. A scroll wheel lets you move through your documents on web pages. The pointer
looks like an I-bar, an arrow or a pointing hand.
Optical mouse has an optical sensor instead of a ball underneath.
56
A cordless (wireless) mouse has no cable; it sends data via infrared signals or radio
waves.
Voice input. Today you can also interact with your computer by voice with a
voice-recognition system that converts voice into text, so you can dictate text directly
onto your word processor or email program. You can also control your PC with voice
commands; this means you can launch programs, open, save or print files. Some
systems let you search the Web or chat using your voice, instead of the keyboard.
Scanners. Input devices such as scanners and cameras allow you to capture and
copy images into a computer.
A scanner is a peripheral that reads images and converts them into electronic codes
which can be understood by s computer. There are different types.
- A flatbed is built like a photocopier and is for use on a desktop; it can capture
text, colour images and even small 3D objects.
- A film scanner is used to scan film negatives or 35 mm slides – pictures on
photographic film, mounted in a frame.
- A pen scanner looks like a pen; you can scan the text, figures, barcodes and
handwritten numbers.
- A hand-held scanner is small and T-shaped, ideal to capture small pictures and
logos.
Barcode scanners read barcodes on the products sold in shops and send the price to
the computer in the cash register. Barcodes consist of a series of black and white
stripes used to give products a unique identification number.
The resolution of a scanner is measured in dpi or dots per inch. For example, a
1,200 dpi scanner.
Most scanners come with Optical Character recognition software. OCR allows you
to scan pages of the text and save them into your word processor; they can then be
edited.
What does a scanner do? A scanner “sees” images and converts the printed text
or pictures into electronic codes that can be understood by the computer. With a
flatbed colour scanner, the paper with the image is placed face down on a glass
screen, as with a photocopier. Beneath the glass are the lighting and measured
devices. Once the scanner is activated, it reads the image as a series of dots and then
generates the digitized image that is sent to the computer and stored as a file.
The scanner operates by using three rotating lamps, each of which has a different
coloured filter: red, green and blue. The resulting three separate images are combined
into one by appropriate software.
Digital cameras. A digital cameras don’t use film. Photos are stored as digital data
(bits made up of 1s and 0s), usually on a tiny storage device known as a flash
memory card. You can connect the camera or memory card to a PC and then alter the
images using a program like Adobe Photoshop, or you can view the images on a TV
set. Many printers have a special socket so that you can print images directly from a
memory card or camera.
57
What does a digital camera do? A digital camera takes photos electronically and
converts them into digital data (binary codes made up of 1s and 0s). It doesn’t use the
film found in a traditional camera; instead it has a special light-sensitive silicon chip.
Photographs are stored in the camera’s memory card before being sent to the
computer. Some cameras can also be connected to a printer or a TV set to make
viewing images easier. This is usually the case with camera phones – mobile phones
with a built-in cameras.
Digital video cameras and webcams. Webcams let you send and receive live
video pictures through the Internet. They’re primarily used for video conferences –
video calls – but they can be used to record photos and video onto your hard disk.
The resolution of webcams is expressed in megapixels (million pixels). Webcams
connect to PC via a USB (universal serial bus) or FireWire port; they display video at
24 to 30 frames (pictures) per second. Some include a headset with a microphone and
earpiece.
What does a camcorder do? A camcorder, or digital video camera, records
moving pictures and converts them into digital data that can be stored and edited by a
computer with special video editing software.
Digital video cameras are used by home users to create their own movies, or by
professionals in computer art and video conferencing.
They are also used to send live video images via the internet. In this case they are
called web cameras, or webcams.
Output devices: printers. A printer is a device that prints your text or graphics on
paper:
-the output on paper or acetate sheets is called printout or hard copy.
-A program in your computer, called the printer diver, converts data into a form
that your printer can understand.
- A printer spooler stores files to be printed when the printer is ready. It lets you
change the order of documents in the queue and cancel specific print jobs.
- The output quality, or resolution, is measured in dpi or dots per inch
- The speed of your printer is measured in pages per minute (ppm)
- In a network, users can share a printer connected to a print server, a computer that
stores the files waiting to be printed.
Types of printers. A dot-matrix printer uses a group, or matrix, of pins to create
precise dots. A printer head containing tiny pins strikes an inked ribbon to make
letters and graphics. This impact printing technology allows shops, for example, to
print multi-part forms such bas receipts and invoices, so it’s useful when self-copying
paper is needed. It has two important disadvantages: noise and a relatively low
resolution (from 72 to 180 dpi).
An ink-jet (also called bubble-jet) printer generates an image by spraying tiny,
precise drops of ink onto the paper. The resolution ranges from 300 to 1,200 dpi,
suitable for small quantities or home use.
A standard ink-jet has a three-colour cartridge, plus a black cartridge. Professional
ink-jets have five-colour cartridges, plus black; some can print in wide format,
ranging from 60 cm up to 5 meters (e.g. for printing advertising graphics).
58
Some ink-jet based printers can perform more than one task. They are called multifunction printers because they can work as a scanner, a fax and a photocopier as well
as a printer. Some units accept memory cards and print photos directly from a
camera.
A laser printer uses a laser beam to fix the ink to the paper. A laser works like a
photocopier; a powder called toner is attracted to paper by an electrostatic charge and
then fused on by a hot roller.
Laser printers are fast and produce a high resolution of 1,200 to 2,400 dpi, so they
are ideal for businesses and for proofing professional graphics work.
Laser use a page description language or PDL which describes how to print the
text and draw the images on the page. The best-known languages are Adobe
PostScript and HP Printer Control Language.
A plotter is a special type of printer which uses ink and fine pens held in a carriage
to draw detailed designs on paper. It’s used in computer-aided design, maps, 3-D
technical illustrations, etc.
Output devices: display screens. CRTs and LCDs:
The screen of a computer is often known as the monitor, or VDU (visual display
unit). Inside the computer, there is a video card which processes images and sends
signals to the monitor.
When choosing a monitor, you have to take into account a few basics.
- Type of display – the choice is between a CRT or an LCD screen. The Cathode
Ray Tube of a monitor is similar to a traditional TV set. It has three electron guns
(one for each primary colour: red, green and blue) that strike the inside of the screen,
which is coated with substances called phosphors, which glow and create colours.
CRTs are cheap, but they are heavy, can flicker and emit radiation. A Liquid Cristal
Display is made from flat plates with liquid crystal solution between them. The
crystals block the light in different quantities to create the image. Active-matrix
LCDs use TFT (thin film transistor) technology, in which each pixel has its own
transistor switch. They offer better quality and take up less space, so they are
replacing CRTs.
- Screen size – the viewing area is measured diagonally; in other words, a 17”
screen measures 17 inches from the top left corner to the bottom right.
- Resolution – the clarity of the image depends on the number of pixels (short for
picture elements) contained on a display, horizontally and vertically. A typical
resolution is 1,024x768. The sharpness of images is effected by dot pitch, the
distance between the pixels on the screen, so a dot pitch of 0.28 mm or less produce a
sharp image.
- Brightness – the luminance of images is measured in cd\m2 (candela per square
meter).
- Colour depth – the number of colours a monitor can display. For example, a
VGA monitor produces 256 colours, enough for home use; a Super VGA can produce
up to 16.7 million colours, so is ideal for photographic work and video games.
- Refresh rate – the number of times that the image is drawn each second. If a
monitor has a refresh rate of 75 Hertz (Hz), it means that the screen is scanned 75
59
times per second. If this rate is low, you will notice a flicker, which can cause eye
fatigue.
How screen displays work
- Displays, often called monitors or screens, are the most-used output device on
a computer. They provide instant feedback by showing you text and graphic images
as you work or play.
- Most desktop displays use Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) or Carthode Ray
Tube (CRT) technology, while nearly all portable computing devices, such as
laptops, incorporate LCDs. Because of their slimmer design and lower energy
consumption, LCD monitor (also called flat panel or flat screen displays) are
replacing CRTs.
Basic features:
- Resolution refers to the number of dots of colour, known as pixels (picture
elements), contained in a display. It is expressed by identifying the number of pixels
on the horizontal and vertical axes. A typical resolution is 1024x768. A pixel is a
combination of red, green and blue subpixels.
- Two measurements describe the size of your display: the aspect ratio and the
screen size. Historically, computer displays, like most televisions, have had an aspect
ratio of 4:3 – the width of the screen to the height is four to three. For widescreen
LCD displays, the aspect ratio is 16:9, very useful viewing DVD movies, playing
games and displaying multiple windows side by side. High-definition TV also uses
this format. The viewable screen size is measured diagonally, so a 19” screen
measures 19” from the top left to the bottom right.
- Inside the computer there is a video adapter, or graphics card, which processes
images and sends signals to the monitor. CRT monitors use a VGA (video graphic
adapter) cable, which converts digital signals into analogue signals. LCD monitors
use a DVI (digital video interface) connection.
- Colour depth refers to the number of colours a monitor can display. This
depends on the number of bits used to describe the colour of a single pixel. For
example, an old VGA monitor with an 8-bit depth can generate 256 colours and a
SuperVGA with a 24-bit depth can generate 16.7 million colours. Monitors with a 32bit depth are used in digital video, animation and video games to get certain effect
Display technologies
- An LCD is made of two glass plates with a liquid crystal material between
them. The crystals block the light in different quantities to create the image. Activematrix LCDs use TFT (thin film transistor) technology, in which each pixel has its
own switch. The amount of light the LCD monitor produces is called brightness or
luminance, measured in cd\m2 (candela per square metre).
- A CRT monitor is similar to a traditional TV set. It contains millions of tiny
red, green and blue phosphor dots that glow when struck by an electron beam that
travels across the screen and create a visible image.
- PCs can be connected to video projectors, which project the image onto a large
screen. They are used for presentations and home theatre applications.
60
- In a plasma screen, images are created by a plasma discharge which contains
noble (non-harmful) gases. Plasma TVs allow for larger screens and wide viewing
angles, making them ideal for movies.
- Organic Light-Emitting Diodes (OLEDs) are thin-film LED displays that don’t
require a backlight to function. The material emits light when stimulated by an
electrical current, which is known as electroluminescence. They consume less energy,
produce brighter colours and are flexible.
Exercise 4. Match the descriptions (1-8) with the names of the keys (a-h).
1. A long key at the bottom of the keyboard. Each time it is pressed, it produces a
blank space.
2. It moves the cursor to the beginning of a new line. It is also used to confirm
commands.
3. It works in combination with other keys. For example, you press this key and C
to copy the selected text.
4. It removes the character to the left of the cursor or any selected text.
5. It produces UPPER CASE characters.
6. It produces UPPER CASE letters, but it does not affect numbers and symbols.
7. It moves the cursor horizontally to the right for a fixed number of spaces (in
tabulation and data fields).
8. They are used to move cursor, as an alternative to the mouse.
E. tab
A. arrow keys
F. space bar
B. return\enter
G. backspace
C. Caps Lock
H. Ctrl
D. shift
Exercise 5. Match the names of devices (1-8) with the functions (a-h).
5. joystick
1. touch screen
6. microphone
2. barcode reader
7. mouse
3. digital camera
8. scanner
4. light pen
A. to play computer game
B. to copy images
C. to read price labels in a shop
D. to select text and click on links on web pages
E. to enter drawings and scratches into a computer
F. to input voice commands and dictate text
G. to draw pictures or select menu options directly on the screen
H. to take and store pictures and then download them to a computer
Exercise 6. Find terms in the text which corresponds to the definitions.
1. A container that holds the ink in an ink-jet printer.
2. Powdered ink used in laser printers.
3. Small needles that press on the inked ribbon to make the characters on paper.
61
4. Printer technology that produces text and pictures by hammering pins against a
ribbon and the paper.
5. A language that tells a printer how to print a document.
6. A peripheral which combines a printer, a fax machine and photocopying and
scanning capability into one device.
Exercise 7. Match each term with the correct definition.
1. phosphors
2. LCD screen
3. pixel
4. dot pitch
5. refresh rate
A. the frequency at which a monitor renews its image, measured in Hz
B. a flat-panel display which works by emitting light through a special liquid
C. the space between a display’s pixels
D. the smallest element in a displayed image
E. materials that emit light and produce colours when they are activated by an
electron beam
Exercise 8. In groups, decide which input device is best for.
1. Controlling fast-moving objects in a game.
2. Reading the price of things in a shop.
3. Making copies of a page of text and graphics.
4. Storing sounds on a computer.
5. Producing pictures of people and places for storing in a computer.
6. Controlling a computer using speech.
7. Typing text into a computer.
Exercise 9. Complete these definitions with words from the box.
resolution; pixel; aspect ratio; colour depth; video adapter; plazma screen
1. ____ - the smallest unit on a display screen or bitmapped image
2. ____ - an expansion card that generates the video signal sent to a computer
display
3. ____ - the width of the screen in proportion to its height
4. ____ - also called gas discharge display
5. ____ - the number of pixels contained in a display, horizontally and vertically
6. ____ - the number of bits used to hold a colour pixel; this determines the
maximum number of colours that can be displayed
Exercise 10. Complete the sentences using the words from the text.
1. Scanners and cameras are _____ devices used to transfer images into a format
that can be understood by computers.
2. A ____ lets you copy photos and printed documents into your PC.
62
3. It has become one of life’s most familiar sounds – the beep of the supermarket
till whenever a ____ is scanned.
4. If you need to scan 35 mm _____ you should go for a dedicated 35 mm film
scanner which concentrates all its dots into a tiny area.
5. This scanner has a resolution of 300x600 ____.
6. A _____ scanner is used to capture lines of text, barcodes and numbers.
7. Most digital cameras use flash _____ cards to store photos.
8. _____ scanners have a flat surface and take at least A4-sized documents.
9. To scan photographic negatives or slides you will need a ____ scanner.
Exercise 11. Complete the press release with words from the box.
Press release: a digital camera
colour megapixels shot video optical brighter reduction
Kodak has introduced the Easy Share M753 digital camera, with 7.0 (1) ___
resolution, a hinge 2.5-inch LCD screen, and a professional 3x (2) ___ zoom lens. It
is the first camera to incorporate proprietary Kodak Perfect Touch Technology. At
the touch of a button, this innovative feature creates better, (3) ___ pictures by
bringing out detail in shadows without affecting lighter areas. It’s ideal for
underexposed pictures caused by shooting beyond the flash range or in adverse
lighting conditions.
The M753 uses the exclusive Kodak Colour Science chip for phenomenal image
quality with rich (4) ___ and accurate skin tones. Seventeen programmed scene
modes (e.g. party, fireworks, children) and five colour modes (high, low, natural,
sepia, and black and white) help capture the best (5) ___ with the least effort.
Other features include cropping, auto picture rotation, digital red-eye (6) ___, and
blurry picture alert. For capturing more than just still pictures, the camera also
features high-quality (VGA) (7) ___ capture and playback.
Exercise 12. Complete this text about the Mouse with the verbs from the box.
click double-click drag select move control
MOUSE ACTIONS
A mouse allows you to (1) ___ the cursor and move around the screen very
quickly. Making the same movements with the arrow keys on the keyboard would
take much longer. As you (2) ___ the mouse on your desk, the pointer usually looks
like an I-bar, an arrow, or a pointing hand, depending on what you are doing.
A mouse has one or more buttons to communicate with the computer. For
example, if you want to place the insertion point or choose a menu option, you just
(3) ___ (press and release) on the mouse button, and the option is chosen.
The mouse is also used to (4) ___ text and items on the screen. You can highlight
text to be deleted, copied or edited in some way.
The mouse is widely used in graphics and design. When you want to move an
image, you position the pointer on the object you want to move, press the mouse
bottom and (5) ___ the image to a new location on the screen. Similarly, the mouse is
63
used to change the shape of graphic object. For example you want to convert a square
into a rectangle, you (6) ___ one corner of the square and stretch into a rectangle.
The mouse is also used to start a program or open a document you put the pointer
on the file name and (7) ___ on the name – that is, you rapidly press and release the
mouse button twice.
Exercise 13. Read the text again and answer these questions.
1. Which device is used to input text and graphic images from a printed page?
2. How does a scanner send information to the computer?
3. How do digital cameras store photos?
4. What features allows mobile phones users to take pictures?
5. Which device would you use to take digital video?
6. What kind of software is used to manipulate video clips on the computer?
7. How is the screen size measured?
8. What technology is used by active-matrix LCDs?
Exercise 14. Label the picture of a standard keyboard with the groups of keys
(1-5).
1. Cursor control keys include arrow keys that move the insertion point up,
down, right and left, and keys such as End, Home, Page Up, and Page Down, which
are used in word processing to move around a long document.
2. Alphanumeric keys represent letters and numbers, as arranged on a typewriter.
3. Function keys appear at the top of the keyboard and can be programmed to do
special tasks.
4. Dedicated keys are used to issue commands or to produce alternative
characters, e.g. the Ctrl key or the Alt key.
5. A numeric keypad appears to the right of the main keyboard. The Num Lock
key is used to switch from numbers to editing keys.
Exercise 15. Match the descriptions (1-8) with the names of the keys (a-h). Then
find them on the keyboard (the exercise below).
a. arrow keys
b. return/enter
c. Caps Lock
d. shift
e.
tab
f. space bar g. backspace
h. Ctrl
1. A long key at the bottom of the keyboard. Each time it is pressed, it produces a
blank space.
64
2. It moves the cursor to the beginning of a new line. It is also used to confirm
commands.
3. It works in combination with other keys. For example, you press this key and C
to copy the selected text.
4. It removes the character to the left of the cursor or any selected text.
5. It produces UPPER CASE characters.
6. It produces UPPER CASE letters, but it doesn’t affect numbers and symbols.
7. It moves the cursor horizontally to the right for a fixed number of spaces (in
tabulations and data fields).
8. They are used to move the cursor, as an alternative to the mouse.
65
UNIT 10
OPERATING SYSTEMS
Exercise 1. Describe the picture. What does the Operating System consist of?
Exercise 2. Study this text. What do you think it means?
Now read this text to check your answer and to find the answers to these questions:
1. What difference is there between applications software and operating system?
2. Why is the supervisor program the most important operating system program?
3. What is the difference between resident and non-resident program?
4. What are the main functions of an operating system?
Operating System: Hidden Software
When a brand new computer comes off the factory assembly line, it can do
nothing. The hardware needs software to make it work. Are we talking about
applications software such as word processing or spreadsheet software? Partly. But
an applications software package does not communicate directly with the hardware.
Between the applications software and the hardware interface – an operating system.
An operating system is a set of programs that lies between applications software and
the computer hardware.
The most important program in operating system in the operating system, the
program that manages the operating system, is the supervisor program most of which
remains in memory and is thus referred to as resident. The supervisor controls the
entire operating system and loads into memory other operating system program
(called non-resident) from disk storage only as needed.
An operating system has three main functions: (1) manage the computer’s
resources, such as the central processing unit, memory, disk drives, and printers, (2)
establish a user interface, and (3) execute and provide services for applications
66
software. Keep in mind, however, that much of the work of an operating system is
hidden from the user. In particular, the first listed function, managing the computer’s
resources, is taken care of without the user being aware of the details. Furthermore,
all input and output operations, although invoked by an applications program, are
actually carried out by the operating system.
Exercise 3. Find the answers to these questions in the following text.
1. What did Linux Torvalds use to write the Linux kernel?
2. How was the Linux kernel first made available to the general public?
3. What is a programmer likely to do with source code?
4. Why will most software companies not sell you their source code?
5. What type of utilities and applications are provided in a Linux distribution?
6. What graphical user interfaces are mentioned in the text?
LINUX
Linux has its roots in a student project. In 1992, an undergraduate called Linux
Torvalds was studying computer science in Helsinki, Finland. Like most computer
science courses, a big component of it was taught an (and about) UNIX. UNIX was
the wonder operating system of the 1970s and 1980s: both a textbook example of the
principles of operating system design, and sufficiency robust to be the standard OS in
engineering and scientific computing. But UNIX was a commercial product, and cost
more than a student could pay.
Annoyed by the shortcomings of Minix (a compact UNIX clone written as a
teaching aid by Professor Andy Tannenbaum) Linux set out to write his own ‘kernel’
– the core of an operating system that handles memory allocations, talks to hardware
devices, and makes sure everything keeps running. He used the GNU programming
tools developed by Richard Stallman’s Free Software Foundation, an organization of
volunteers dedicated to fulfilling Stallman’s ideal of making paying. When he’d
written a basic kernel, he released the source code to the Linux kernel on the Internet.
Source code is important. It’s the original form which complied programs are
generated. If you don’t have the source code to a program, you can’t modify it to fix
bugs or add new features. Most software companies won’t sell you their source code,
or will only do so for an eye-watering price, because they believe that if they make it
available it will destroy their revenue stream.
What happened next was astounding, from the conventional, commercial software
industry point of view – and utterly predictable to anyone who knew about the Free
Software Foundation. Programmers (mostly academics and students) began using
Linux.
They found that it didn’t do things they wanted it to do – so they fixed it. And
where they improved it, they sent the improvements to Linux, who rolled them into
the kernel. And Linux began to grow. There’s a term for this model of software
development; it’s called Open Source. Anyone can contribute to it. If you use it
heavily you may want to extend or develop or fix bugs in it – and it is so easy to give
your fixes back to the community that most people do so.
An operating system kernel on its own isn’t a lot of use; but Linux was
67
purposefully designed as a near-clone of UNIX, and there is a lot of software out
there that is free and was designed to compile on Linux. By about 1992, the first
‘distributions’ appeared.
A distribution is the Linux-user term for a complete operating system kit, complete
with the utilities and applications you need to make it do useful things – command
interpreters, programming tools, text editors, typesetting tools, and graphical user
interfaces based on the X windowing system. X is a standard in academic and
scientific computing, but not hitherto common on PCs; it’s a complex distributed
operating system on which people implement graphical interfaces like KDE and
Gnome.
As more and more peole got to know about Linux, some of them began to port
the Linux kernel to run on non-standard computes. Because it’s free, Linux is now
the most widely-ported operating system there is.
Exercise 4. Re-read the text to find the answers to these questions.
1. Match the terms in Table A with the statements in Table B.
Table A
a) Kernel
b) Free Software Foundation
c) Source code
d) Open Source
e) A distribution
f) X
Table B
1. A type of software development where any programmer can develop or fix
bugs in the software
2. The original systems program from which compiled programs are generated
3. A complete operating system kit with the utilities and applications you need
to make it do useful things.
4. A standard distributed windowing system on which people implement
graphical interfaces
5. An organization of volunteers dedicates to making good software that
anyone could use without paying.
6. The core of an operating system that handles memory allocation, talks to
hardware devices, and makes sure everything keeps running.
Exercise 5. Mark the following statements as True or False. Correct the false
ones.
1. Linux was created in the 1980s.
2. Minix was created by a university student.
3. Linux is based on UNIX.
4. Minix is based on UNIX.
5. Linux runs on more types of computer than any other operating system.
68
Exercise 6. Read and translate the text.
OPERATING SYSTEMS
When computers were first introduced in the 1940's and 50's, every programme
written had to provide instructions that told the computer how to use devices such as
the printer, how to store information on a disk, as well as how to perform several
other tasks not necessarily related to the programme.
Today, operating systems control and manage the use of hardware devices such as
the printer or mouse. They also provide disk management by letting you store
information in files. The operating system also lets you run programmes such as the
basic word processor.
DOS is the most commonly used PC operating system. DOS is an abbreviation for
disk operating system. DOS was developed by a company named Microsoft. MSDOS is an abbreviation for «Microsoft DOS». Over the past decade, DOS has
undergone several changes.
Windows NT (new technology) is an operating system developed by Microsoft.
NT is an enhanced version of the popular Microsoft Windows 3.0, 3.1 programmes.
NT requires a 386 processor or greater and 8 Mb of RAM. For the best NT
performance, you have to use a 486 processor with about 16 Mb or higher. Unlike the
Windows, which runs on top of DOS, Windows NT is an operating system itself.
However, NT is DOS compatible.
OS/2 is a PC operating system created by IBM. Like NT, OS/2 is DOS compatible
and provides a graphical user interface that lets you run programmes with a click of a
mouse. Also like NT, OS/2 performs best when you are using a powerful system.
UNIX is a multi-user operating system that allows multiple users to access the
system. Traditionally, UNIX was run on large mini computers to which users
accessed the systems using terminals and not PC's. UNIX allowed each user to
simultaneously run the programmes they desire. Unlike NT and OS/2, UNIX is not
DOS compatible. Most users would not purchase UNIX for their own use.
Exercise 7. Match words and word-combinations in column A with those in
column B.
smart
to enhance
are shipped
to consume
click
to release
advancement
on top of DOS
capability
file
DOS
to undergo
compatible
69
Exercise 8. Insert the words given below:
UNIX
DOS
NT
OS/2
Windows 95
1. Like NT ___ is DOS compatible and provides a graphical user interface that lets
you run programmes with a click of a mouse.
2. ___ is the most commonly used PC operating system.
3. ___ is a multi-user operating system that allows multiple users to access the
system.
4. ___ is an operating system developed by Microsoft, an enhanced version of the
popular Microsoft Windows programmes.
5. The usage of ___ is so simple that even little kids learn how to use it very
quickly.
Exercise 9. Complete the sentences using information from the text:
1. Operating systems control and ...
2. Windows NT is ...
3. New series of operating systems are ...
4. In the 1940's and 50's every programme had to ...
5. Windows 95 and 98 are ...
6. The advantage of using NT is ...
Exercise 10. Agree or disagree with the following statements. Prove your answer
using the text.
1. When computers were first introduced in 40's and 50's programmers had to
write programmes to instruct CD-ROMs, laser printers and scanners.
2. The operation system controls and manages the use of the hardware and the
memory.
3. There are no commands available in operating systems, they are only in word
processor.
4. Microsoft developed MS-DOS to compete with IBM's PC DOS.
5. NT requires computers with 486 CPU and 16 MB RAM.
6. OS/2 is DOS compatible because it was developed by Microsoft.
7. Traditionally, UNIX was run by many users simultaneously.
8. Windows 95 and 98 are DOS compatible and have very «friendly» and
convenient interface.
Exercise 11. Translate the following sentences.
1.
,
,
DOS.
2.
.
3.
4. Windows 98
Recycle Bin,
.
5.
Windows 98,
.
.
70
Exercise 12. Agree or disagree with the following statements.
1. An «icon» graphical image that represents file and its type.
2. Second button is not used in Windows 98 as most people use one-button mouse.
3. There are no similarities between Macintosh and Windows 98 desktop tools.
4. Windows 98 has some tools which help to communicate with other people
through computer network.
5. It's no longer possible to use MS-DOS commands and run MS-DOS files.
6. New plug-and-play capability is for those who like to play computer games 24
hours a day and 7 days a week.
7. A new shortcut feature is used to cut long programmes very short to save disk
space.
8. New find features helps you to locate the contents of files.
Exercise 13. Read the text.
GUI OPERATING SYSTEMS
The term user interface refers to the standard procedures that the user follows in
order to interact with a computer. In the late 1970 and early 80s, they way users
accessed computer systems was very complex. They had to memorize and type a lot
of commands just to see the contents of a disk, to copy files or to respond to a single
prompt. In fact, it was only experts who used computers, so there was no need for a
user-friendly interface.
In 1984, apple produced the Macintosh, the first computer with a mouse and a
graphical user interface (GUI). Macs were designed with one clear aim: to facilitate
interaction with the computer. A few years later, Microsoft launched Windows,
another operating system based on graphics and intuitive tools. Nowadays, computers
are used by all kinds of people, and as a result there is a growing emphasis on
accessibility and user-friendly system.
A GUI makes use of a WIMP environment: windows, icons, menus and pointer.
The background of the screen is called the desktop, which contains labeled pictures
called icons. These icons represent files or folders. Double-clicking a folder opens a
window which contains programs, documents, or more nested folders. When you are
in a folder, you can launch a program or document by double-clicking the icon or you
can drag it to another location. When you run a program, your PC opens a window
that lets you work with different tools. All the programs have a high level of
consistency, with similar toolbars, menu bars, buttons and dialogue boxes. A modern
OS also provides access to networks and allows nuitimediatasking, which means you
can run several programs – and do various tasks – at the same time.
The most popular operating systems are:
The Window family is designed by Microsoft and used on most PCs. The most
recent version is Window Vista.
Mac OS is created by Apple and used on Macintosh computers.
Unix is a multi-user system, found on mainframes and workstations in corporate
installations.
Linux is open-source software developed under the GNU General Public License.
71
This means anybody can copy its source code, change it and distribute it. It is used in
computers, appliances and small devices.
Window Mobile is used on most PDAs and smartphones.
Palm OS is used on Palm handheld devices.
RIM is used on BlackBerry communication devices.
The Symbian Os is used by some phone makers, including Nokia and Siemens.
These computers platforms differ in areas such as device installation, network
connectivity or compatibility with application software.
Exercise 14. Label the interfaces features (a-j) on the screenshot of Apple’s
Mac OS X operating system with words in bold from this list.
Desktop: the background screen that displays icons and folders.
Window: a scrollable viewing area on screen; it can contain files or folders.
Icon: a picture representing an object, for example, a document, program, folder
or hard drive icon.
Folder: a directory that holds data, programs and other folders.
Menu bar: a row of words that open up menus when selected.
Drop-down (pull-down) menu: a list of options that appears below a menu item
when selected.
Scroll bar: a horizontal or vertical bar that is clicked and dragged in the desired
direction.
Dock: set of icons at the bottom of the screen that give you access to the things
you use most.
72
UNIT 11
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE
Exercise 1. Look at the computer graphics (a-d) and discuss these questions.
1. Which of these computer graphics are three-dimensional (3-D)?
2. What are the advantages of creating 3-D images?
3. Which types of professional might use the computer graphics (a-d)?
4. Who else uses computer graphics in their job? How do they use them?
Exercise 2. Remember the following words and word combinations
Text interface
arrow keys
,
the list of commands
pop-up menu
execute the command
graphic interface
Raster graphics
Resolution
Vector graphics
Computer Aided Design
Fractal
add effects
graphic applets
Exercise 3. Guess the meanings of the following words and phrases
Move around the screen, move up, move down, press the key, drop-down menu,
windows, buttons, icons, manipulate images, compositing, without losing quality
Exercise 4. Translate into Ukrainian.
73
addition of menus, to type in all the commands, old bulletin board communications
program, post messages, reply to other people's messages, letter key, number key, to
be successfully marketed, drawing programs, image-editing programs, computer art,
digital art.
Exercise 5. Read and translate the text.
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE
Text Interface with Menus
Improvements arrived with the addition of menus and the use of the arrow keys to
move around the screen. This is much better than having to type in all the commands.
The example to the right is of a old bulletin board communications program.
People would post messages and reply to other people's messages.
Notice the list of commands in the pop-up menu in the center. You would use the
arrow keys to move up and down the list and then press the Enter key to execute the
command. Various menus were usually available by using the ALT key in
combination with a letter or number key.
Graphical Interface
A graphical user interface (GUI - sometimes pronounced GOO-ee) uses pictures to
make it easier for the user. It is user friendly.
The use of drop-down menus, windows, buttons, and icons was first successfully
marketed by Apple on the Macintosh computer. These ideas are now as standard for
graphical interfaces as door knobs are for doors.
Computer graphics are pictures and drawings produced by computer. There are
two main categories:
Raster graphics, or bitmaps, are stored as a collection of pixels. The sharpness of
an image depends on the density of pixels, or resolution. For example, text or pictures
that are scaled up – that is, made bigger – may show jagged edges, paint and photo –
editing programs like Adobe Photoshop focus on the manipulation of bitmaps.
Popular raster formats are JPEG, GIF and TIFF.
Vector graphics represent images through the use of geometric objects, such as
lines, curves and polygons, based on mathematical equations. They can be changed or
scaled without losing quality. Vector data can be handled by drawing programs like
Adobe Illustrator, Corel Draw or Macromedia Freehand. EPS is the most popular file
format for exchanging vector drawings.
Almost all computer users use some form of graphics. Home users and
professional artists use image-editing programs to manipulate images. For example,
you can add filters (special effects) to your favourite photos, or you can composite
images. Compositing is combining parts of different images to create a single image.
74
Graphic artists and designers use drawing programs to create freehand drawings and
illustrations for books or for the Web. Businesspeople use presentation graphics to
make information more interesting visually – graphs and diagrams can be more
effective ways of communicating with clients than lists of figures. Electrical
engineers use CAD (Computer Aided Design) software to develop, model and test car
designs before the actual parts are made. This can save a lot of time and money. CAD
is also used in the aerospace, architecture and industrial sector to design everything
from aeroplanes and buildings to consumer products. Designers start a project by
making a wireframe, a representation showing the outlines of all edges in a
transparent drawing. They then specify and fill the surfaces to give the appearance of
a 3-D solid object with volume. This is known as solid modeling. Next, they add
paint, colour and filters to achieve the desired “look and feel”: this is called texturing
the object. Finally, they render the object to make it look real. Rendering includes
lighting and shading as well as effects that simulate shadows and reflections.
Computer art, or digital art, is used in adverts and TV programmes. Artists and
scientists use special graphic applets to create amazing fractals. Fractals are
geometrical patterns that are repeated at small scales to generate irregular shapes,
some of which describe objects from nature. Government agencies use GIS
(Geographic Information Systems) to understand geographical data and then plan the
use of land or predict natural disasters. Cartographers use GIS to make detailed maps.
Animators use computer animation software to create animated cartoons or add
effects in movies and video games.
Exercise 6. Match the words 1- with the words a- to make up the word
combinations
1. arrow
a. command
2. drop-down
b. message
3. execute
c. friendly
4. reply
d. menu
5. user
e. key
Exercise 7. Match the words (1-6) with their definitions (a-f).
1. resolution
a special effects that can be applied to pictures
2. jagged
b a technique that generate realistic reflections,
shadows and highlights
3. filters
c geometrical figures with special properties
4. wireframe
d irregular or uneven
5. rendering
e the number of pixels in an image
6. fractals
f the drawing of a model by using features like
edges or control lines
Exercise 8. Answer the questions
1. What are difference between raster graphics and vector graphics?
2. Which graphics file formats are mentioned?
75
3. What is compositing?
4. What does CAD stand for?
5. What are the benefits of using graphics in the car industry?
6. What type of graphics software is used to make maps or 3-D models of the
Earth?
7. Who uses computer animation? How?
Exercise 9. Work in pairs. Student A chooses a task from the list (1-6) and
describes it. Student B chooses the most appropriate graphics software for the task
(a-f) and gives reasons for his or her choice. Swap roles.
1. To edit and retouch photos
2. To create illustrations and drawings for a magazine
3. To prepare slideshows for training sessions or conferences
4. To make mechanical designs and architectural plans
5. To create dynamic simulation and special effects for films, TV, advertisements
and games
6. To analyse geographic data and make maps
Exercise 10. Identify these interface elements.
desktop; window; drop-down menu; pointer; folder; program icon;
document icon
Exercise 11. A Graphical User Interface (GUI) makes computers easier to use. A
GUI uses icons. Icons are pictures which represent programs, folders, and files.
Can you identify any of these icons?
Exercise 12. Find the icons for the software which controls these items.
1. Data and time
3. Fonts
5. A modem
2. The mouse
4. The keyboard
6. Sounds
76
Exercise 13. Study this screen display. Can you find these items?
1. Window
2. An icon
3. A pointer 4. A menu
Exercise 14. Find definitions in the text of these items.
1. Menu
3. Window
5. Pointer
2. Interface
4. Active window
6. Icon
1. Most computers have a Graphical User Interface. The ___ is the connection
between the user and the computer. The most common type of GUI uses a WIMP
system, WIMP stands for Windows, icon, Menu (or Mouse), Pointer (or Pulldown/Pop-up menu).
2. A ___ is an area of the computer screen where you can see the contents of a
folder, a file, or a program. Some systems allow several windows on the screen at the
same time and windows can overlap each other. The window on the top is the one
which is ‘active’, the one in use.
3. ___ are small pictures on the screen. They represent programs, folders, or files.
For example, the Recycle Bin icon represents a program for deleting and restoring
files. Most systems have a special area of the screen on which icons appear.
4. ___ give the user a list of choices. You operate the menu by pressing and
releasing one or more buttons on the mouse.
5. ___ is the arrow you use to select icons or to choose options from a menu. You
move the pointer across the screen with the mouse. Then you click a button on the
mouse to use the object selected by the pointer.
Exercise 15. Work in pairs. Study these forms the cursor can take on your
computer. Try to match each icon to one item from the list below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Hourglass
Arrow pointer
Pointing finger
Not available
5. Crosshair
6. Magnifying glass
7. Drag and drop arrow
Exercise 16. Read the text.
Using Windows and Icons
77
Desktop and icons
From your desktop you can access shortcuts to files and programs on your
computer.
The desktop is like an actual desk. When you open programs or files they appear
on your desktop.
An icon is a small picture representing a file, folder or program on your computer.
Icons look different for each type of file or program.
The taskbar is the long horizontal bar at the bottom of your screen. It shows you
which programs and folders or documents you have open. It also gives you other
information, such as the time, volume control and internet connection status.
The Start button is a starting point for opening program and files on your
computer.
Folders and windows
This is a folder icon. You store files in a folder, such as documents or pictures. To
open a folder you double click with the left mouse button. When you open a folder its
contents will appear in a window.
To open a file you double click on the icon with the left mouse button. When you
open a file it will appear in another window.
A window is made up of:
• Two scroll bars which you use to move around the window. There is a scroll
bar on the right hand side to move up and down. Also there is one at the bottom of
the window which you use to move left and right.
• A title bar which displays the name of the folder, document or program.
• A menu bar contains commands that you select to make choices in a program.
• A tool bar contains shortcuts to commands in your menu bar.
78
Moving between windows
You can have more than one window open at a time. The active window will be
the one with the highlighted title bar and in front of the other windows.
All open windows are displayed as buttons in your task bar at the bottom of the
screen. The active window will be the highlighted button in your task bar.
To switch between windows you can click on a window, or select it’s button from
the task bar.
To hide a window you click on the minimise button. This is in the top right hand
corner of the window. The window then disappears, but you can bring it back up by
clicking on its button on the task bar.
To make a window larger and fill the whole screen you click on the maximise
button.
To close a window you click on the close button.
79
UNIT 12
ELECTRONIC PROCESSING OF THE TEXT
Exercise 1. In pairs, discuss these questions.
1. What is a word processor?
2. What kind of tasks do people use word processors for?
3. How many different word processing programs can you name? Which do you
think is the most popular?
Exercise 2. Remember the following words and word combinations.
Word processing
Create a document
Store
Typewriter
Correct
Delete
Remove
Leave a trace
Insert
Find and replace
Cut and paste
Search
Word wrap
Print
Font specifications
Exercise 3. Guess the meanings of the following words and phrases
Margin
Headers
Merge
Footers
Spell checker
Page numbering
Thesaurus
Layout
Exercise 4. Read and translate the text.
ELECTRONIC PROCESSING OF THE TEXT
Word processing
A word processor enables you to create a document, store it electronically on a
disk, display it on a screen, modify it by entering commands and characters from the
keyboard, and print it on a printer.
The great advantage of word processing over using a typewriter is that you can
make changes without retyping the entire document. If you make a typing mistake,
you simply back up the cursor and correct your mistake. If you want to delete a
paragraph, you simply remove it, without leaving a trace. It is equally easy to insert a
word, sentence or paragraph in the middle of a document.
Word processors usually support these features (and a few others).
80
- Cut and paste: Allows you to remove (cut) a section of the text and insert (paste)
it somewhere else.
- Find and replace: Allows you to direct the word processor to search for a
particular word or phrase. You can also direct the word processor to replace one
group of characters with another everywhere that the first group appears.
- Word wrap: The word processor automatically moves to the next line when you
have filled one line with the text and it will readjust text if you change the margins.
- Print: Allows you to send a document to a printer to get hard copy.
- Font specifications: Allows you to change fonts within a document. For example,
you can specify bold, italics, and underlining. Most word processor also let you
change the front size and the typeface.
Graphics: Allows you to include illustrations and graphs in a document. Some
programs let you create the illustrations within the word processor; others let you
insert a picture from a different program.
- headers, footers and page numbering: Allows you to specify customized headers
and footers that the word processor will put at the top and bottom of every page. The
word processor automatically keeps track of page numbers so that the correct number
appears on each page.
- Layout: Allows you to specify different margins within a single document and to
specify various methods for indenting paragraphs – how much space you leave
between the margins and paragraphs.
- Merge: Allows you to merge the text from one file to another file. This is
particularly useful for generating many files that have the same format but different
data. Generating mailing labels is the classic example of using mergers.
- Spell checker: A utility that allows you to check the spelling of words. It will
highlight any words that it doesn’t recognize.
- Thesaurus: Allows you to search for synonyms without leaving the word
processor.
The line diving word processors from the desktop publishing systems is constantly
shifting. In general, though, DTP applications support finer control over layout and
more support for full-colour documents.
Exercise 5. Find out in the text the words which have these definitions.
A program used for preparing documents and letters.
A row of words that open up menus when selected.
The distinctive design of letters and characters, e.g. Arial, Courier.
Text printed in the top margin.
Text printed in the bottom margin.
The way the text is arranged on the page, including margins, paragraph format,
columns, etc.
A function that enables you to combine two files into one.
Exercise 6. Complete these statements with a term from the text.
81
1. A ______ consists of three elements: typeface, type style and type size; for
example Arial bold at 9 points.
2. Notice that when you get the end of each line, Word starts a new line
automatically. It moves the word you are typing to a new line when it enters an
invisible margin running down the right-hand side of the screen. This feature is called
______.
3. ______ and ______ lets you find a word and change it into another word
throughout the text.
4. A good ______ _____ program can be used not only to rectify accidental
spelling mistakes and typing errors, but also to speed typing input.
5. Many word processors include a ______, so you can look for words within
similar meanings.
6. The _____ contains a row of icons that perform particular actions when clicked.
7. ____ a paragraph involves moving your writing in from the margins of the page.
For example, a left indent is the distance between the left margin and the text.
Exercise 7. Correct 6 mistakes in this dialogue.
A: I need a photo for my curriculum vitae. How do I insert one into this Word
document?
B: well, now choose Insert on the Menu bar.
A: As this?
B: yes. From the Insert menu, select Picture. As you can see, this displays a dropdown menu with different options: Clip Art, From File, From Scanner, Chart, etc.
Select From File an you’ll get a dialog box.
A: Ok. I’ve done that now. What last?
B: Ok. Now I navigate your hard drive’s contents and find the picture that you
want to insert.
A: Right. I’d like to include this one.
B: Ok, good. Now click Insert and the photograph will be inserted into your
document.
A: Here it is. Is that right?
B: Yes. First, right-click with the mouse and select Format Picture to adjust the
size and other properties.
A: Brilliant, thanks!
Exercise 8. Complete these instructions for how to Copy and Paste in Word with
the verbs from the box.
click(2)
select
position
right-click
drag
1. First, ____ the text you wish to copy. To select text, _____ the mouse over the
portion of the text that you want to copy. This part should then be highlighted.
2. Then _____ on the Copy icon on the Standard Toolbar. This copies the selected
text to an invisible clipboard.
3. Next, _______ the cursor where you want the text to appear.
82
4. Finally, _____ the Paste icon. This inserts the content of the clipboard at the
insertion point. As well as the icons on the toolbar, you can use the keys Ctrl+C for
Copy, and Ctrl+V for Paste. These options also come up if you _____ the selected
text.
Exercise 9. Work in pairs.
Student A: give your partner instructions on creating a document and saving it on
disk.
Student B.: give your partner instructions how to insert a picture from the Web
into a Word document.
Exercise 10. Match the words with their definitions.
____cursor
1) all of the text
_____ insert
2) to add characters to a document by moving the old
characters over to make room for the new
_____ font
3) different styles and sizes of type
_____ tab
4) a measurement of how big the font will be
_____ delete
5) to remove characters from a document
_____ characters
6) the placeholder on the computer monitor
_____ text
7) the letters, numbers and all the special signs that you see
on the keyboard
____ point
8) the space around the printing--above below left side and
right side
____ document
9) a key that allows you to move more than one space at a
time
_____ margin
10) words that are made by the characters
_____ indent
11) to move a line in more than one spaces
83
UNIT 13
PROGRAM DESIGN AND COMPUTER LANGUAGE
1. Discuss what you think programming is?
2. Look at the definition of programming in the Glossary. Is it similar to yours?
Exercise 1. Remember the following words and word combinations
represent instructions
assembler
complier
low-level languages
high-level languages
flowchart
detect bugs
Exercise 2. Guess the meaning of the following words.
The process of writing a program, set of instructions, machine code, symbolic
languages, assembly languages, link text files, speech recognition, maintenance
program, update version
Exercise 3. Read and translate the text
PROGRAMMING AND PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES
Programming is the process of writing a program using a computer language. A
program is a set of instructions which a computer uses to do specific tasks.
The only language a PC can directly execute is machine code, which consists of 1s
and 0s. This language is difficult to write, so we use symbolic languages that are
easier to understand. For example, assembly languages use the abbreviations such as
ADD, SUB, MPY to represent instructions. The program is then translated into
machine code by software called an assembler.
Machine code and assembly languages are called low-level languages because they
are closer to the hardware.
High-level languages, however, are closer to human languages; they use forms
resembling English, which makes programming easier. The program is translated into
machine code by software called a complier. Some examples are:
FORTRAN – used for scientific and mathematical applications
COBOL – popular for business applications
BASIC – used as a teaching language; Visual BASIC is now used to create
Windows applications
C – used to write system software, graphics and commercial programs
Java-designed to run on the Web; Java applets are small programs that run
automatically on web pages and let you watch animated characters, and play music
and games.
The languages used to create Web documents are called markup languages; they
use instructions (markups) to format and link text files. Examples are:
HTML – the code used to create Web pages
84
XML, which stands for Extensible Markup Language. While HTML uses predefined tags, XML enables us to define our own tags; it is not limited by a fixed set
of tags.
Voice XML – it makes Internet content accessible via speech recognition and
phone. Instead of using a web browser on a PC, you use a telephone to access voiceequipped websites. You just dial the phone number of the website and then give
spoken instructions, commands, and get the required information.
Steps in writing a program.
To write a program, software developers usually follow these steps.
- first they try to understand the problem and define the purpose of the program.
- they design a flowchart, a diagram which shows the successive logical steps of
the program.
- next they write the instructions in a high-level language (Pascal, C, etc.) this is
called coding. The program is then compiled.
- when the program is written, they test it: they run the program to see if it works
and use special tools to detect bugs, or errors. Any errors are corrected until it runs
smoothly. This is called debugging, or bug fixing.
- finally, software companies write a detailed description of how the program
works, called program documentation. They also have a maintenance program. They
get reports from users about any errors found in the program. After it has been
improved, it is published as an update version.
Exercise 4. Match the terms with their definitions.
Programming
a. basic language which consists of binary codes
Machine code
b. programming language such as C, Java or Visual BASIC
Assembly language c. writing computer programs
High-level language d. low-level language translated into machine code by an
assembler
Java applet
e. software which converts a source program into machine
code
Compiler
f. language used to create and format documents for the Web
Markup language g. small self-contained program written in Java
Exercise 5. Complete this article about the Voice XML application language
with the words from the box.
HTML dial Voice XML commands speech recognition
Internet: Voice recognition takes off
You don’t need a sophisticated cell phone to surf the Internet when you’re on the
road – just your own voice. That’s the idea behind a new breed of voice service that
is popping up all over the place. Subscribers (1) ___ a toll-free phone number and
spoken (2) ___ to listen to anything from weather conditions to stock quotes, or flight
information to news stories. Half a dozen of these services – such as Audiopoint,
BeVocal, TellMe and TelSurf Networks – have already gone live or are testing their
systems.
85
These launches are all happening because two crucial technologies have come of
age. (3) _____ software from companies such as Lucent, Nuance and Speech works
can now understand a wide range of accents and diction without having to be trained
to a specific voice. And computer languages such as Voice XML make it as easy to
write voice services as (4) _____ has made it to write web pages. With (5) _____, the
human voice becomes a substitute for a computer mouse and the spoken command
for a click. It doesn’t, however, call up conventional web pages, but content which is
specially composed for a telephone: sound clips, numbers, music, spoken texts.
Exercise 6. Complete these sentences with a computer language from the text.
1. _____ allows us to create our own tags to describe our data better. We aren’t
constrained by a pre-defined set of tags the way we are with HTML.
2.IBM developed ____ in the 1950s it was the first high-level language in data
processing.
3. ______ applets are small programs that run automatically on web pages and let
you watch animated characters, play games, etc.
4. ______ is the HTML of the voice web. Instead of using a web browser and a
keyboard, you interact with a voice browser by listening to pre-recorded audio output
and sending audio input through a telephone
5. This language is widely used in the business community. For example, the
statement ADD VAT to NET-PRICE could be used in a ______ program.
Exercise 7. Put these programming steps into the correct order.
Write code and compile
Document and maintain the program
Analyze the problem
Test the program and detect bugs
Debug and correct it if necessary
Make flowchart
Exercise 8. Answer these questions.
1. Do computers understand human language? Why? Why not?
2. What is the function of assembler?
3. Why did software developers design high-level languages?
4. Which language is used to teach programming techniques?
5. What is the difference between a complier and an interpreter?
6. Why are HTML and Voice XML called markup languages?
Exercise 9. Read and render the article.
The Java Language
Java is a programming language developed by Sun Microsystems, specially
designed to run on the Web. Java programs (called applets) let you watch animated
characters and moving text, play music, and interact with information on the screen
(for example, control animation and select options).
Java is an object-oriented language, similar to C++, but more dynamic and
simplified to eliminate possible programming errors. A Java program is both
complied and interacted. First, the source code (a file with a .java extension) is
86
complied and converted into a format called byte code (.class extension), which can
then be executed by a Java interpreter. Complied Java code can run on most
computers because there are Java interpreters, known as Java Virtual Machines, for
operating systems. Java is multi-threaded, meaning a Java program can have multiple
threads (parts) – that is, many different things processing independently and
continuously. This enables the program to make the best use of available CPU power.
Most programmers like Java because it allows them to write applets which make
web pages more interactive and attractive. They can create graphical objects (for
example, bar charts and diagrams) and new controls (for example, check boxes and
push buttons with special properties). A web page that uses Java can have sounds that
play in real time, music that plays in the background, cartoon-style animations, realtime video and interactive games.
The Java Micro Edition platform (Java ME) is used in mobile devices. It provides
flexible tools to create applications that run on mobile phones, PDAs, TV set-top
boxes and printers. Nowadays, most phones are configured to use Java games.
One alternative to Java is Microsoft’s C#. pronounced “C sharp”, a .NET language
based on C++ with elements from Visual Basics and Java. There are no substantial
differences between C# and Java. When software developers do measurements on
pieces of code, sometimes Java is faster. Sometimes C# is.
Another competitor is Adobe Flash technology, which supports graphics, a
scripting language called Action Script, and the streaming of audio and video. Flash
is used to create animation and advertisements, to integrate video into web pages, and
to develop rich internet applications such as portals. Flash files, traditionally called
flash movies, have a .swf file extension. They may be an object on a web page or be
played in the stand-alone Flash Player.
Exercise 10. These statements about Java are all false. Correct them.
1. Java was invented by Microsoft.
2. With the interpreter, a program is first converted into Java Byte codes.
3. Java is not compatible with the most computing platforms.
4. The Java language is single-threaded, one part executing at a time.
5. Java has no competitors.
6. Flash files are called animations.
Exercise 11. Complete the sentences with the words from the box.
interpreted; animated; configured; used; pronounced; object-oriented; complied
1. Java lets you watch _______ characters on web pages.
2. Java is an ______ language, similar to C++ but more dynamic.
3. First, the source code of a Java program is _____ into an intermediate format
called byte code. This is then _____ by any system possessing a Java interpreter.
4. The Java ME platform is widely ________ in mobile devices.
5. Nowadays, most mobile phones are _______ to use Java games.
6. Microsoft C# is a simplified version of C and C++ for the web. It’s ___ “C
sharp”.
87
UNIT 14
THE INTERNET
1. Discuss how you would define the Internet.
2. Make a list of things you can use the Internet for.
Exercise 1. Study the following words and word combinations.
International computer Network
Wireless connection
Satellites
Power-line Internet
Newsgroup
Get/go online
Broadband access
Optional attached files
Subscriber
File Transfer Protocol
IP (Internet Protocol) number
Versatile option
Exercise 2. Guess the meaning of the following words and phrases.
Electronic mail, video conference, WI-FI-enabled laptop, mailing list, chat, Usenet,
attached files, log, wireless access point
Exercise 3. Read and translate the following text.
Faces of the Internet
The Internet is an International computer Network made up of thousands of
networks linked together. All these computers communicate with one another; they
share data, resources, transfer information, etc. to do it they need to use the same
language or protocol: TCP\IP (Transmission Control Protocol\ Internet Protocol) and
every computer is given an address or IP number. This number is a way to identify
the computer on the Internet.
To use the Internet you basically need a computer, the right connection software
and a modem to connect your computer to a telephone line and then access your ISP
(Internet Service Provider).
The modem (modulator-demonstrator) converts the digital signals stored in the
computer into analogue signals that can be transmitted over telephone lines. There are
two basic types: external with a cable that is plugged into the computer via a USB
port, and internal, an expansion card inside the computer. A PC card modem is a
different, more versatile option for laptops and mobile phones.
At first most computers used a dial-up telephone connection that worked through
the standard telephone line. Now a broadband connection, a high data transmission
rate Internet connections, has become more popular: either ADSL (Asymmetric
Digital Subscriber Line), which allows you to use the same telephone line for voice
and fast access to the Internet, or cable, offered by most TV cable providers.
88
The basic equipment has changed dramatically. In the last few years. You no
longer need a computer to use the Internet. Web TV provides email and access to the
Web via a normal TV set plus a high-speed modem. More recently, 3Generation
mobile phones and PDAs, personal digital assistants, also allow you to go online with
wireless connections, without cables.
Telephone lines are not essential either. Satellites orbiting the earth enable your
computer to send and receive Internet files. Finally, the power-line Internet, still
under development, provides access via a power plug.
Other methods of internet access include Wi-Fi, satellite, mobile phones and TV
sets equipped with a modem. Wi-Fi-enabled laptops or PDAs allow you to connect to
the Net if you are near a wireless access point, in locations called hotspots (for
example, a Wi-Fi café, park or campus). Satellite services are used in places where
terrestrial access is not available (for example, on ships at sea). High-end mobile
phones provide access through the phone network.
The Internet consists of many systems that offer different facilities to user. WWW,
the World Wide Web, a collection of files or pages containing links to other
documents on the Net. It’s by far the most popular system. Most Internet services are
now integrated on the Web. The Web consists of billions of documents living on the
web servers that use the HHTP protocol you navigate through the Web using a
program called a web browser, which lets you search, view and print web pages.
Email lets you exchange messages with people all over the world. Optional
attached files can include text, pictures and even audio and animation. Mailing list
based on programs that send messages on a certain topic to all the computers whose
users have subscribed to the list.
Chat and instant messaging allow you to have real-time conversations online, by
typing messages at the keyboard.
Internet telephone, a system that lets people make voice calls via the Internet.
Video conference, a system that allows the transmission of video and audio signals in
real time so the participants can exchange data, talk and see one another on the
screen.
FTP, or file transfer protocol, is used to transfer files over a TCP\IP network.
Nowadays, this feature is built into Web browsers. You can download programs,
games and music files from a remote computer to your hard drive.
Telnet is a protocol and a program used to log onto remote computer systems. It
enables you to enter commands that will be executed as if you were entering them
directly on the remote server.
Newsgroups are the public discussion areas which make up a system called
Usenet. The contents are contributed by people who post articles or respond to
articles, creating chains of related postings called message threads. You need a
newsreader to subscribe to newsgroup and to read and post messages. The
newsreader may be a stand-alone program or part of a web browser. Your newsreader
may allow you to download the newsgroup addresses that your ISP has included on
its news server. An alternative to using a newsreader is to visit web forum instead,
which perform the same function but without the additional software.
89
Exercise 4. Are the following statements True or False. Correct the false ones.
1. The Internet and the World Wide Web are synonyms.
2. Computers need to use the same protocol (TCP\IP) to communicate with each
other.
3. Web TV can provide access to the Net.
4. ADSL and cable are two types of dial-up connections.
5. External, internal and PC card are types of connections.
6. Information can be sent through telephone lines, satellites and power lines.
7. The computer IP number is a way to identify it on the Internet
Exercise 5. Find words and phrases with the following meanings.
1. A system used to distribute email to many different subscribers at once.
2. A program used for displaying web pages.
3. To connect to a computer by typing your username and password.
4. A series of interrelated messages on a given topic.
5. A program for reading Usenet newsgroups.
Exercise 6. Which of the Internet systems (1-6) you would use to do the tasks (a-f).
1. Email
a. transfer files from the Internet to your hard drive
2. The Web
b. send a message to another person via the Internet
3. Newsgroup
c. have a live conversation (usually typed) online
4. Chat and IM
d. connect to a remote computer by entering Instructions,
and run a program on it
5. FTP
e. take part in public discussion areas devoted to specific topics
6. Telnet
f. download and view documents published on the Internet
Exercise 7. Choose the correct answers.
1. Which term describes any fast, high-bandwidth connection?
a. broadband
b. dial-up connection
c. Wi-Fi connection
2. The power-line Internet provides broadband access through
a. telephone lines
b. satellites
c. electrical power lines
3. Which device converts computer data into a form that can be transmitted over
phone lines?
a. ADSL
b. a mobile phone
c. a modem
4. The standard protocol that allows computers to communicate over the Internet
is called?
a. an IP address
b. TCP\IP
c. HTTP
5. The geographical region covered by one or several access points is called a
a. wireless access point
b. hotspot
c. wireless network device
Exercise 8. Read the text and find the following.
1. The place where your ISP stores your emails.
2. The type of program used to read and send email from a computer.
3. The part of an email address that identifies the user of the service.
90
4.
5.
6.
7.
The line that describes the content of an email.
The computer file which is sent along with an email message.
Facial symbols used to indicate an emotion or attitude.
The name given to junk mail.
Exercise 9. Uses of the Internet.
These two pictures show two different uses of the computer. Compare and contrast
them. Include the following points:
1. What are the good and bad points of these uses?
2. Do you ever use the computer in these ways? If yes, tell about it./If no, why not?
3. How popular are such uses among teenagers?
4. What else can you use a computer for?
Prompt for discussion:
• What do you use the computer for?
• What do you do on the Net?
• What are the bad and good points of using the Net?
• Do you ever play games on the computer? If yes, what kind of?
• Why is shopping on the Internet becoming more and more popular?
• What are the advantages and disadvantages of shopping on the Net?
91
REVISIONS
COMPUTERS & ME: MATCHING
Write the names under the correct pictures:
E-MAIL
HARD DISK
MICROPHONE
LAPTOP
MUSIC MIXER
CD PRINTER
MOUSE
MONITOR
CD BURN
SMARTCARD
WIFI
MOTHERBOARD
HEADPHONES
SCANNER
SPEAKERS
PDA
MODEM
SAVE AS
NETWORK
BUG
PEN DRIVE
CHIP
SHIELD
FLOPPY DISK
TABLET
FLAT SCREEN
GAME CONSOLE
TEXT DOCUMENT
MOUSEMAT
CHAT
WEBCAM
USER TRASH
JOYSTICK
COMPUTER CASE
KEYBOARD
92
Exercise 2.
Computer Parts Word Puzzle
KEYBOARD MOUSE SPELLCHECK VIRUS PAINT MOUSEPAD
MONITOR CURSOR EMAIL GOOGLE CPU HARDWARE SOFTWARE
FLASHDRIVE USB CHATTING MP3 MEGABYTE PRINTER SCANNER
Across
5. the machine that lets you put documents and such on paper
6. the tool you use to type words onto the computer
7. the program that checks your spelling
13. talking to other users by typing or using headphones
14. the most popular internet search engine
15. what you use to click things on the screen
16. what is another word for computer screen
17. any physical part of a computer
18. the object on your screen that lets you point at things
19. internet mail
Down
1. a small port on your computer that you can attach drives to
2. a mass storage device that is portable that connects through a USB port
93
3. music form most played on the computer
4. one of the many different sizes in regards to computers storage
8. a program that lets you draw on your computer
9. the brain of a computer
10. a machine that lets you put paper documents onto your computer
11. a program that destroys your computer system
12. any program on the computer
15. the object that your mouse sits on
Exercise 3. DIRECTIONS: Identify the computer related words and fill in the
blanks.
Exercise 4. Label these ten items of computer hardware.
94
Portable computer
disk drive
mouse
monitor
word processor
printer
external single
keyboard
screen
personal computer
Exercise 5. Make the crossword.
95
KEYBOARD MOUSE SPELLCHECK VIRUS PAINT MOUSEPAD
MONITOR CURSOR EMAIL GOOGLE CPU HARDWARE SOFTWARE
FLASHDRIVE USB CHATTING MP3 MEGABYTE PRINTER SCANNER
Exercise 6. Do you know how to be safe when using your computer?
Here are some golden rules to be safe. Match the beginning and endings of the
rules.
96
Exercise 7. Computer Safe Vocabulary! Find the words.
Exercise 8. Computer Parts
In the spaces on the right, write in the letter that matches to the computer part in
the picture. If you don’t know, take your best guess!
Name
Let
ter
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Exercise 9. What are the functions of the following computer parts? Write the
names of the parts and explain their function.
97
________________________________________________________
______
________________________________________________________
______
________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________
______
______
________________________________________________________
______
________________________________________________________
______
________________________________________________________
______
Exercise 10. Look at the desktop and name the items. Then describe their
function.
98
4
3
1
2
5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Exercise 11. Technological gadgets: choose the correct word to label this objects.
laptop
radio
MP4
telephone
headphones
printer
USB
disk
MP3
flat screen TV
games console digital camera Blu-ray
player PDA webcam
scanner mouse computer keyboard
video
camera
mobile phone
99
Exercise 12. Read the text.
Computer Addiction
1- Computer addiction is a relatively new term used to describe a dependency on
one's computer. Computer addiction is not
limited to personal computers (PCs).It covers
video games and the Internet and has already
been given a label by psychologists, namely
Internet addiction disorder (IAD).
2- People can grow addicted to a variety of
substances, and there is usually a substantial
amount of help available to treat them. Alcohol,
drugs and sex have all been known to bring out
the addictive personality trait in some people,
but other forms of addictive behavior, such as exercise, watching television or
spending too much time on a computer, have only recently been recognized.
Computer addiction, like any addiction, can creep up on a person without one being
aware of it. Talk shows are full of people whose relationships have been torn apart by
one partner's computer addiction. Spending hours chatting online, surfing the web or
playing computer games can cause relationships to deteriorate as other parts of a
person's life are neglected.
3- The newly diagnosed computer addiction has gained much press attention
recently, as children have also been affected. A recent research study showed that
some children suffer from computer rage when they are forbidden to play computer
games. The results are sudden uncontrolled periods of anger and behavioral traits
similar to those of an addict going cold turkey.
4- So how exactly is computer addiction defined? When does a hobby become an
addiction? As with most other dependencies, specific questions can be asked to assess
whether or not someone may suffer from computer addition. These questions include
assessing on how much time is spend on the PC or playing video games, sometimes
relative to how much time is spent interacting with real people.
5- Another way to assess computer addiction is to assess one's quality of life
before and after the computer arrived. Many people have lost jobs due to their
computer addiction. Constantly logging onto Internet at work has caused many
people to be dismissed, often after repeated warnings were issued. Money is another
100
factor. Some people have gone into debt and lost great amounts of money using
online services and chartrooms.
6Computer addiction is sometimes linked to computer gambling. For some
people, gambling is reliant on the computer. They cannot have one without the other.
Not only do such people spend countless hours playing online poker, but they often
lose thousands of dollars while playing.
7As with any addiction, steps can be taken to treat computer addiction.
Limiting the amount of time spent on the computer or playing video games is a
simple step. If your computer is on all the time, switch it off. Guidelines for children
suggest allowing no more than one hour per night on the PC or playing video games.
8- Computer addiction is said to be on the increase. More and more people are
spending time in cyberspace in a virtual world of their own making. If not treated,
this condition can lead to diminished social skills and deterioration in the addict's
quality of life.
Exercise A. Go over the text quickly and say which paragraph.
a. Compares computer addiction to other types of addiction. Paragraph 1
b. States when computer addiction has started to gain special attention. Paragraph
2
c. Gives ideas about how to treat computer addiction.
Paragraph 3
d. Declares that computer addiction is growing.
Paragraph 4
e. Gives a general idea about computer addiction.
Paragraph 5
f. Shows how one can know about her/his computer
addiction.
Paragraph 6
g. Presents another measure to know about your computer
addiction. Paragraph 7
h. States that computer addiction is related to the amount
of time and money we spend through computer use.
Paragraph 8
Exercise B. Are these statements true or false? Justify.
a-The computer addicts are conscious about their
addiction.
b-The newspapers write about computer addiction.
c-Computer addiction can restrict people's performance at work.
Exercise C. Answer these questions.
a-What is computer addiction?
b-List some of the symptoms of computer addiction.
c-How can we treat computer addiction?
d-Can a hobby becomes an addiction? Explain by giving an example.
Exercise D. Complete these sentences.
101
a-Spending too much time on a computer can ___
b-Many computer addicts have lost their jobs because of ___
c-If computer addiction is not treated, ___
Exercise E. Find in the text words that mean almost the same as:
a-Known (paragraph 2) ……………………………..
b-Furious anger (paragraph 3) ………………………….
c-Sent away from employment (paragraph 5) …………………………..
d-Depending on (paragraph 6) ………………………………
Exercise 13. Read the text and state whether the each statement is True (T),
False (F), Not Mentioned (N).
The Role of Science and Technology
It’s difficult to overestimate the role of science and technology in our life.
Scientists investigate the laws of the universe, discover the secrets of nature, and
apply their knowledge in practice improving the life of people. Let's compare our life
nowadays with the life of people at the beginning of the 20th century. It has changed
beyond recognition. Our ancestors hadn't the slightest idea of the trivial things created
by the scientific progress that we use in our everyday life. I mean refrigerators, TV
sets, computers, microwave ovens, radio telephones, what not.
They would seem miracles to them that made our life easy, comfortable and
pleasant. On the other hand, the great inventions of the beginning of the 20th century,
I mean radio, airplanes, combustion and jet engines have become usual things and we
can't imagine our life without them. A century is a long period for scientific and
technological progress, as it's rather rapid. Our century has had several names that
were connected with a certain era in science and technology. At first it was called the
atomic age due to the discovery of the splitting of the atom. Then it became the age
of the conquest of space when for the first time in the history of mankind a man
overcame the gravity and entered the Universe. And now we live in the information
era when the computer network embraces the globe and connects not only the
countries and space stations but a lot of people all over the world. All these things
prove the power and the greatest progressive role of science in our life.
But every medal has its reverse. And the rapid scientific progress has aroused a
number of problems that are a matter of our great concern. These are ecological
problems, the safety of nuclear power stations, the nuclear war threat, and the
responsibility of a scientist. But still we are grateful to the outstanding men of the
past and the present who have courage and patience to disclose the secrets of the
Universe.
Thanks to the scientist investigations the life of people has greatly improved.
At the beginning of the 20th century people started to acquire the technological
things meant for every day’s actions.
It is stated that people were afraid of every scientific discovery.
Every century is associated with a definite technological and scientific term.
The 21st century is considered to be “the atomic period”.
102
It is proved that now people live in a very comfortable era that helps us to connect
with all the people we want.
Technological and scientific progress leaves a terrible effect not only upon the
people but also on the universe itself.
Americans try to hide all the problems aroused by the scientific progress.
Task 2: Read the text and complete the empty gaps with one of the missing
phrase
The world around us is changing. Much like the industrial revolution of the past
century ___. Technologies are helping people to live their life ___. With
technological machine people are getting help in every sector. ___ to reach anywhere
quickly. Airplane and superfast trains have been reduced distance___. Computer and
internet are providing information in simplest way ___. Machines are helping people
to make lesser mistakes. ___ and you just need to program them with proper
information. Technologies are saving our time, ___ you can flew anywhere in the
world in lesser time, and even machines are helping people in kitchen too.
A: between cities and countries
B: robots or machines are working accurately
C: the new century brings us the information revolution
D: cars and bikes are helping people
E: and it has changed way of communication
F: with more luxury.
G: for an example
Task 3: Read the text and fill the empty gaps with one of the word that fits
best every gap.
Everyone knows 1____ technology is very helpful 2___ it has some disadvantages
too. 3____ many companies 4____ adopted automatic machines so that they 5___
improve their production 6____ accuracy. 7___ a result many people lost their job.
Similarly house maids 8____ loosing their job because robotic machines are 9___
their job. Owner need to pay one time only 10____ maid get paid for every month.
11____ machines and robots look inexpensive and good to use but it can take 12___
time to fix it and it can 13____ expensive. As we found that14___ technology sector,
15____ are many advantages and disadvantages, even then people can't imagine
16___ life without technology including me.
Task 4: Form up the new words from the given below:
1. We have known each other since our ___ (child).
2. Parents should not ___ their children’s mistakes. (look)
3. The minister wants to ___ the capital. (beauty)
4. My teacher says there has been a big (improve) __ in my English lately.
5. The singer gave a brilliant (perform) ___ on stage yesterday.
6. On hearing the news, everyone was overcome with a feeling of (sad) ___.
103
7. She has the (able) ___ to pass the exam first time round providing she works
hard.
8. The Magna Carta of 1215 is one of the (early) ___ legal documents in the world.
Exercise 14. Do you like to write message? Match the symbols with the
meanings:
1. @
a) excellent
2. 2DAY
b) later
3. @MORO
c) wait
4. 2NITE
d) before
5. 4EVER
e) mate
6. 4
f) see you
7. B
g) seeing
8. B4
h) forever
9. BCOZ
i) great
10. CING
j) why
11. CU
k) please
12. FRND
l) tomorrow
13. GR8
m) are
14. H8
n) late
15. L8
o) be
16. L8R
p) tonight
17. M8
q) you
18. PLZ
r) because
19. R
s) hate
20. THX
t) for
21. U
u) friend
22. W8
x) at
23. XLNT
y) thanks
24. Y
z) today
Exercise 15. Look through the teenagers’ opinions of computer games and the
Internet and say which of them you share. Say why. Give examples.
Computer games are great! They are better
than TV. On TV you can watch a space ship,
but in computer game you can fly a space ship.
104
A lot of children spend too much time with
computers. They start playing and then they
can’t stop. They don’t walk to anyone, they just
sit and at the computer for hours and hours.
Exercise 16.
1 These words and phrases are from the article below. Try to match them
with their meanings.
a big business
1 something that happens
b controversial
2 unhealthy, low quality, bad for you
c event
3 a person who studies something to discover new
information
d isolate
4 a device for controlling a computer
e junk (food)
5 not actively
f mouse
6 causing disagreement and discussion
g passively
7 not real, only on a computer or the Internet
h researcher
8 dangerous
i risky
9 powerful companies and financial organizations
j virtual
10 to keep separate from things or people
Read the article and fill each gap with a word or phrase from A1.
Put down your mouse
An Internet organization is trying to persuade people to take part in International
Internet-Free Day, which would be held every year on the last weekend in January.
The idea is that people will leave the (a) ____ world and go out into the real world.
One supporter of the idea said, ‘The Internet can be like addictive (b) ____: food you
can never get enough of but which you don’t really want.’
A spokesman for the Internet-Free Day team explained, ‘The Internet (c) _____s
people socially and damages their eyesight. That is what (d) _____ has done with it.
It was never meant to be like this. The Internet began as a quick and simple way for
(e) ____s to communicate and exchange information.’
‘But it’s so easy to get addicted to a half-life in a virtual world, and to lose touch
with your family, friends and neighbours. Human beings need contact with the real
105
world. Email and the Internet are just not enough.’
So, put down your (f) ____ and turn off your computer. The real world is open all
day every day and welcomes visitors. It offers you the chance to feel human again.
An Internet-free day will give you back your real life.
Imagine your perfect day, suggest the idea to some friends and find an exciting (g)
____ to take part in. Then go out into the world outside your window, and make your
perfect day a reality!
Here are some ideas:
• Organize a Dice Day. Write down half a dozen unusual things your group could
do on the day, number these things from 1 to 6, then throw a dice. You have to agree
to do whichever activity the dice chooses.
• Or choose a less (h) ____ activity: go for a country walk, visit an art gallery or
museum, have a discussion about a(n) (i) ____ subject. Anything as long as it
involves more than just (j) ____ consuming, watching or listening.
Exercise 17. Read and render the text.
Bill Gates – the Founder of Microsoft
William Henry Gates was born in Seattle, Washington, in 1955. He is an American
business executive, chairman and chief executive officer of the Microsoft
Corporation. Gates was the founder of Microsoft in 1975 together with Paul Allen,
his partner in computer language development. While attending Harvard in 1975,
Gates together with Allen developed a version of the BASIC computer programming
language for the first personal computer.
In the early 1980's, Gates led Microsoft's evolution from the developer of computer
programming languages to a large computer software company. This transition began
with the introduction of MS-DOS, the operating system for the new IBM Personal
Computer in 1981. Gates also led Microsoft towards the introduction of application
software such as the Microsoft Word processor.
Much of Gates' success is based on his ability to translate technical visions into
market strategy. Although Gates has accumulated great wealth from his holding of
Microsoft stock, he has been known as a tough competitor who seems to value
winning in a competitive environment over money. Gates still continues to work
personally in product development at Microsoft.
106
PART 3
GRAMMAR
THE VERB TO BE
Present
I
am
happy.
You/We/They
are
happy.
He/She/It
is
happy.
I am not interested.
You/We/They are not interested.
He/She/It is not interested.
Am I late?
Are you/we/they late?
Is he/she/it late?
We use the verb to be to talk about:
Ages: I’m 16 and my brother is six.
Occupations: She is a student and her parents are teachers.
Prices: This watch is £30.
The time: It’s nine o’clock.
Feelings and states: I am hungry.
Nationality: They are Ukrainians.
Colours: His eyes are blue.
Past
I/She/He/It was there.
We/You/They were there.
The verb to be follows a different pattern. We do not use did to form questions and
negatives.
I/She/He/It
was not
there.
You/We/They were not
there.
Was I/he/she/it there?
Were you/we/they there?
She wasn’t at university yesterday.
They weren’t very nice to me.
Was I late?
Were you at the party?
Future
I
will be
happy.
You/We/They
will be
happy.
He/She/It
will be
happy.
I will not be interested.
You/We/They will not be interested.
He/She/It will not be interested.
107
Will I be late?
Will you/we/they be late?
Will he/she/it be late?
Learn the following word-expressions by heart.
TO BE
to be born –
to be glad (pleased) –
to be happy –
to be hungry –
,
to be thirsty –
,
to be healthy –
to be ill –
to be interested in ,
to be ready (for something) –
(
to be late –
to be sorry –
to be out of place –
,
to be comfortable –
to be sure/to be certain –
to be right –
to be wrong to be mistaken –
to be surprised at –
to be angry with –
to be busy (with doing something) –
to be to blame (Who is to blame?) –
(
to be for something –
to be against something –
to be proud of –
to be fond of –
to be good –
,
at to be bored –
to be tired –
to be polite –
to be engaged –
to be married –
to be divorced –
)
?)
Exercise 1. Complete the spaces with is, are or am.
1. Cars ___ expensive.
2. John ___ a student.
3. I ___ the best in the class.
4. My sister ___ a teacher.
108
5. The train ___ late again.
6. That computer ___ very slow.
7. It ___ cold today.
8. We ___ interested in shopping.
9. I ___ tired.
10. Stephanie and Luke ___ from Canada.
Exercise 2. Make sentences from the given words.
1) toys/your/are/where?
2) brothers/they/not/are.
3) puppy/her/not/brown/is.
4) her kittens/colour/are/what?
5) your/how/sisters/old/are?
11.
6) a doctor/Jessica/is?
12.
13.
7) book/under/his/the/is/bed.
8) pens/your/colour/are/what?
9) old/are/John/how/Matthew/and?
10) son/is/her/a student?
11) not/the/in/girls/are/park/the.
12) family/from/is/where/her?
13) are/how/aunt/your/and uncle?
1) not/from/she/Poland/is.
2) old/how/sister/is/her?
3) America/her/from/are/friends.
4) not/sisters/his/pupils/are.
5) not/brother/is/my/a pilot.
6) boys/these/from/are/where?
7) and/Tom/are/I/friends.
8) names/are/what/their?
9) tigers/strong/are?
10) little/this/dog/funny/is.
11) not/long/snake/is/that.
12) a teacher /is/brother/my/not.
13) friend/is/Ann/her?
Exercise 3. Complete the sentence with is, is not, are, are not, am or am not.
1. I ___ Spanish, I ‘m Ukrainian.
2. Peter __ a good students. He ___ bad one.
3. Your eyes ___ blue. They’re brown.
4. My sister ___ a police officer, she’s a journalist.
5. ___ his brother tall?
6. The bus ___ late, it’s here now.
7. ___ you okay?
8. That film ___ very good. The story is very boring.
9. They ___ tired, they’re hungry.
10. ___ it cold today?
Exercise 4. Read and complete.
a) .......she a dancer? No,................
b) .......they from Japan? Yes,..........
c) .......he a bus driver? No,.............
109
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
.......it a pet? No,....................
.......they dirty? Yes,..................
.......Mary from Italy? No,............
.......Mr Dane a doctor? Yes,.........
.......that Kim? No,....................
.......you a pilot? No,..................
.......they penguins? Yes,..............
.......you dancers? Yes,................
Exercise 5. Complete the dialogue with the correct form of the verb to be.
Daniela: Hello, ___ you from here?
Estevan: No, we ___. ___ you?
Daniela: No, I ___ from Italy. My name ___ Daniela.
Estevan: Nice to meet you. I ___ Estevan. And this ___ Maite and Javier.
Daniel: This ___ Estelle, and this ___ Maria. Where ___ you from?
Estevan: We ___ from Spain.
Daniela: ___ you from Spain.
Estevan: No, we ___. We ___ from the north of Spain. Javier and I ____ from
Bilbao, and Maite ___ from San Sebastian.
Daniela: ___ ___ you here on holiday?
Estevan: No, we ___. It ___ a study trip. This ___ a beautiful place.
Daniela: Yes, it ___. ___ the trip fun?
Estevan: Some of it. The museums ___ boring. ___ you here for a holiday?
Daniela: Yes, I __ with my parents but I want to be with my friends. It ___ much
fun.
Exercise 6. Fill in the verb to be into the correct form.
1. Tom _____ a football player and his brother ______ a tennis player.
2. She ____ from Sydney, Australia. Her friend ____ from Houston, USA. They
_____ twelve years old. They ____ pupils.
3. We ______ pupils. We _____ at school now.
4. Joe _______ a member of the school band. He ______ from the UK.
5. Tim and Tom ____ brothers. They ___ eleven years old. They ___ from Canada.
6. I ____ from Slovenia. I ___ Slovenian. Lucia ____ from Italy. She's Italian.
7. What time is it? – It ______ three thirty.
8. These houses ______ old, but our house ______ new.
9. Sara and her friends _______ in the park now.
10. Is this your notebook? –No, it isn't. It ______ Maja's notebook.
11. How old are they? – They ______ thirteen.
12. Is Maria Austrian? – Yes, she _______.
Exercise 7. Fill in the right answer.
1) My name _______ Elizabeth. What _______ your name?
2) My book and my pen ______ in the bag. Where ______ your books?
110
3) My kitten _______ black and white. What colour ________ your kitten?
4) My sister _____ a student . _______ your elder brother a student, too?
5) I ________ strong. ________ you strong?
6) It _______ not my pencil. My pencil _________ on the floor.
7) I have got two aunts. They _____ twins. They ____ my father’s sisters.
8) My father __________ a driver. What __________ your father’s job?
9) These balls ________ small. _________ there a big one?
Exercise 8. Use the right form of the verb to be.
1. The information about this company ___ encouraging. 2. All the furniture in this
office ___ the latest design. 3. My knowledge of German ___ very limited. 4. These
shorts ___ too long. 5. This equipment ___ for camping. 6. The scissors ___ here a
minute ago. 7. The Government ___ of the opinion that money in the accounts ___
siphoned out of the country. 8. These trousers ___ too tight. 9. Where ___ your
clothes made? 10. ___ the scales over there electronic? 11. There ___ a hair on my
dinner plate. 12. Yesterday's homework ___ rather difficult. 13. Your advice ___ very
timely. Thank you. 14. The news ___ too good to be true. 15. The team ___ no more
than seven young men.
Exercise 9. Fill in the correct forms of the verb to be.
1. ____ the kids at school today? –No, they ___. They _____ at the beach.
2. Where ______ the dog and the child? –They _____ under the table.
3. The tourists ______ in Paris. They ____ in Venice.
4. Sam ____ happy. He _____ very sad because his friend has gone away.
5. It _________ Christmas. It _______ Halloween.
6. _____ the children at home? – No, they ____. They ____ in the country.
7. ____ Rita at the cinema? –No. she _____. She _______ at the zoo.
8. The children __________ in the sea. They __________ on the sand.
THE VERB TO HAVE (GOT)
Present
I/We/You/They have a car.
He/She/It has a car.
I/We/You/They do not (don’t) have a car.
He/She/It does not (doesn’t) have a car.
Past
I/We/You/They/He/She/It had a car.
I/We/You/They/He/She/It didn’t have a car.
Did I/We/You/They/He/She/It have a car?
Future
I/We/You/They/He/She/It will have a car.
111
I/We/You/They/He/She/It will not (won’t) have a car.
Will I/We/You/They/He/She/It have a car?
Do I/We/You/They have a car?
Does He/She/It have a car?
We can use have in several different ways.
Auxiliary verb
We use have/has as an auxiliary verb to form the Present Perfect tense.
Have you seen my pen? He hasn’t had a holiday for ten years.
Possession
We use have as a verb to talk about possessions, relationships, illnesses and the
characteristics of people and things. We form questions and negatives with the
auxiliary verbs do, does and did.
I have a Toshiba laptop.
Does she have any children?
I didn’t have time to do my homework.
In Britain, people often say have got instead of have. The structure is the same as
the Preset Perfect: have/has + got (Past Participle of get), but we use it to talk about
the Present.
I’ve got a Toshiba laptop.
Has she got any children?
Have got is informal. It is common in conversation but not usual in written
English. We don’t use got in the Past.
When I was at university, I had a motorbike.
Actions
We use have + object to talk about different actions. In these expressions have can
mean:
to eat/drink
have
breakfast/lunch/dinner/a meal/a drink/coffee
to take
have
a bath/a shower/a rest/a holiday/a day off/a rest
to enjoy
have
a good time/a nice evening
to give birth to have
a baby
Some verbs can be used as nouns after have:
swim – have a swim
walk – have a walk
ride – have a ride
chat – have a chat
wash – have a wash
look – have a look
Learn the following word-expressions by heart.
TO HAVE
to have a good/pleasant/bad/time (evening) –
)
to have breakfast/dinner –
to have a bite –
to have a cup of coffee –
to have an ice-cream –
to have a cigar –
112
to have a class –
to have a walk / a swim / a dance with somebody –
to have a talk/a chat with somebody –
to have a look –
to have a rest –
to have a party –
to have a holiday –
to have a bath/a shower –
to have an accident –
,
to have an experience –
,
to have a dream –
to have a nap –
to have difficulty –
,
to have trouble(s) –
to have fun – (
to have a pity on somebody –
to have a baby (= to give birth to a baby) –
to have an opportunity to do something –
to have a (head)ache –
(
)
to have a bad cold –
to have somebody in –
,
to have a letter / a telegram / a post card / a parcel –
/
to have in mind –
,
to have to do with somebody/something –
/
/
,
,
/
/
,
to have something on –
Exercise 1. Fill in the necessary form of the verb to have.
1. This year we ___ some production growth.
2. My friend ___ many English books in origin.
3. They ___ a small business.
4. Yesterday we ___ only total indicators.
5. Last year they ___ better job.
6. “Waiter, I would like ___ some more tea.”
7. Next year you ___ some improvement in labour resources.
8. This idea ___ nothing to do with our decisions.
9. Next year our students ___ three periods in English.
10. Dr.Hellen ___ a large home library.
Exercise 2. Use the prompts to write sentences with have got.
1. They/a fast computer.
2. She/a digital camera.
113
3. They/good teacher.
4. Sarah/long hair.
5. She/friends in London.
6. Dan/a cold.
7. They/exam next week.
Exercise 3. Complete the gaps with the expressions below. Make any changes
necessary.
have a rest
have a look
have a baby
have a nice meal
have a chat
have a walk
have a fantastic time
1. I’m feeling tired, I’m going to have a rest.
2. What was the restaurant like? I hope you ___.
3. In this country, you can take maternity leave when you ___.
4. The director wants to ___ with me about my exam results.
5. They say it’s a good idea to ___ every day to keep fit.
6. It was a wonderful holiday, we ___.
7. Will you let me ___ at your revision notes?
Exercise 4. Put in “have” or “has”.
1. England ... a mild climate. 2. She didn’t ... a letter from him last week. 3. You ...
some mistakes in your pronunciation. 4. This boy ... a good influence on his friend. 5.
... you many friends in your group? 6. Our students ... a lot of work to do at the end of
the term. 7. We ... to finish our work at 4 o’clock. 8. I ... translated nothing for a
week, not even a page. 9. He ... no patience.
Exercise 5. Fill in the blanks with "have" or "has"
1. I ___ a new bicycle.
2. You ___ a new house.
3. Anna ___ a big bag.
4. Peter ___ an old book.
5. My mother ___ an old umbrella.
6. My friends ___ a new ball.
7. Kate ___ a pretty dress.
8. David ___ a good book.
Exercise 6. Translate the sentences.
1.
.
2.
,
.
3.
4.
.
5.
,
.
6.
,
.
7.
,
8.
20,
.
,
.
.
25.
114
9.
10.
.
.
PLURAL NOUNS
In general the plural of a noun is formed by adding -S to the noun.
Singular
Plural
car
cars
house
houses
book
books
bird
birds
pencil
pencils
However:
1. When the noun ends in SS, SH, CH or X, we add -ES to the noun.
Singular
Plural
kiss
kisses
wish
wishes
match
matches
box
boxes
fox
foxes
I have a box in my bedroom. - I have three boxes in my bedroom.
2. When the noun ends in a VOWEL + Y, we add -S to the noun.
Singular
Plural
boy
boys
holiday
holidays
key
keys
guy
guys
3. When the noun ends in a CONSONANT + Y, we remove Y and add -IES to the
noun.
Singular
Plural
party
parties
lady
ladies
story
stories
nanny
nannies
cities
city
4. If the noun ends in F or FE, we remove the F/FE and add -VES to the noun.
Singular
Plural
life
lives
leaf
leaves
thief
thieves
wife
wives
5. If the noun ends in IS, we change it to ES.
115
Singular
Plural
analysis
analyses
basis
bases
crisis
crises
6. There are a number of nouns that don't follow these rules. They are irregular
and you need to learn them individually because they don't normally have an S on the
end.
Singular
Plural
man
men
woman
women
child
children
foot
feet
tooth
teeth
goose
geese
mouse
mice
ox
oxen
There is a child in the park.
There are many children in the park.
7. There are some nouns in English that are the same in the singular and the plural.
Singular
Plural
fish
fish
sheep
sheep
deer
deer
moose
moose
aircraft
aircraft
I can see a sheep in the field.
I can see ten sheep in the field.
Cattle, people and police are plural words with no singular.
Cattle are selling for very high prices this year. (NOT Cattle is selling…)
The police are searching for a tall dark man with a beard. (NOT The police is
searching …)
People are funny. (NOT People is funny.)
Singular and plural: singular words ending in –s
Some words that end in –s are singular. Some important examples are:
A Billiards, draught and other names of games ending in –s.
Draughts is an easier game than chess.
B Measles, rabies and other names of illnesses ending in –s.
Rabies is widespread in Europe. We hope we can keep it out of Britain.
C athletics, politics, mathematics and other words ending in –ics.
The mathematics that I did at school has not been very useful to me.
D news
Ten o’clock. Here is the news.
116
Remember:
Adjectives do not take –s in the plural.
A happy girl - two happy girls
We often use plural verbs with words like family, team, government, which refer
to group of people.
My family have decided to move to Nottingham.
We also use plural pronouns, and we use who, not which.
My family are wonderful. They do all they can for me.
“How are the team?” “They have very confident.” “Not surprising.
They’re the only team who have ever won all their matches right through the
season.”
We prefer singular verbs and pronouns (and which) if we see the group as an
‘impersonal’ unit.
The average family (which has four members)…
A number of and a group of are used with plural nouns, pronouns and verbs.
A number of my friends feel that they are not properly paid for the work they do
(NOT A number of my friends feels…)
Exercise 1. Give the plural of:
A. A pin, a hat, a baby, potato, a piano, a photo, a knife, a roof, a half, a leaf, a
cliff, a life, a family, a berry, a valley, a century, a penny, a watch, a taxi.
B. A man, a woman, a foot, a tooth, a sheep, a fish, an ox, a child, a mouse, a
house, a goose, a deer, a means.
C. A passer-by, a mother-in-law, a room-mate, a forget-me-not, a merry-go-round,
a school-inspector, a commander-in-chief, a personnel-manager, a woman-driver, a
man-servant, a boyfriend, a grown-up.
Exercise 2. Give the plural form of the words underlined.
1. I saw a mouse running across the floor. 2. The baby got a new tooth. 3. I need a
match. 4. He cooked a potato for dinner. 5. I visited a city in Austria. 6. She
photographed a leaf. 7. I caught a fish. 8. She talked to a child. 9. I saw a sheep in the
farmyard. 10. When I was in the park yesterday, I saw a goose. 11. He packed a box.
12. The wagon is being pulled by an ox. 13. I told the children about a wolf and a fox.
14. We read a story about an Indian chief. 15. Every day I read in the newspaper
about a new crisis in the world. 16. In science class we studied a phenomenon of
nature.
Exercise 3. Write down the following sentences in plural form.
1. What kind of printer is this? – This is a fast printer.
2. It’s an old diskette. – Which diskette is old? – This one.
3. Is it the programmer’s or the secretary’s PC? – It is the programmer’s PC.
4. Is that this business lady’s or businessman’s organizer? – It’s that businessman’s
organizer.
117
5. That isn’t this operator’s mainframe. – Whose mainframe is it, than? – This
boss’s. That’s his mainframe.
POSSESSIVE ‘S: FORMS
Spelling
Singular noun + ‘s : my father’s car
Plural noun + ‘ : my parents’ house
Irregular plural + ‘s : the children’s room
We sometimes just add an apostrophe (‘) to a singular noun ending in – s:
Socrates’ ideas. But ‘s is more common: Charles’s wife. We can add ‘s to a whole
phrase: the man next door’s wife.
Pronunciation
The ending ‘s is pronounces just like a plural ending. The apostrophe (‘) in a form
like parents’ does not change the pronunciation at all.
Possessives are not usually used together with other determiners.
The car that is John’s is John’s car, not the John’s car.
Have you met Jack’s new girl-friend? (NOT… the Jack’s new girl-friend?)
We can use the possessive without a following noun.
‘Whose is that?’ ‘Peter’s’.
We often talk about shops and people’s houses in this way.
Alice is at the hairdresser’s.
We had a nice at John and Sarah’s last night.
Possessive’s: use
Meaning
We can use the possessive ‘s to talk about several different sorts of ideas. The
meaning is often similar to the meaning of have.
That is my father’s house. (My father has that house).
Mary’s brother is a lawyer. (Mary has a brother who is a lawyer).
the plan’s importance (the importance that the plan has)
Other meaning are possible.
I didn’t believe the girl’s story. (The girl told a story).
Have you read John’s letter? (John wrote a letter).
The government’s decision (The government made a decision).
The train’s arrival (The train arrived).
If there are many possessors of the same object, the ´s comes after the last one.
Example: Paul and Susan´s house.
If the object belong to each one of possessors, the ´s comes after each one.
Example: Paul´s and Susan´s houses.
If the possessor is an object, the possessive case is formed with the preposition
of.
118
Example: The arms of the chair.
‘s and of
We use the possessive structure most often when the first noun (A) is the name of
something living. In other cases, we often use a structure with of (the B of A).
Compare:
My father’s house (NOT the house of my father)
The plan’s importance OR the importance of the plan
Time expressions
We often use the possessive to refer to particular times, days, weeks, etc.
this evening’s performance
last Sunday’s paper
next week’s TV programmes
this year’s profits
But we do not use the possessive when the expression of time has a ‘general’
meaning.
the nine o’clock news (NOT the nine o’clock’s news)
a Sunday newspaper (NOT a Sunday’s newspaper)
We also use the possessive in ‘measuring’ expression of time which begin with a
number.
ten minutes’ walk
two weeks’ holiday
Noun + noun
We can also put two nouns together in the structure noun + noun (for example a
table leg; a Sunday newspaper).
Possessives with determiners (a friend of mine, etc)
We cannot put a possessive together with another determiner before a noun. We
can say my friend, Ann’s friend, a friend or that friend, but not a my friend or that
Ann’s friend.
Determiner + noun + of + possessive
That policeman is a friend of mine.
Here’s that friend of yours.
I met another boyfriend of Lucy’s yesterday.
Have you heard this new idea of the boss’s?
Exercise 1. Replace the of-phrase by the noun in the possessive case.
1. The field of my mother. 2. The speech of the President. 3. The farm of old
McDonald. 4. The novels by D.Steel. 5. The hobbies of the children. 6. The poems by
Burns. 7. The duties of a man. 8. A conference of doctors. 9. The life of a bodyguard.
10. The policy of France. 11. The streets of London. 12. The bank of the river. 13.
The rays of the sun. 14. The teas of India. 15. The history of the world. 16. The
difficulties of the companies. 17. The crew of a sip. 18. A holiday for a week. 19. A
break for five minutes.
Exercise 2. Join the two or three nouns. Sometimes you have to use –'s or –s';
and sometimes you have to use ... of... .
119
1. the mother / Ann; 2. the jacket / that man; 3. the daughter / Charles; 4. the
newspaper / yesterday; 5. the birthday / my father; 6. the name / this street; 7. the toys
/ the children; 8. the manager / the company; 9. the result / the hockey match; 10. the
garden / our neighbours; 11. the children / Don and Mary; 12. the economic policy /
the government; 13. the husband / Catherine; 14. the husband / the woman talking to
Mary; 15. the car / the parents / Mike; 16. the wedding / the friend / Helen.
Exercise 3. Read and translate the sentences.
1. She lay curled in a ball, staring into the fire's bright flames. 2. Derek's brother's
name is Gregory. 3. She took a slice with a piece of last year's cheese on it. 4. In the
evening I dined in the hotel's restaurant. 5. He reserved a seat on the following week's
bus. 6. Michael works at Bill and Susan's firm, who are partners. 7. They got a fax
from the Pakistani Prime Minister's office. 8. The Queen of England's palace is a
quarter of an hour's ride from the centre of London. 9. Then he drove me to Alex's.
10. Her husband and all her kids are coming to Aunt Emily's. 11. Occasionally I have
a snack at McDonald's. 12. Cadbury's make fine chocolate.
Exercise 4. Use the words in brackets in the possessive case.
1. Last week was my (daughter) six birthday. 2. (Children) toys are very attractive
these days. 3. Have you ever met (Denis) wife? 4. I'll see you in an (hour) time. 5.
The house will be sold in two (week) time. 6. We'll be in Paris in three (hours) time.
7. How much does a (boy) jacket cost these days? 8. What's the name of (Charles)
partner? 9. Prague isn't more than a (day) journey from here. 10. Look at the roses in
(Mrs. Jones) garden. 11. I'm trying to attract the (waitress) attention. 12. The oceans
cover 70% of the (earth) surface. 13. Now comes the (journey) end.
Exercise 5. Add s/ 's/ s'/ ' where necessary.
1. Student grades depend on their tests.
2. Charles met Helen at my parents house.
3. We all went to Charles wedding.
4. The brown cottage is shining like a new pin.
5. The juror verdict was fair.
6. Women fashion change more frequently than men.
7. Last night game was something.
8. I need some children toys for my small nephew.
Exercise 6. Write of where necessary in these sentences.
1. The population of the world will soon be seven billion people.
2. Oceans cover 61% the Earth.
3. The Earth is 150 million ____ kilometers from the Sun.
4 .Almost one third ____ the world's population is under 15 years old.
5. Over half the world's population lives in cities.
120
THERE IS – THERE ARE
There is (There’s) a book on the table.
There are three students in the room.
There is not a laboratory in the school.
There are not any plants in the classroom.
Is there an Internet connection in the room?
Are there any notes in your book?
Use
We use there is/there are to say something exists.
There is a mistake in this exercise.
There are 109 elements in the Periodic Table.
After we say that something exists with there is/there are we can then use it is or
they are to give more details.
There is a computer in the classroom. It’s very useful.
There is a book on the table. It’s not mine.
There are some instructions available for this DVD but they are on the Internet.
Positive Sentences
We use there is for singular and there are for plural.
There is one table in the classroom.
There are three chairs in the classroom.
There is a spider in the bath.
There are many people at the bus stop.
Contractions
The contraction of there is there's.
There's a good song on the radio.
There's only one chocolate left in the box.
You cannot contract there are.
There are nine cats on the roof.
There are only five weeks until Christmas.
Negative Form
The negative is formed by putting not after is or are:
There is not a horse in the field.
There are not eight children in the school.
There is not a tree in the garden.
There are not two elephants in the zoo.
The Negative contractions are:
There's not = There isn't
There are not = There aren't
There Are with ANY
When we want to indicate that a zero quantity of something exists we use there
aren't any.
There aren't any people at the party.
There aren't any trees in my street.
121
We also use this structure with uncountable nouns:
There isn't any water in the swimming pool.
There isn't any sugar in my coffee.
Questions
To form a question we place is / are in front of there.
We also use there is / are in short answers.
Is there a dog in the supermarket? - No, there isn't.
Are there any dogs in the park? - Yes, there are.
Is there a security guard in the shop? - Yes, there is.
Are there any polar bears in Antarctica? - No, there aren't.
Is there any ice-cream in the freezer? - Yes, there is.
HOW MANY with Are There
If we want to find out the number of objects that exist we use How many in the
following form:
How many + plural noun + are there (+ complement).
How many dogs are there in the park?
How many students are there in your class?
How many countries are there in South America?
How many Star Wars films are there?
Exercise 1. Complete the sentence with is or are.
1. There ___ 25 students in the class.
2. There ___ a hospital in the city centre.
3. There ___ a big supermarket near my house.
4. There ___ two teachers in the room.
5. There ___ 12 songs on this CD.
6. There ___ a good film on TV tonight.
7. There ___ his friends.
8. There ___ your mobile phone.
9. There ___ a computer and a TV in my room.
10. There ___ seven books in my bag.
11. There ___ no homework today.
Exercise 2. Complete the sentence with there or it.
1. There is a CD on the desk. ___ is mine.
2. ___ is a nice day today.
3. ___ is a new student in my class.
4. There is a park next to my house. ___ is very beautiful.
5. ___ is three o’clock.
6. ___ is no one in the room.
7. ___ is a man outside the window.
8. There is a big shopping centre in my town. ___ is very popular.
9. ___ is a teacher at my university called Mr. Smith.
122
10. ___ is so hot in this room!
11. ___ is a swimming pool at my school.___ is also a tennis court.
Exercise 3. Complete the sentence with there, it or they.
1. There are two bottles of water on the table.
2. ___ are nurses, not doctors.
3. There’s a cat in the kitchen. ___ is black and white.
4. There are 30 people at the party. ___ are all my friends.
5. ___ is cold outside. There’s snow on the ground.
6. ___ are from London.
7. They are in the hall. ___ is an exam now.
8. ___ is a very interesting book.
9. My key is in my pocket. ___ is in a safe place!
Exercise 4. Complete the gaps with there is/there isn’t or there are/there aren’t.
1. ___ twelve stars on the European flag.
2. ___ any gravity in space.
3. ___ a Rome in every continent of the world.
4. ___ any deserts in Europe.
5. ___ over 40,000 characters in Chinese writing.
6. In Las Vegas casinos ___ any clocks.
7. In over 90% of plane crashers ___ a survivor.
8. In an average bar of chocolate ___ eight insect legs!
Exercise 5. Complete the questions with is there or are there.
1. Is there a cathedral? – Yes, there is.
2. ___ many shops? –
3. ___ a shopping centre? –
4. ___ a hospital? –
5. ___ many things to do and see? –
6. ___ a museum? –
7. ___ a theatre? –
8. ___ good bus and train services? –
Exercise 6. Complete the sentence with there, it or they.
1. ___ are five continents. ___ are Africa, America, Asia, Australia and Europe.
2. ___ is someone in the house. Who is ___?
3. ___ is very wet today and ___ is a lot of traffic.
4. In his class ___ are 12 students but ___ aren’t any girls. ___ are all boys.
5. What time is ___? ___ is half past four.
6. ___ are some shops in the village but ___ are all closed.
7. ___ is a cinema but ___ aren’t any good films on.
8. ___ aren’t any tickets left for the concert. ___ is sold out.
123
Exercise 7. Fill in the correct form of it is/there is.
Insert it is/there is in the spaces. In some sentences, contracted plural, negative
and interrogative forms, or the past or future tense are required.
1. What's the time? - ___ 3.30. - And what's the date? - ___ the 24th.
2. How far ___ to York? - ___ 50 miles.
3. ___ very stormy last night. - Yes, ___ storms all over the country.
4. ___ freezing very hard. ___ ice on the lake tomorrow.
5. As ___ sunny she decided to take the children to the sea.
6. Why don't you go for a walk? ___a pity to stay in when ___ so nice outside.
7. ___ not any shadows because ___ not any sun.
8. ___ going to be a bus strike tomorrow. - ___ all right if ___ a fine day; but if
___ wet ___ long queues on the Underground.
9. ___ not any glass in the windows; that is why ___ so cold in the room.
10. ___ very wet yesterday; ___ impossible to go out.
11. ___ a lot of rain last week. ___ floods everywhere.
12. ___ a thick fog last night. ___ several accidents on the motorway.
13. ___ foolish to drive fast when ___ foggy.
14. ___ difficult to find your way round this town ___ so many streets all looking
exactly alike.
15. Come on, children! ___ time to get up! ___ nearly breakfast time.
16. ___ lunch time when we get to York, so let's have lunch there. - No, ___ not be
time for lunch because our train to Edinburgh leaves York at 13.15.
17. ___ a funny smell here. ___ turpentine?
18. ___ all sorts of stories about Robin Hood, but ___ not known exactly who he
was or what he did.
19. ___ said that if you break a mirror you'll be unlucky for seven years.
20. As he had very bad sight ___ difficult for him to recognize people.
21. 'Can I have a Telegraph, please?' said the customer. 'I'm afraid ___ not any
left,' said the newsagent. 'But ___ a Guardian on the rack beside you. Why not take
that? ___ just as good.'
22. ___not necessary to carry your passport everywhere with you but ___
advisable to carry some document of identity.
23. ___ a guard outside the door and ___ bars on the windows. ___ impossible to
escape.
24. ___ a garage behind the hotel? - Yes, but ___ rather full. I don't think ___ room
for your car.
25. One night ___ a heavy fall of snow which blocked all the roads.
Luckily ___ plenty of food in the house.
THIS - THAT - THESE -THOSE
Demonstrative Pronouns
124
Singular
Plural
Here
This
These
There
That
Those
These words are called demonstrative pronouns and they are used to show the
relative distance between the speaker and the noun.
This / these and that / those
1. We use this and these to refer to things, people and animals that are near us.
2. We use that and those to refer to things, people and animals that are some
distance away from us.
3. Note (opposite) that in short answers we usually use it/they instead of
this/that/these/those.
We use this (singular) and these (plural) to refer to something that is here / near.
Examples: This is my car. (singular) - These are our children. (plural)
We use that (singular) and those (plural) to refer to something that is there / far.
Examples: That is our house. (singular) - Those are my shoes. (plural)
Note that the verb changes (i.e. singular / plural) depending on the pronoun that
you use.
You can also use demonstrative pronouns with a noun.
Examples:
This party is boring. (singular)
That city is busy. (singular)
These chocolates are delicious. (plural)
Those flowers are beautiful. (plural)
If an action is near in time we tend to use this / these.
If an action has finished or is in the past we use that / those.
Examples:
This is a good meal. (at the time of eating)
Those girls we met last night were silly. (an event that happened in the past).
The expressions this is / that is are also common when you talk on the phone or
you introduce people.
Examples:
"Hello, this is Peter."
Carol, this is my friend Simon. Simon, this is Carol.
Exercise 1. Complete the sentences. Write the correct words from the
brackets.
1. We need some advice about ___ equipment. (a/some; this/these)
2. Have you finished all ____ work? (that/those)
3. ___ stairs ____ dangerous. (this/these; is/are)
4. all ____ information useful? (was/were; that/those)
5. The news good, I'm afraid. (isn't/ aren't)
6. How much sunglasses? (is this/are these)
7. ___ clothes ___ good on you. (that/those; look/looks)
125
8. A. You've put on weight.
B. No, I think scales ___ wrong. (this/these; is/are)
9. ____ all our luggage arrived now? (has/have)
10. A. Do you like ____ jeans? (this/these)
B. Yes, but ___ expensive. (it's/they're)
NUMBERS
There are two main types of numbers:
Cardinal Numbers - 1 (one), 2 (two) etc. (Used mainly for counting)
Ordinal Numbers - 1st (first), 2nd (second) etc. (Used mainly for putting things in
a sequence)
Cardinal Numbers
Cardinal numbers are normally used when you:
count things: I have two brothers. There are thirty-one days in January.
give your age: I am thirty-three years old. My sister is twenty-seven years old.
give your telephone number: Our phone number is two-six-three, three-eight-fourseven. (481-2240)
give years: She was born in nineteen seventy-five (1975). America was discovered
in fourteen ninety-two
Notice how we divide the year into two parts. This is the form for year up to 1999.
For the year 2000 and on, we say two thousand (2000), two thousand and one (2001),
two thousand and two (2002) etc.
Ordinal Numbers
You can normally create Ordinal numbers by adding -TH to the end of a Cardinal
Number.
Ordinal numbers are normally used when you:
give a date: My birthday is on the 27th of January. (Twenty-seventh of January)
put things in a sequence or order: Liverpool came second in the football league last
year.
give the floor of a building: His office is on the tenth floor.
have birthdays: He had a huge party for his twenty-first birthday.
Cardinal Numbers
21 - twenty-one
11 - eleven
1 - one
22 - twenty-two
12 - twelve
2 - two
23 - twenty-three
13 - thirteen
3 - three
30 - thirty
14 - fourteen
4 - four
40 - forty
15 - fifteen
5 - five
50 - fifty
16 - sixteen
6 - six
60 - sixty
17 - seventeen
7 - seven
70 - seventy
18 - eighteen
8 - eight
80 - eighty
19 - nineteen
9 - nine
90 - ninety
20 - twenty
10 - ten
126
10,000,000 - ten
300 - three hundred
100 - one hundred*
million
1000 - one thousand
101 - one hundred
1,000,000
one
and one
million
200 - two hundred
*e.g. (127) one hundred and twenty-seven OR (127) a hundred and twenty-seven.
The same rule applies for one thousand (a thousand) and one million (a million)
Notice that you need to use a hyphen (-) when you write the numbers between 21
and 99.
With long numbers, we usually divide them into groups of three which are divided
by a comma. e.g. 5000000 (5 million) is normally written as 5,000,000
Ordinal Numbers
80th - eightieth
15th - fifteenth
1st - first
90th - ninetieth
16th - sixteenth
2nd - second
100th - hundredth
17th - seventeenth
3rd - third
101th - hundred and
18th - eighteenth
4th - fourth
first
19th - nineteenth
5th - fifth
200th
two
20th - twentieth
6th - sixth
hundredth
21st - twenty-first
7th - seventh
300th
three
22nd - twenty-second
8th - eighth
hundredth
23rd - twenty-third
9th - ninth
1,000th - thousandth
30th - thirtieth
10th - tenth
1,000,000th-ten
40th - fortieth
11th - eleventh
millionth
50th - fiftieth
12th - twelfth
60th - sixtieth
13th - thirteenth
70th - seventieth
14th - fourteenth
Fractions
We say fractions like this:
1/8 – one eighth
3/7 – three sevenths
2/5 – two fifths
11/16 – eleven sixteenths
We normally use a singular verb after fractions below 1.
Three quarters of a ton is too much.
We use a plural with fractions and decimals over 1.
one and a half hours (NOT one and a half hour)
1-3 millimeters (NOT 1-3 millimeters)
Decimals
We say decimal fractions like this:
0.125 – nought point one two five
(NOT 0,125 nought comma one two five)
3.7 three point seven
Nought, zero, nil etc.
The figure 0 is usually called nought in British English, and zero in American
English.
When we say numbers one figure at a time, 0 is called oh (like the letter O).
My account number is four one three oh six.
127
In measurements of temperature, 0 is called zero.
Zero degrees Centigrade is thirty-two degrees Fahrenheit.
Zero scores in team games are called nil (American zero).
Zero in tennis and similar games is called love.
Telephone numbers
We say each figure separately. When the same figure comes twice, we usually say
double (British English only).
307 4922 three oh seven four nine double two
We normally give telephones by saying each individual number in it:
Our phone number is two six three, three eight four seven. (263-3847)
When there is a zero (0) in our telephone number, we often say O like the name of
the letter O.
e.g. 505-1023 = five-O-five, one-O-two-three.
If a phone number contains two of the same numbers together, we usually say
double (number).
If a phone number contains three of the same numbers together, we usually say
triple (number)
e.g. (212-8555) two one two, eight triple five.
The above rules for telephone numbers also apply to fax numbers.
To ask for someone's telephone number we say:
What's your phone number? It's 555-2565.
What is Woodward Chile's phone number? It's 789-0135.
We don't normally say: What's your telephone number? (Though it IS
grammatically correct)
When you reply, you can give just your telephone number OR say: It's + (your
phone number).
Kings and Queens
We say the numbers like this:
Henry VII Henry the eighth
Louis XIV Louis the Fourteenth
Floors
The ground floor of a British house is the first floor of an American house;
The British first floor is the American second floor, etc.
And
In British English, we use and between the hundreds and the tens in a number.
128
310 – three hundred and ten (US three hundred ten)
5,642 – five thousand, six hundred and forty-two
Note that in writing we use commas (,) to separate thousands.
A and one
We can say a hundred or one hundred, a thousand or one thousand. One is more
formal.
I want to live for a hundred years. (NOT … for hundred years).
Pay Mr J Baron one thousand pounds. (on a cheque).
We only use at the beginning of a number. Compare:
a hundred three thousand one hundred
We can use a with other measurement words.
a pint
a foot
a mile
Plurals without – s
After a number of determiner, hundred, thousand, million and dozen have no final
–s. compare:
five hundred pounds
hundreds of pounds
several thousand times
It cost thousands.
Other number expressions have no –s when they are used as adjectives.
a five-pound note
a three-mile walk
Measurements
We use be in measurements.
She’s five feet eight (inches tall).
I’m sixty-eight kilos.
What shoe size are you?
In an informal style, we often use foot instead of feet when we talk about people’s
heights.
My father’s six foot two.
Money
1p one penny (informal: one p/pi:/) or a penny
5p five pence (informal: five p)
£3.75 three pounds seventy-five
When we use sums of money as adjectives, we use singular forms.
a five-pound note (NOT a five pounds note)
Adjectives
When expressions of measurement, amount and quality are used as adjectives, they
are normally singular.
a ten-mile walk (NOT a ten miles walk)
six two-hour lessons
a three-month-old baby
We can use possessives in expressions of time.
a week’s holidays
129
four day’s journey
There are
When we count the number of people in a group, we often use the structure there
are + number + of + pronoun.
There are only seven of us here today.
There were twelve of us in my family. (NOT We were twelve…)
Spoken calculations
Common ways of calculating are:
2+2=4
two and two is/are four (informal)
two plus two equals four (formal)
7-4=3
four from seven is three (informal)
seven minus four equals three (formal)
3×4=12 three fours are twelve (informal)
three multiplies by four equals twelve (formal)
9÷3=3
nine divided by three equals three
Exercise 1. Give the right form of the figures in brackets.
1. My birthday is on ___ of ___. 2. Find file (11) and correct (2) sentence. 3.
Catherine (2) put a monument to Peter (1). 4. What's the date today? – It's ___ of ___
today. 5. Read (3) paragraph. 6. My brother is (21) today. 7. They are celebrating
their (15) anniversary on Saturday. 8. Take (1) turning to the right. 9. You'll find text
(12) on (30) page. 10. We live on (6) floor. 11. There are more than (200) languages
spoken in Nigeria. 12. In the jungle we were attacked by (1 000 000) of mosquitoes.
13. If you need money badly, we can give you a loan of (200) dollars. 14. Will you
give me (2) chance. 15. There are (300) kinds of macaroni in Italy. 16. Statistics say
that more than (4 000 000) adults in Britain have trouble with reading and writing.
Exercise 2. How do you say these numbers in English?
1) 462; 2) 2 ½; 3) 2,345; 4) 6.75; 5) 0.25; 6) 3 ; 7) 1,250.000; 8) 10,04; 9) 47%;
10) 10 September; 11) 3 July; 12) 602 8477 (phone number); 13) -5º Centigrade; 14)
in 1903; 15) 0.7 16) 1257; 17) 635-55-24 (phone number); 18) in 2000; 19) 12 of
August 2013; 20) 5.25.
Exercise 3. Answer these questions.
1. When were you born? 2. How much do you weight? 3. What is the number of
the flat or the house where you live? 4. Is that an odd or an even number? 5. What is
the approximate population of your town? 6. What is the approximate population of
your country? 7. What is the normal temperature of a healthy person? 8. How many
years are there in a millennium?
Exercise 4. Dates and Times
• Dates and times can be written using numbers. They can also be written using
words. A. Write the following dates using words instead of numbers.
Example: 11/03/99 November third, nineteen ninety nine.
130
1) 12/02/03
2) 02/22/1896
3) 02.13.04
4) 05-01-1098
5) 12/02/2010
6) 1501-1576
B. Directions: write the following times using words instead of numbers.
Example: 10::30 p.m. Ten thirty at night.
1) 8:30 p.m.
2) 10:45
3) 1:52 a.m.
4) 11:05
5) 12:00 p.m.
6) 12:00 a.m.
C. Directions: write a sentence using the date and/or time provided.
Example: 8:15 School starts at 8:15.
1)12:00 p.m.
2) 12/25/10, 8:0 a.m.
3) 12.31.10, 12:00 a.m.
Exercise 5. Write the numerals and dates.
1. 12th October 1492
2. 12th April 1961
3. 6th March 1876
4. 8,454 km
5. 206
6. 822
7. 824
8. 5,895 m
9. 19,888,000
10. 20th July 1969
Exercise 6. Choose the correct answer to the questions.
1. How far is New York from Buenos Aires?
2. When did Neil Armstrong first walk on the Moon?
3. How many bones are there in human body?
4. What is the population of Australia?
5. When did Christopher Columbus reach the West Indies?
6. How high is Mount Kilimanjaro?
7. When did Yuri Gagarin first go to space?
8. What is 477+345?
9. When was the first phone call made?
131
10. What is 1,568-744?
PRONOUNS
Pronouns are words that take the place of nouns.
Subject pronouns, representing the grammatical subject of the clause:
I, you, he, she, it, we, you, they
Object pronouns, representing the `direct complement' of the clause:
Me, you, him, her, it, us, you, them
Personal Pronouns
Subject pronouns
I
you
he
she
it
we
they
Object pronouns
me
you
him
her
it
us
them
Object Pronouns
The seven basic pronouns have one form when they are used as subjects and
another form when they are used as objects.
Subjects are what the sentence is about.
Objects are what is affected by the action of the subject.
I like whisky. (I is the subject).
I read books. (Books is the object as it is receiving the action).
Object pronouns are used instead of nouns, usually because we already know what
the object is. It makes the sentence easier to read and understand and avoids
repetition. We normally use object pronouns after a verb or a preposition.
Examples
I like horses.
Subject Pronoun
Horses don't like me. Object Pronoun
We talk to our neighbour.
Subject Pronoun
She talks to us.
Object Pronoun
They listen to the teacher.
Listen to me carefully.
Subject Pronoun
Object Pronoun
You speak very quickly.
We watch them on TV.
Subject Pronoun
Object Pronoun
The Object Pronoun - it
Be careful when using 'it' as an object pronoun because it is only in the correct
context that it has meaning. It needs to have already been mentioned or obvious to the
listener what you are referring to. Compare;
You are sitting on it! (The listener probably doesn't know what the speaker refers
to).
The letter is on the sofa. You are sitting on it! (It is obvious in the second sentence
132
that the reference is to the letter)
Possessive Pronouns
Possessive pronouns are used in English to avoid repeating information that is
already clear. In general it makes the sentence less confusing because the same
information is not being repeated.
This book is my book, not your book. (Sounds repetitive)
This book is mine, not yours. (Mine and yours are possessive pronouns)
In the sentence, mine is a possessive pronoun that replaces my book.
In the sentence, yours is a possessive pronoun that replaces your book.
The possessive pronouns in English are as follows:
Subject Possessive Pronouns
I
Mine
You
Yours
He
His
She
Hers
It
Its
We
Ours
You (pl)
Yours
They
Theirs
Examples:
I didn't have my umbrella so Marta lent me hers.
(I didn't have my umbrella so Marta lent me her umbrella).
Her car is faster than mine.
(Her car is faster than my car).
That food is ours and not theirs.
(That food is our food and not their food).
I know this drink is yours but I need to drink something.
(I know this drink is your drink but I need to drink something).
Remember that with possessive pronouns there are no apostrophes (').
Of yours
It is also very common to say a friend/some friends + of + possessive pronouns.
I saw one of your friends last night.
I saw a friend of yours last night.
Both of these sentences are correct and both common in English.
Yours faithfully - Yours sincerely
Yours is also used in English with faithfully or sincerely at the end of a formal
letter or e-mail. The two common expressions are:
Yours faithfully (If it someone that you don't know)
Yours sincerely (If it is someone that you know)
Reflexive Pronouns
We use reflexive pronouns to show that we are talking about the same person or
thing. They are used:
after certain verbs (kill, cut, behave, burn, enjoy, hurt, look at, teach, etc…)
when the subject and the object of the verb are the same person.
133
I’ve cut myself with the knife.
with the preposition by to show that someone does something by himself
without help.
Roy can fix his toy by himself.
It is the only area of English grammar that is reflexive.
Subject Pronouns
Reflexive Pronouns
I
Myself
You
Yourself
He
Himself
She
Herself
It
Itself
We
Ourselves
You (pl)
Yourselves
They
Themselves
If you are using YOU in the plural, the reflexive pronoun is yourselves.
Examples of sentences using reflexive pronouns:
My daughter likes to dress herself without my help.
I taught myself to play the guitar.
My cat always licks itself.
When we use reflexive pronouns.
1. When the subject and the object refer to the same person or thing.
He accidentally cut himself while he was chopping the vegetables.
She bought a present for herself.
We helped ourselves to the free drinks at the launch party.
They injured themselves during the rugby match.
I enjoyed myself at the concert.
The dog is scratching itself – it must have fleas!
2. We use them for emphasis.
The author signed the book for me herself! I did it myself.
3. In some cases we use it to have a similar meaning to also.
Annabelle was pretty happy last night. I was pretty happy myself.
When we don't use reflexive pronouns.
1. There are a number of verbs in English with which we rarely or never use
reflexive pronouns (as they are in other languages).
They include: adapt, behave, complain, concentrate, get up, hide, lie down, meet,
move, relax, remember, shave, shower, sit down.
2. After a preposition of place or location we use a personal pronoun and not a
reflexive pronoun.
He put the backpack next to him.
Ourselves, Themselves and Each Other
1. We use each other when two or more people or things perform the same action
134
to the other.
Our neighbors were shouting at each other all night.
My brothers always compete with each other in sport.
2. Take note of the difference between these two sentences:
Mark and Sarah killed themselves. (They each committed suicide).
Mark and Sarah killed each other. (Mark killed Sarah and she killed Mark).
More about Each Other
We use the reciprocal pronoun each other when the action is between two people,
and not reflexive.
They stared into each other's eyes.
The hate each other.
And to make the contrast clearer:
Mike and Carol bought each other presents for Christmas.
(Mike bought a present for Carol and Carol bought a present for Mike).
is very different to.
Mike and Carol bought themselves presents for Christmas.
(Mike bought a present for himself and Carol bought a present for herself).
Reflexive Pronouns with Objects
We use verb + reflexive pronoun + object when we do something for ourselves.
She cooked herself a quiche.
We taught ourselves French.
We use verb + object + reflexive pronoun when we want to emphasize that
another person did not do the action (or assist).
I repaired the tire myself.
They did the homework themselves.
My brother spoke to his boss himself about a raise.
By + Reflexive Pronouns
We use by + myself/yourself/himself etc when we are alone or not with another
person.
Jacob went to the party by himself.
Emma was sitting by herself.
Exercise 1. Rewrite the sentences in the plural. Be careful when using the
reflexive pronouns.
1. She arranged for everything by herself.
2. The cat washed itself with water.
3. Stop blaming yourself about the accident.
4. I looked at myself in the mirror.
5. You must take good care of yourself.
6. He could solve the problem by himself.
135
Exercise 2. Rewrite the sentences in the singular.
1. We learned the song by ourselves.
2. They fixed the broken pipe by themselves. (Joe)
3. You can’t keep all this food for yourselves. Share it with others.
4. Please be polite and behave yourselves.
5. Mom took us to the park and left us there by ourselves.
Exercise 3. Write suitable personal pronouns in each gap.
1. _______ thought the holiday would be ideal for us, and I said so.
2. Tim was late, so _______ had to run.
3. ____________hope those flowers are for me.
4. Why are you so angry? What´s wrong with ____________?
5. Anna and ____ are going to the cinema next weekend. Would you like to come
with ______?
6. Carol explained where ____________ had been.
7. John wanted Mary to follow ____________.
8. I was stopped by a man who wanted to ask ______ the way to the nearest park.
9. The shoes were lovely and ________ were just the right colour.
10. Hold the bag please while I put the shopping in ____________.
11. Susan has forgotten her keys. Could you take them to ____________.
Exercise 4. Fill in each gap with either a subject pronoun or object pronoun:
1. Have you seen my dad? _______ ’s wearing a red shirt.
2. Are _______ going to finish your dinner?
3. I don’t like Christopher. ____________ really annoys ____________ .
4. Your bag is over there. Take _______ with __________ when you go.
5. We always go to bed early. Ten o’clock is late for ____________ .
6. Her shoes were dirty, so ____________ cleaned ____________ .
7. I’m going to the cinema. Do _____ want to come with ______ ?
8. My brother rang last night. __________ was great to talk to ____.
9. Emily saw ____________ at the restaurant. They were having lunch.
10. The boy came up to ____________ and took my hand.
11. I don’t think the shop is open. _______ usually closes at five thirty.
12. I showed ________ my photos. He thought _______ were boring.
13. “How much is that CD?” “_______ think ________ ’s £11.99.”
14. Ben isn’t coming to see the film. _______ ’s seen _______ already.
15. It’s sunny today, isn’t ____________ ?
16. I went to see my aunt. ____________ was pleased to see ______ .
17. It’s good to see ____________ all. Thanks for coming.
18. Lara’s boyfriend has broken up with _____. ____ told ____ that ____ doesn’t
love her any more.
19. ________ were annoyed when their meal was late.
20. Adele said goodbye to her brother. She was sad to watch _____ go.
136
Exercise 5. Fill in the blank with the personal pronoun.
1. His father works hard. ______ is a doctor.
2. Because the woman seemed friendly, we asked ______ for directions.
3. The cupboards are so full, we cannot put anything else into _____.
4. You will be surprised if we beat ______ in the race.
5. Have you been looking for me? ______ had to run an errand.
6. My niece wants us to send the photographs to ______.
7. We have invited them to visit ______.
8. The store was open, but we did not have time to go into ______.
9. She will be angry if we make fun of ______.
10. You and I are good friends, ______ hardly ever argue.
11. Your son-in-law asked us to describe it to ______.
12. The windows are very stiff. We open _______ only in the summer.
13. The basket is heavy. ______ is full of oranges.
14. Your husband does not like anyone to contradict ______.
15. I hope you were not anxious about ______.
16. Would you like me to mail the information to ______
17. The leaves rustled in the breeze, ______ were already starting to change color.
18. The road was long, but we followed ______ to the end.
19. I asked him to tell ______ the time.
20. You will enjoy yourself if ______ come to the concert.
Exercise 6. Fill in each blank with the possessive adjective. For example:
I am looking for __ keys. - I am looking for my keys.
1. I opened _______ book.
2. Did the man finish _______ work?
3. The bear is licking _______ paws.
4. Please show us to _______ seats.
5. She has already purchased _______ ticket.
6. Have you heard from _______ friends recently?
7. The students live near _______ school.
8. The gentleman would like to have _______ watch repaired.
9. We eat _______ breakfast at the same time every morning.
10. That woman always walks _______ dog in the park.
11. I would like to renew _______ subscription.
12. The eagle was holding something in _______ claws.
13. Will you give me _______ address?
14. The gymnasts asked ________ coach for advice.
Exercise 7. Fill in each blank with the possessive pronoun which agrees with
the underlined antecedent. For example:
If you cannot find your pen, I will lend you ____. - If you cannot find your
pen, I will lend you mine.
1. Your coat may be warm, but I think _______ is more elegant.
137
2. Because I had no gloves, my niece offered me _______.
3. I forgot to bring my camera. Did you bring _______.
4. When I lost my map, your son lent me _______.
5. They discarded their old telephone directories, but we kept _______.
6. We have not planted our peas yet, but the farmers have planted ______ already.
7. I never cut my hair, but my sister cuts _______ once a month.
8. The neighbors' children are very independent, but we have to help _______.
9. We store our bicycles in the shed, but they leave ________ outside.
10. I water my plants every day, but you never water ________.
11. Although she likes her school, I prefer _______.
12. My niece studies for all her tests, but my nephew refuses to study for
________.
Exercise 8. Fill in each blank with either the possessive adjective or the
possessive pronoun. For example:
Last night I wrote to __ sister.
Last night I wrote to my sister.
1. I always enjoy _______ vacation.
2. I mailed my letter. Did you mail _______?
3. He is eager to try out _______ skis.
4. I am sure _______ handling of the situation was correct.
5. I rarely use a car, but they drive ________ everywhere.
6. My aunt visits _______ cousins once a year.
7. We are proud of _______ record.
8. I have never met your children. Have you met _______?
9. The gate swung noiselessly on _______ hinges.
10. I have received my diploma, but she has not yet received _______.
11. Have you filled out _______ application?
12. The bird continued _______ twittering long after dusk.
13. They are going to sublet _______ apartment.
14. I got my driver's license last month, but he got _______ a year ago.
15. Most businesses try to expand, but we have kept ______ small.
16. They saw _______ friend on television.
17. I finished my assignment yesterday. Have you finished _______?
Exercise 9. For each of the following sentences, fill in the blank with the
reflexive pronoun which agrees with the underlined word. For example:
I found ______ in a difficult situation.
I found myself in a difficult situation.
1. He should take better care of __________.
2. You may help ________.
3. I saw it ________.
4. She likes to involve ____________ in community affairs.
5. We could see ______________ reflected in the mirror.
138
6. The bird perched _____________ on the window sill.
7. The students found the solution _________.
8. You _____________ must decide what to do.
9. The teenagers amused ______________ by telephoning their friends.
10. We ______________ were surprised at the news.
11. He likes to hear ____________ talk.
12. She prides _____________ on her ability to speak French.
13. I told ____________ not to lose hope.
14. The fox hid _____________ under a bush.
Exercise 10. Choose the correct reflexive pronouns from the dropdown menu.
myself - yourself - himself - herself - itself - ourselves - yourselves - themselves
1) Robert made this T-shirt ___.
2) Lisa did the homework ___.
3) We helped ___ to some cola at the party.
4) Emma, did you take the photo by ___?
5) I wrote this poem ___.
6) He cut ___ with the knife while he was doing the dishes.
7) The lion can defend ___.
8) My mother often talks to ___.
9) Tim and Gerry, if you want more milk, help ___.
10) Alice and Doris collected the stickers ___.
Exercise 11. Use the right personal (I, me, you, he, him, ...) or reflexive
(myself, yourself) pronoun.
A man is coming back home from his office. ___ sees that the house is 'in
disarray'.
-Hello, darling, did ___ have a good day?
-Stop laughing at ___ , will ___ . You can see very well that everything has gone
wrong.
-Really? But why? What happened?
-John Jr found a cat this morning and he brought ___ here. ___ started playing
together, and look at what ___ have done. The house is a real mess.
-Why didn't you ask ___ to play outside?
-I did, but it was too late. You see, I was working in the cellar when John brought
that beast inside.
-OK, OK, it's no use shouting. Let ___ see what ___ can do.
Exercise 12. Replace the bold word(s) with the correct pronoun (I, you, we,
they, it, she, or he):
1. My uncle lives in Mexico City. He lives in Mexico City.
2. My friends aren't coming. ___________aren't coming.
3. Mrs. Wong is studying English. ___________ is studying English.
4. You and I have to talk about the test. ______ have to talk about the test.
139
5. The tree is going to fall. ___________ is going to fall.
6. Jim and I are the same age. ________ are the same age.
7. My cousin and her friend were at the supemarket. _____ were at the
supermarket.
8. Peter is a little sick. ________ is a little sick.
9. The door is locked. ___________ is locked.
10. My friend Linda and I are going on a trip. ________ are going on a trip.
11. My cats are hungry. ___________ are hungry.
12. Mr. Jones is a good teacher. __________ is a good teacher.
13. My brother and I live together. ___________live together.
Exercise 13. Supply either Reflexive or Object pronouns.
1. I cut me / myself shaving this morning.
2. They put the book between them / themselves on the kitchen table.
3. We got out of the river and dried us /ourselves.
4. Mrs. Bixby went out, slamming the door behind her / herself.
5. I was thoroughly ashamed of me / myself.
6. I will take it home with myself / me.
7. Have you got money on you / yourself?
8. You only think of you / yourself.
9. There is a big truck in front of me / myself.
10. Come and sit beside me / myself.
Exercise 14. Circle the correct answer.
1. If she borrows your / yours coat, then you should be able to borrow her / hers.
2. Each pot and pan in her kitchen has it / its own place on the shelf.
3. Mary and Mike invited their / theirs parents to see their / theirs new apartment.
4. When my roommate paid her / hers half of the rent, I paid my / mine.
5. All students need to bring their / theirs own pencils and answer sheets to the
exam.
6. All of her / hers secretaries are working late tonight to finish her / hers report.
7. The horse trotting around the track won it's / its race a few minutes ago.
8. Before the report is finalized, the information in their / theirs notes and our /
ours must be proved.
9. She worked all day cooking food and making decorations for her / hers son's
birthday party.
Exercise 15. Circle the correct personal pronoun.
1. They saw Steve and me / I at the movies last night after class.
2. He is going to the party with you and me / I, if you don't mind.
3. You and her / she ought to return the books to the library because they are
already overdue.
4. Prof. Molina left a message for you and me / I. He needs to see us.
5. Ron invited Mary and me / I to have dinner with him.
140
6. Emily is a good basketball player. I watch Betsy and she / her carefully during
games.
7. Tom and me / I, both want to marry Ann. She has to choose between he and I /
him and me.
8. Nick ate dinner with the Robertsons and we / us.
9. The new student has been assigned to work on the group research project with
you and I / me.
10. He rang Mary and invited she / her to dinner.
Exercise 16. Supply the correct reflexive pronouns in the following.
1. This accident was my fault. I caused it. I was responsible. In other words I
blamed ___ for the accident.
2. Be careful with that sharp knife! You are going to cut ___ if you are not careful.
3. When I walked into the room, the only person I saw and heard was Joe. In other
words, Joe was talking to_____ when I walked into the room.
4. My wife and I have our own business. We don't have a boss. We work for ___.
5. No one taught Mr. and Mrs. Hall how to run a business. They taught ___
everything they needed to know about running a small business.
6. Mr Baker committed suicide. In other words he killed ___.
7. I climbed to the top of the diving tower and walked to the end of the diving
board. Before I dived into the pool, I wished ___ luck.
8. Rebecca has flu. She must rest at home and take care of ___.
9. When we have problems in our lives, we shouldn't get discouraged and sad. If
we believe in ___, we can accomplish our goals.
10. When I failed to get the job, I was sad and depressed. I felt sorry for ___.
Exercise 17. Fill in the blanks with the correct possessive pronoun like his,
her, my, yours, its.
1. That’s the boy’s name? _______ name is Ben Scott.
2. Debbie has got a dog. _____ dog is very lively.
3. The dog is very lively. _____ name is Ben.
4. I have got a new laptop. ________ laptop is white.
5. I'm from Chester. Most of ______ friends are from Chester, too.
6. The rabbit is white. _______ cage is in the garden.
7. You are not English. ______ name is not an English name.
8. Sandra is my friend. _______ school is in Chester.
9. Scotts has got a new car. _______ car is blue.
10. Emma Peel has got a brother. _________ name is Paul.
11. Nick Baker has got a sister. ________ name is Debbie.
12. Yes, we have got a dog. ________ dog is very old.
13. The Snows have got a tortoise. ________ name is Trundle.
14. Ann likes ____ teacher at school.
15. Is this Peter’s book? No, _____ book is in the schoolbag.
141
THE IMPERATIVE MOOD
The second person imperative
We can express commands in English by the imperative made with the infinitive
without to.
Be careful. Open your books. Come here.
For the negative commands we put do not or don't before the imperative.
Don't be late. Do not sit down. Don't have so many bags.
We can mention the person in the command, usually at the end of the sentence.
Have something to eat, Greg.
If we talk to more people, we use the pronoun you to make the distinction between
them.
You take these bags and you park the car. You wait here and I'll call the police.
Emphatic imperative
In writing it is not usual to use an exclamation mark in the imperative. If we put it
at the end of the command, it becomes more urgent.
Wait! Don't do that!
We can make an emphatic imperative with do and imperative. It is common in
polite requests.
Do sit down. Do be reasonable.
On the other hand, do before the imperative can express the irritation of the
speaker.
Do be quiet. Do come on time.
You before the imperative also shows the speaker's anger or even rudeness.
You get out of here. Don't you follow me.
In a different context, however, it can show your positive emotions.
Don't you be so sad.
The first person imperative
The English language makes the first person imperative with let + me or let + us.
Let me do it for you. Let me see.
Let us go. Let's take our car.
For the negative we put not before the imperative.
Let us not be worried.
In spoken English it is possible to use don't at the beginning of the sentence.
Don't let's be worried.
The third person imperative
We make it with let + him/her/it/them and the infinitive without to.
Let him go. Let her explain it. Let it be. Let them try it. Let the customers pay
immediately.
This form is not very common in modern English. It is more usual to say the same
in a different way.
He must go. She should explain it. Leave it alone. They can try it. The customers
142
must pay immediately.
The negative imperative in the third person is archaic. We use more common
forms instead.
They mustn't stay here. Mary is not to travel alone.
Polite requests
We can make a polite request in English if we put shall we or will you at the end of
the imperative. This is used in positive requests.
Let's get started, shall we? Be careful, will you?
If you want to be even more polite, you can use questions instead of commands.
Will you pass me the salt, please? Will you help me? Could you do it for me?
Would you mind opening the window?
Exercise 1. Supply the appropriate form for the following imperative
sentences.
1. ... the salt and pepper, please.
2. ... up! It's time to get up.
3. ... that pot! It's hot! You'll burn yourself.
4. ... pages 35 through 70 for tomorrow's class.
5; ... it easy! there's no need to be angry.
6. ... the window.
7. ... ! I can hear you. You don't have to yell.
8. ... this soup. It's delicious.
9. ... ! I am drowning!
10. ... the light on. It's getting dark here.
11. ... a newspaper on the way home.
12. ... anyone my secret. Do you promise?
13. ... for me, please. I'll be ready in just a few minutes.
14. ... out! A ear is coming!
15.... this passage aloud. It's so funny, I'd like everyone to listen to it.
16.... on your raincoat. It might be cool outside.
17. ... your words! Think first, do not be rude.
18. ... the steps. They are very steep.
Exercise 2. Translate into English.
1. He
!
2.
3.
,
4.
!
,
,
5.
,
,
.
6.
7.
.
8.
.
9.
.
.
—
.
.
!
.
.
.
143
10.
11.
12.
.
.
.
.
,
.
.
13.
.
14.
15.
16.
17.
,
.
5
.
.
,
.
.
Exercise 3. Put the words in brackets into the gaps. Mind the positive or the
negative forms.
Example: _____ your books. (to open)
Answer: Open your books.
1) ___ upstairs. (to go)
2) ___ in this lake. (not/to swim)
3) ___ your homework. (to do)
4) ___ football in the yard. (not/to play)
5) ___ your teeth. (to brush)
6) ___ during the lesson. (not/to talk)
7) ___ the animals in the zoo. (not/to feed)
8) ___ the instructions. (to read)
9) ___ late for school. (not/to be)
10) ___ your mobiles. (to switch off)
Exercise 4. Write down the commands.
1. Create it! (the file)
2. Open it! (the folder)
3. Print it! (the license)
4. Copy them! (the selections)
5. Paste them! (the clips)
6. Delete them! (the errors)
7. Clear them! (the cells)
8. Select them! (the rows)
9. Find them! (the words)
10. Replace them! (the symbols)
Exercise 5. Translate the following sentences into Ukrainian.
1. Let him maximize these dialog windows.
2. Let her restore these folder windows.
3. Let him count these symbols.
4. Don’t let him arrange those directories.
5. Don’t let him associate those file types and the programs.
144
6. Don’t let them invert those selections.
7. Don’t fit that image.
8. Clear the cells.
9. Don’t zoom this page.
10. Don’t modify this design.
Exercise 6. Translate the following sentences into English.
1.
.
2.
.
3.
.
4.
.
5.
.
6.
.
7.
.
8.
.
9.
.
10.
.
11.
.
12.
.
13.
.
14.
.
15.
.
PREPOSITIONS OF TIME - AT - ON - IN
AT
We use AT with specific times (hour / minutes):
I get up at 7 o'clock.
My English class starts at 10am.
She finishes work at 6.15
I left the party at midnight.
Midnight (and midday) is a specific hour which is why we use AT.
12am = midnight
12pm = midday / noon
We use AT for a holiday period of two or more days:
Do you normally get together with your relatives at Christmas?
Did you eat a lot of chocolate at Easter?
ON
We use ON for specific days and dates:
I will return it to you on Wednesday.
They got married on Friday the 13th.
145
We get paid on the 20th of every month.
I drank too much on New Year's eve.
Remember that for dates, we use ordinal numbers.
E.g. the First of September (not the one of September)
IN
We use IN for specific months, years, seasons, centuries and lengths of time.
My birthday is in January. (I don't mention the date, just the month)
My grandmother was born in 1927.
The river near my house is dry in Summer.
The company was founded in the 19th century.
We need to have this report ready in 15 minutes.
Compare:
The New Zealand National day is in February. (I don't mention the day - only the
month)
The New Zealand National day is on February 6th. (I mention the day - the order is
not important)
At, In and On (time)
At + exact time
In + part of day
On + particular day
At + weekend, public holiday
In + longer period
English
on
in
Usage
Example
days of the week
on Monday
months / seasons
in August / in winter
time of day
in the morning
year
in 2006
after a certain period of time (when?)
in an hour
at
for night
at night
for weekend
at the weekend
a certain point of time (when?)
at half past nine
since
from a certain point of time (past till now)
since 1980
for
over a certain period of time (past till now)
for 2 years
ago
a certain time in the past
2 years ago
before
earlier than a certain point of time
before 2004
to
telling the time
ten to six (5:50)
past
telling the time
ten past six (6:10)
to / till / until marking the beginning and end of a period of time
from Monday to/till Friday
till / until in the sense of how long something is going to last
He is on holiday until Friday
146
by
in the sense of at the latest
I will be back by 6 o’clock
up to a certain time
By 11 o'clock, I had read five pages
Exercise 1. Fill in the correct prepositions.
1. Peter is playing tennis ___ Sunday.
2. My brother's birthday is ___ the 5th of November.
3. My birthday is May.
4. We are going to see my parents ___ the weekend.
5. ___1666, a great fire broke out in London.
6. I don't like walking alone in the streets ___ night.
7. What are you doing ___ the afternoon?
8. My friend has been living in Canada ___ two years.
9. I have been waiting for you ___ seven o'clock.
10. I will have finished this essay ___ Friday.
Exercise 2. Fill in the correct time prepositions.
1. I like walking around the town ___ night.
2. Are you going to the cinema ___ Friday night?
3. I’ve been waiting ___ an hour.
4. Ann works hard ___ the week, so she likes to relax ___ week-ends.
5. I’ve been invited to a wedding ___ February 14th.
6. ___ the age of twelve he wrote his first play.
7. We have to leave ___ five minutes.
8. I’ve been waiting for her ___ an hour.
9. ___ spring they're always in Spain.
10. The price of coffee is going up ___ April.
11. They left the party ___ 11.
12. We had a lot of fun ___ our holidays.
13. He woke up ___ four in the night.
14. He is always sleepy ___ the morning.
15. I haven't seen him ___ hours.
Exercise 3. Put in the correct preposition (at, in, on, or no preposition).
1. There was a loud noise which woke us up ____ midnight.
2. Do you usually eat chocolate eggs ____ Easter?
3. What are you doing ____ the weekend?
4. ____ last week, I worked until 9pm ____ every night.
5. My father always reads the paper ____ breakfast time.
6. She plays tennis ____ Fridays.
7. The trees here are really beautiful ____ the spring.
8. I’ll see you ____ Tuesday afternoon, then.
9. Shakespeare died ____ 1616.
10. She studies ____ every day.
11. John is going to buy the presents ____ today.
147
12. In my hometown the shops open early ____ the morning.
13. She met her husband ____ 1998.
14. The party is ____ next Saturday.
15. We are meeting ____ Friday morning.
16. I often get sleepy ____ the afternoon.
17. His daughter was born ____ the 24th of August.
18. Mobile phones became popular ____ the nineties.
19. The meeting will take place ____ this afternoon.
20. Luckily the weather was perfect ____ her wedding day.
Exercise 4. Complete the sentences below by choosing the correct
prepositions.
1. Jane is arriving ___ January 26 ___ 2 o'clock ___ the afternoon.
2. It snows here every year ___ December. We always go outside and play in the
snow ___ Christmas day.
3. Michael is leaving ___ Friday ___ noon.
4. Frankie started working for her law firm ___ 1995.
5. Franklin began working on the project ___ yesterday.
6. Normally, ___ New Year's Eve, it's tradition to kiss the one you love ___
midnight.
7 Don't be ridiculous; there were no telephones ___ the seventeenth century! The
telephone was invented ___ the 1870s.
8. The plane leaves ___ tomorrow morning ___ 8:00 AM.
9. The hills here are covered with wildflowers ___ early spring.
10. We met at the restaurant ___ 6:30 and stayed ___ 10:30.
Exercise 5. Fill in the correct time prepositions.
1. I’ll be at the office ___ 7 o’ clock.
2. I’ll be back ___ half an hour.
3. I suddenly felt ill ___ the examination.
4. They were working in the garden ___ 3 o’clock seven o’clock.
5. Carol got married ___ 1994.
6. The book was easy to read. So I read it ___ a day.
7. They have lived there ___ 20 years.
8. We were at the party ___ midnight.
9. They were at school ___ 2 o’ clock.
10. I saw him ___ the morning.
11. I did my homework ___ the evening.
12. She started dancing ___ 6 and now she’s a great star.
13. He learned to drive a lorry ___ three weeks.
14. He waited ___ they were quiet.
15. In summer he always goes jogging ___ Sundays.
16. The course begins 7 January and ends 10 March.
17. I went to bed ___ midnight.
148
18. We arrived 5 o’ clock ___ the morning.
19. Mozart was born in Salzburg ___ 1756.
20. Are you doing anything special ___ the weekend?
Exercise 6. Choose the best answer.
1. I left work ______ ten o'clock last night.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
2. I saw Bob in the street ______ yesterday.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
3. I didn't get time to come and visit you ______ last Tuesday.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
4. He used to be a regular visitor ______ Tuesdays.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
5. I phoned her up and spoke to her ______ Wednesday morning.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
6. I last saw him ______ the beginning of September.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
7. I saw him sometime ______ June.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
8. Were you at the last meeting ______ July 13?
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
9. We bought the company ______ Thursday, 22 May.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
10. I spoke to her ______ three weeks ago.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
11. I bought this computer ______ the start of the summer.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
12. I bought this computer ______ the summer.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
13. I bought this computer ______ last summer.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
14. This style was very popular ______ the 1970's.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
15. They were very popular ______ the middle of the 19th Century.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
16. I was still at school ______ 1993.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
17. I met him ______ January of last year.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
18. I knew Chris Smith quite well ______ when I was at university.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
19. I took over this job ______ the middle of last year.
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
20. I was in a meeting ______ all day yesterday.
149
a. at
b. on
c. in
d. (no preposition)
Exercise 7. Exercise Fill in the correct preposition.
1. I can’t answer this question ___ the moment but if you wait I’ll do it ___ a few
minutes.
2. I met her ___ 2005.
3. The school year in our country begins ___ 1st of September.
4. I get up ___ 7 o’clock ___ the morning.
5. Can you meet me ___ Friday afternoon?
6. She got many nice presents ___ her birthday.
7. He will be here ___ a few minutes.
8. She always visits me ___ Sundays.
9. ___ two years’ time she will be 20.
10. It’s very cool here ___ the evening.
Exercise 8. Complete the sentences with prepositions of time.
1. He bought the car ___ August.
2. He never comes ___ class ___ time.
3. She arrived ___ 5 o’clock in a taxi.
4. Every morning I get on the bus ___ 8.30.
5. I won’t be back ___ several hours. You should eat without me.
6. Everyone finished dinner ___ seven o’clock.
7. Will you lend me your pen ___ a minute?
8. I have known Dan ___ many years.
9. I will wait for him ___ six o’clock.
10. The game lasted ___ hours.
11. I didn’t finish my work ___ time to show it to the teacher.
12. I have been working on this ___ two hours.
13. I told them I should be there ___ an hour.
14. She was usually quite tired ___ the end of day.
15. I see her ___time ___ time.
16. His office hours are ___ ten ___ six.
17. Did anyone call me ___ my absence?
18. Nick arrived ___ six o’clock sharp.
19. The train will leave ___ two minutes.
20. He didn’t arrive until late ___ the afternoon.
Exercise 9. Fill in the blanks with in and on.
1. Mary was born __________ January.
2. Mary was born __________ 2000.
3. Mary was born __________ January 1.
4. Mary was born __________ January 1, 2000.
5. The bank is not open __________ Sunday.
6. I have English Test __________ Friday.
150
7. The new year begins __________ the month of January.
8. It begins __________ 1st January.
8. To commemorate Indonesia Independence Day, we will have flag ceremony
______ Tuesday __________ the morning.
9. I study with Ms Diah __________ the afternoon today.
10. I go to school _______ the morning ______ Monday to Friday.
11. ______ breakfast I usually have a cup ____ coffee _____ a bun.
12. _____ this summer I am going to visit Egypt.
13.I am _____ home now. I do my English hometask.
14. It is late. You should _____ home.
15. We are opening a new subsidiary ______Germany.
16. My dream is to visit _______Italy.
17. John was born ______ 1980.
PRESENT SIMPLE TENSE
I/You work – He/She/It works.
Do you work? – Does he work? Yes, I do./No, he doesn’t.
I do not (don’t) work. – He does not (doesn’t) work.
Use
for permanent states, repeated actions and daily routines.
He works at a hotel. (permanent state) He lays the tables and serves dinner every
day. (daily routines/repeated actions)
for general truths and laws of nature.
It rarely rains in the desert.
for timetables (trains, planes, etc.) and programmes.
The plane to London takes off at 7 o’clock.
for sports commentaries, reviews and narration.
Hill kicks the ball and passes it to Dawson.
The Present Simple is used with the following time expressions: always, usually,
etc., every day/week/month/year, etc., on Monday/Tuesdays, in the
morning/afternoon/evening, at night/the weekend, etc. These are called adverbs of
frequency and normally go before the main verb.
I always watch TV after school. Sue usually has cereal for breakfast. They don’t
often forget their homework. They sometimes have a match on Friday.
The verb to be is an exception. Adverbs of frequency go after the verb to be.
I am always at school before 8.00.
100%
75%
50%
25%
10%
0%
Always usually
often
sometimes rarely/seldom
never
Exercise 1. Complete the sentence with the affirmative form of the verb in
brackets.
1. I (read) ___ the newspaper every day.
151
2. She (like) ___ computers and going to the cinema.
3. They (go) ___ to school by bus.
4. We (want) ___ ice cream now!
5. He (study) ___ French, German and English.
6. You (walk) ___ very fast.
7. I (play) ___ football and basketball.
8. She (finish) ___ her homework quickly!
9. It (work) ___ very slowly.
Exercise 2. Write the he/she/it form of the following verbs.
a. go goes
g. pull ___
m. read ___
s. dance ___
b. do ___
h. want ___
n. get ___
t. swim ___
c. study ___
i. have___
o. finish ___
u. cry ___
d. walk___
j. drink ___
p. pick ___
v. wash ___
e. eat ___
k. buy ___
q. wait ___
w. meet ___
f. push ___
l. play ___
r. need ___
x. open ___
Exercise 3. Complete the sentences with the negative form of the verbs in
brackets.
1. Mark ___ to university at the weekend. (go)
2. He ___ to university on Wednesday or Friday afternoon. (go)
3. On Wednesday the classes ___ at 9.00. (start)
4. On Fridays Mark ___school at 17.00. (finish)
5. Mark’s class ___ sport Monday, Wednesday, Tuesday or Friday. (do)
6. Mark ___ an English class on Thursday. (have)
7. Mark ___ English. (study)
8. At Mark’s university the students ___ Computer Sciences. (study)
Exercise 4. Complete the questions with Do or Does. Then write short
answers.
1. ___ Mark have an art lesson on Monday? ___.
2. ___ classes start at 08.00 on Tuesday? ___.
3. ___ the students study IT at Mark’s university? ___.
4. ___ Mark go to university on Friday afternoon? ___.
5. ___ they have any time for sport? ___.
6. ___ you study religion at your university? ___.
7. ___ your university have a similar timetable? ___.
8. ___ you study more subjects than Mark? ___.
Exercise 5. Put the words in order.
1. for children often a computer university work use. - Children ___
2. don’t chat rooms most 11 to 18 year-olds often visit. - Most 11 to 18 year-olds
___
3. computer at home school students have often a. - School students ___
152
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
play computer teenagers a sometimes CDs on. - Teenagers ___
are universities in UK there computers in usually the. - There ___
are to the Internet some connected computers always. - Some computers ___
prefer for games people often PlayStation playing. - People ___
Never these people send days most letters. - Most people ___
Exercise 6. Put the words in order to make a sentence.
1. go they early home always. – They always go home early.
2. never sweets eats she.
3. we cinema usually Saturdays go the to on.
4. sometimes warm winter in is it.
5. football often with friends his plays he.
6. always January it rains in.
7. dancing usually Fridays on go they.
8. often music listens to he evening the in.
Exercise 7. Use the prompts and a verb from the box in the correct form to
write full sentences.
get watch play do go rain
cook
wear
drink
1. We / for our friends (sometimes). We sometimes cook for our friends.
2. She / her homework (always).
3. They / tennis at the weekend (often).
4. I / on holiday in June (usually).
5. He / coffee for breakfast (always).
6. You / up early in the morning (never).
7. She / TV before dinner (sometimes).
8. We / jeans at the weekend (usually).
9. It / in the summer (sometimes).
Exercise 8. Complete the sentences by putting in the verbs. Use the Present
Simple. You have to decide if the verb is positive or negative.
Claire is very sociable. She knows (know) lots of people.
We’ve got plenty of chairs, thanks. We don’t want (want) any more.
1. My friend is finding life in Paris a bit difficult. He ___ (speak) French.
2. Most students live quite close to the college, so they ___ (walk) there.
3. My sports kit is really muddy. This shirt ___ (need) a good wash.
4. I’ve got four cats and two dogs. I ___ (love) animals.
5. No breakfast for Mark, thanks. He ___ (eat) breakfast.
6. What’s the matter? You ___ (look) very happy.
7. Don’t try to ring the bell. It ___ (work).
8. I hate telephone answering machines. I just ___ (like) talking to them.
9. Matthew is good at badminton. He __ (win) every game.
10. We always travel by bus. We ___ (own) a car.
153
Exercise 9. Write the verbs in the right form.
1. He always ………… (ask) a lot of questions.
2. They sometimes ……… (go) to a dentist.
3. We always ………… (discuss) such problems.
4. They usually ……… (visit) their friends at the weekend.
5. The students always …… (do) such exercises at home.
6. The first-year students often ……… (translate) texts with a dictionary.
7. You often ………… (speak) too much.
8. Ann ………… (like) reading books about animals.
9. Sam and Kate usually ………… (visit) their parents in summer.
10. The teacher ………… (know) these students well.
Exercise 10. Write the verbs in the negative form.
1. The first-year students ………………… ………. (study) this subject.
2. They ………………………………………….. (discuss) such questions.
3. She ……………………………………………. (want) to work there.
4. We ………………………………………….. (play) computer games.
5. You ………often………………………………. (go) to the theatre.
6. I ………………………………………. (see) patients on Wednesday.
7. Ann …………………………….. (visit) her parents every weekend.
8. Sam ……………………………………… (like) to speak about it.
9. My friend …………………………….. (call) me in the morning as a rule.
10. Kate and Jane ………………………………….. (know) these students.
11. The doctors ……………………………… (know) the cause of my pain.
12. He …………….. always ………………………. (tell) the truth.
Exercise 11. Complete the questions. Choose the correct words and put them
in order. One word in each set is not used.
A. ___ you use a computer at home? (you do does use)
B. No, I don't.
A. ______ a computer at home? (your son does use uses)
B. Yes, he does.
A. What things ___ on the computer? (does doing he do)
B. He plays a lot of computer games.
A. ___ the computer now? (are he using is)
B. Yes, he is.
A . What ______ ? (do is doing he)
B. He's ___ writing an email.
A. ___ a lot of emails? (he send sends does)
B. Yes, he ___ does.
154
PAST SIMPLE TENSE
I/You/We/They
opened/lived/tried.
He/She/It
opened/lived/tried.
To form negative, questions in the Past Simple, we use the auxiliary did + bare
infinitive.
I/You/He/She/It/We/They
did not work yesterday.
Did I/you/he/she/it/we/they
work? Yes, we did. / No, they didn’t.
Spelling rules
Most verbs: add –ed.
wish-wished
fill-filled
Verbs ending in –e: add –d. date-dated
close-closed
Verbs ending in a consonant followed by –y: change the –y to –ied. carry-carried
study-studied
Verbs ending in a single vowel followed by a single consonant: double the
consonant and add –ed. fit-fitted
tap-tapped
Irregular verbs
Many common verbs have irregular Past forms.
go-went have-had
take-took
I/You/We/They
went to the cinema.
He/She/It
went to the cinema.
The verbs to be has two Past Simple forms.
I/He/She/It
was at school yesterday.
You/We/They
were at school yesterday.
Use
1. For an action which happened at a definite time in the past. The time is started,
already known or implied.
They spent their holidays in Switzerland last winter.
2. For actions which happened immediately one after the other in the past.
First, he read the message. Then, he called his boss.
3. For past habits or states which are now finished. In such cases we can also use
the expression used to.
People travelled / used to travel by carriage in those days.
4. To talk about the lives of people who are no longer alive.
Marlin Monroe started in a number of successful films.
Exercise 1. Read the sentences and underline all the examples of the Past
Simple.
1. I usually go to school by bus but today I walked.
2. I liked the film, it was so exciting!
3. He went shopping yesterday.
4. They stayed at home at the weekend because they were ill.
5. I don’t like the theatre but I saw the play anyway.
6. He studied hard and passed the exam.
7. I did the washing up today and yesterday. You never do it.
8. I thought the lesson was fun and our teacher is very nice.
155
9. He had a bike accident at the weekend.
10. He bought two bars of chocolate and gave one to his friend.
Exercise 2. Write the Past Simple of these regular verbs.
a. talk ____
e. open ___
i. pick ___
m. use ___
b. wait ___
f. close ___
j. like ___
n. rest ___
c. stop ___
d. want ___
g. walk ___
h. drop ___
k. shop ___
l. chat ___
o. print ___
p. play ___
Exercise 3. Write the Past Simple of these irregular verbs.
a. make ____
e. is ___
i. buy ___
m. leave ___
b. take___
f. eat ___
j. go ___
n. feel ___
c. come ___
g. see ___
k. think ___
o. give ___
d. have___
h. put ___
l. bring___
p. do ___
Exercise 4. Use the prompts to write sentences.
1. 1. He / go / swimming yesterday. He went swimming yesterday.
2. They / see/ a film last night.
3. I / do / my homework.
4. You / wait / for an hour.
5. Michael / have / a cold.
6. The teacher / be / late.
7. Sue and Mike / walk / to school today.
8. I / take / my dog for a walk.
9. She / talk / to her friends.
10. We / give / him the answers.
11. Marcella / come / to the party.
12. The dog / eat / my breakfast.
Exercise 5. Use the prompts and a verb from the box to write Past Simple
questions.
read walk pay give eat buy win go study play
1. You/swimming yesterday? Did you swim yesterday?
2. They/tennis?
3. Your teacher/you a test?
4. You/for the exam?
5. We/the bill?
6. Your sister/you a present?
7. You/that book?
8. They/the game?
9. He/to the library?
Exercise 6. Complete the text with the Past Simple form of the verbs in the
156
box.
get
spend
play
conclude
stimulate compare look find
Video Games
Ten years ago, studies ___ that players of video games were very intelligent and
motivated people. They ___ good results at school and at work. In those days, video
games were quite simple, so what about the more complex games of today?
Many children start to play video games at seven. For most of them this is not a
problem, but some of them become addicts. A recent study of children aged 13 and
14 ___ that almost a third played video games daily. Seven per cent ___ at least 30
hours playing every week. Addiction to games can lead to other problems such as
stealing money to buy new games, failing to do homework or not going to school.
In another study, scientists at Japan’s Tohoku University ___ at the brain activity
of hundreds of students as they ___ a Nintendo game. They ___ this with the brain
activity of other students doing Maths. The results were surprising. The computer
game only ___ those parts of the brain related to vision and movement, but not parts
of the brain which are important for behavior, memory, and learning.
Exercise 7. Complete the dialogue using the affirmative, negative and question
Past Simple forms of the verbs in the box.
buy
download
pass have (not) play
spend
have
finish
get
fail do
A: I’m doing a survey about video games. Do you play them? Can I ask some
questions?
B: Yeah, I play them. Go on then.
A: ___ you ___ any time playing video games last week?
B: Yeah, I did. I ___ a new game last Saturday. It’s called Need for Speed
Underground.
A: Oh yes, I know it. Is it good?
B: Yes, it’s great.
A: ___ you ___ it?
B: No, I ___ it from the Internet.
A: ___ you ___ with it yesterday?
B: No, not yesterday. I had football training.
A: Okay, so ___ you ___ time for your homework?
B: Yeah, we ___ much. I ___ it on the bus on the way home.
A: do you think playing games affects your school work?
B: No, I don’t think so.
A: How i) ___ you ___ in the last exams?
B: Okay.
A: So you j) ___ all of them.
B: No, not all of them. I k) ___ Math.
Exercise 8. Change the verb into the Past Simple.
1) She ___ (bring) some chocolates to the party.
157
2) I ___ (hear) a new song on the radio.
3) I ___ (read) three books last week.
4) They ___ (speak) French to the waitress.
5) He ___ (understand) during the class, but now he doesn't understand.
6) I ___ (forget) to buy some milk.
7) She ___ (have) a baby in June.
8) You ___ (lose) your keys last week.
9) They ___ (swim) 500m.
10) I (give) my mother a CD for Christmas.
11) At the age of 23, she ___ (become) a doctor.
12) I ___ (know) the answer yesterday.
13) He ___ (tell) me that he lived in Toronto.
14) We ___ (lend) John £200.
15) She ___ (drink) too much coffee yesterday.
16) The children ___ (sleep) in the car.
17) He ___ (keep) his promise.
18) I ___ (choose) steak for dinner.
19) The film ___ (begin) late.
20) He ___ (teach) English at the University.
Exercise 9. Put the verb in brackets into the right form.
1. Jacob _________ (bet) a lot of money on that horse that came in last.
2. My grandfather _____________ (fight) in World War II.
3. A bird____________ (fly) in through the window.
4. The teacher _____________ (forbid) the pupils to leave the classroom.
5. Nick ______ (have) a lot of money years ago, but now he is very poor.
6. The old man ______ (hit) the thief on the head with his walking stick.
7. It was very warm so I _______ (leave) the windows open.
8. We__________ (read) about the accident in yesterday’s newspaper.
9. I _______ (ring) the doorbell but there was nobody in the house.
10. This novel has _____ (sell) so well that it has been reprinted many times.
11. Amanda _____ (shed) tears when she heard that her cat had died.
12. The old lady was feeling lonely so she ___________ (buy) a dog.
13. The doctors ______ (do) everything they could to save the patient.
14. I ___ (drive) to the supermarket but couldn’t find a parking space there.
15. Liza _______ (forget) her umbrella in the park.
16. I _____ (get) very angry when I saw what they had done.
Exercise10. Complete the sentences with the Past Simple of the verbs in
brackets.
1. My sister and her husband _________ (come) from Greece.
2. I ________ (not like) the U2 concert.
3. My cousin __________ (phone) from France yesterday evening.
4. On Monday Johann ___________ (go) to school on foot.
158
5. (they / leave) ___________ the country last Saturday?
6. (you / like) _____________ the film?
7. They _________ (not finish) the homework yesterday.
8. (she / go) ______ to the cinema with her parents last night? No, she didn’t. She
______ (stay) at home. She _____ (get) a cold.
9. We _______ (go) to Spain y car.
10. I _______ (have) a wonderful holiday with my family last July.
11. (you / travel) _________ to Madrid by car or by plane?
12. Many years ago it _______ (be) very difficult to live without electricity.
Exercise 11. Choose the best option for each of the following sentences.
1. Mrs. Harris __________ the last train.
a) take
b) took
c) did take
2. There ________ many people here last night.
a) was
b) were
c) wasn’t
3. He _________ at home with me yesterday evening.
a) were
b) was
c) be
4. She ___________with her family on holidays.
a) go
b) did go
c) went
5. He ___________ some books and CDs.
a) brought
b) bought
c) did buy
6. They __________ their passports at home.
a) leave
b) did leave
c) left
7. She ________some interesting photos.
a) take
b) taken
c) took
8. It __________ a good present.
a) were
b) was
c) is
9. ___________ (she /arrive) home at 5:30?
a) did she arrived b) did she arrive c) arrived
Exercise 12. Complete the newspaper story about a fire. Put in the Past
Simple forms of the verbs.
Two people died (die) in a fire in Ellis street, Oldport yesterday morning. They
(1) ___ (be) Herbert and Molly Paynter, a couple in their seventies. The fire (2) ___
(start) at 3.20 a.m. A neighbour, Mr Aziz, (3) ___ (see) the flames and (4) ___ (call)
the fire brigade. He also (5) ___ (try) to get into the house and rescue his neighbours,
but the heat (6) ___ (arrive) in five minutes. Twenty fire-fighters (8) ___ (flight) the
fire and finally (9) ___ (bring) it under control. Two fire-fighters (10) ___ (enter) the
burning building but (11) ___ (find) the couple dead.
Exercise 13. Read the sentences below and put the verbs in brackets into the
correct form (Past Simple).
Example: While we were having dinner, the phone rang (ring).
1. Last night we went to a concert. The singer ____ (sing) beautifully.
159
2. Many ships _____ (sink) because of the tornado last week.
3. My grandfather never ____ (drink) coffee, he always preferred tea.
4. Last summer we _____ (swim) a lot in the sea in Antalya.
5. The lesson _____ (begin) 15 minutes ago.
6. Jenny ______ (run) home when she saw a stray dog.
7. My parents _____ (feed) birds last winter to help them survive the cold.
8. My best friend _____ (tell) me her secret and I promised to keep it.
9. The shop ______ (sell) clothes at very low prices during the sale.
10. Last year we ____ (read) the book called 'Great Expectations' with the 8th graders.
11. I was sorry because I _______ (upset) my parents.
12. Lucy ____ (think) her exam grade was very low but she did very well in the
exam.
13. In the past schools _______ (teach) only English grammar to students.
14. He was so angry that he ______ (shut) the door when he left.
15. My brother ________ (bring) a stray cat home and my parents let it stay.
16. In the past there was a forest here but people ____ (cut) all the trees down.
17. On holiday may father and I _____ (catch) a big fish. It was fun!
18. I couldn't believe my eyes. Bread _______ (cost) 5 dollars!
19. My kindergarten teacher ________ (teach) me to read and write.
20. My arm ________ (hurt) very much because it was broken.
FUTURE SIMPLE TENSE
Positive statement: I will study (I'll study), He will work (He'll work)
Negative statement: I will not study (I won't study), He will not study (He won't
study)
Question form: Will you study?
Negative question: Will you not study? (Won't you study?)
Use
1. The Future Simple tense is used to express a general intention.
He will change his job. We'll travel abroad. I will not need it.
They won't change the telephone number. Will you take the exam?
2. We use it for predictions or opinions.
It will snow in winter. The horse will not win.
In the Future Simple tense we can use following verbs or adverbs to say that we
assume something, but we are not sure: think, be sure, hope, believe, suppose,
perhaps, possibly, probably, surely.
They'll probably study at university. I don't think she'll accept it.
3. The Future Simple is used for a decision or offer made at the moment of
speaking.
Can I walk you home? - No, thank you. I'll take a taxi. Please, tell Peter about it. O.K. I'll call him.
But: I am going to call Peter. Do you want me to say hello to him? (Going to
160
shows our decision made before the moment of speaking.)
Exercise 1. Write positive sentences in Future Simple Tense.
1. We (help) ___ you.
2. I (get) ___ you a drink.
3. I think our team (win) ___ the match.
4. Maybe she (do) ___ a language course in Malta.
5. I (buy) ___ the tickets.
6. Perhaps she (do) ___ this for you.
7. Maybe we (stay) ___ at home.
8. She hopes that he (cook) ___ dinner tonight.
9. I’m sure they (understand) ___ your problem.
10. They (go / probably) ___ to the party.
Exercise 2. Write negative sentences in Future Simple.
1. (I / answer / the question)
2. (she / read / the book)
3. (when / I / be / famous)
4. (we / send / the postcard)
5. (Vanessa / catch / the ball)
6. (James / open / the door)
7. (we / listen / to the radio)
8. (the / teacher / test / our English)
9. (she / give / him / the apple)
10. (the computer / crash)
Exercise 3. Make the Future Simple.
1) (they/come) tomorrow?
2) When ___ (you/back)?
3) If you lose your job, what ___ (you/do)?
4) In your opinion ___ (she/be) a good teacher?
5) What time ___ (the sun/set) today?
6) (she/get) the job, do you think?
7) (David/be) at home this evening?
8) What ___ (the weather/be) like tomorrow?
9) There's someone at the door ___ (you/get) it?
10) How ___ (he/get) here?
Exercise 4. Put the verbs into the correct form (Future Simple).
1. Jim asked a fortune teller about his future. Here is what she told him:
2. You (earn) ___ a lot of money.
3. You (travel) ___ around the world.
4. You (meet) ___ lots of interesting people.
5. Everybody (adore) ___ you.
161
6. You (not / have) ___ any problems.
7. Many people (serve) ___ you.
8. They (anticipate) ___ your wishes.
9. There (not / be) ___ anything left to wish for.
10. Everything (be) ___ perfect.
11. But all these things (happen / only) ___ if you marry me.
Exercise 5. Change the verb into the correct form.
1. I ___ (help) you with your homework.
2. She ___ (be) here very soon.
3. They ___ (come) at 8 o'clock.
4. You ___ (call) me next week.
5. I ___ (use) the money wisely.
6. We ___ (return) as soon as possible.
7. It ___ (rain) tomorrow.
9. Ralf ___ (pay) for it.
10. Amanda ___ (win) this game.
11. Maybe we ___ (stay) at home.
12. They ___ (bake) some cakes.
13. I ___ (take) you with me next month.
14. Ashley ___ (stay) at home tonight.
15. It ___ (be) very hot this summer.
Exercise 6. Change the verb into the correct form.
1. We ___ (do) this together.
2. Next year ___ (be) very exciting.
3. People ___ (invent) new things.
4. I ___ (be) in Rome next week.
5. John ___ (be) very pleased.
6. Wait, I ___ (do) this.
7. We ___ (catch) him.
8. They ___ (probably finish) tomorrow.
9. You ___ (find) your bag.
10. Bonnie ___ (like) you.
11. It ___ (be) sunny tomorrow.
12. The winter ___ (be) especially cold.
13. The next game ___ (be) hard to win.
14. I ___ (speak) with him about you.
15. You ___ (send) Kate the pictures.
Exercise 7. Put in the verbs in brackets into the gaps and form sentences.
Example: The weather ______ nice at the weekend. (to be)
Answer: The weather will be nice at the weekend.
1) Tomorrow it __________________ in Minas Gerais. (to rain)
162
2) My friend ____________________ 12 years old next Monday. (to be)
3) Hey John! Wait a minute. I ____________ to study with you. (to go)
4) She __________________ her boss next week. (to contact)
5) I think you ____________________ this job. (to get)
6) They ____________________________ at about 6 pm. (to arrive)
7) The teacher ______________________ this exercise. (to explain)
8) He _____________________________ the report tomorrow. (to read)
9) Lots of accidents ___________________ in that weather. (to happen)
10) She ______________________ if you show her the spider. (to scream)
Exercise 8. Write the correct form of the irregular verb in Past Simple.
Example: He drank (to drink) the coffee.
1) The moon __________ (to come) out late last night.
2) Jessica __________ (to lose) her first tooth this morning.
3) My entire family __________ (to catch) the flu last winter.
4) The employees __________ (to do) a lot of work today.
5) The swimmers _____ (to hold) their breath and jumped in the water.
6) The baker __________ (to make) a cake for my birthday.
7) They __________ (to take) a picture of the mountain.
8) The teacher __________ (to teach) the students chemistry last year.
9) I __________ (to wear) my jacket to work yesterday.
10) We __________ (to go) to the zoo last weekend.
11) Tom __________ (to write) his family a letter.
12) I __________ (to see) a movie last night.
FUTURE – WILL VERSUS GOING TO
A very confusing concept is when to use will and when to use be going to when
we refer the future.
The structure be going to is normally used to indicate the future but with some
type of connection to the present. We use it in the following situations:
1. When we have already decided or we intend to do something in the future:
They're going to retire to the beach - in fact they have already bought a little beach
house.
2. When there are definite signs that something is going to happen:
I think it is going to rain - I just felt a drop.
3. When something is about to happen:
Get back! The bomb is going to explode.
In other cases, where there is no implicit or explicit connection to the present, use
will:
1. For things that we decide to do now.
I'll buy one for you too.
I think I'll try one of those. (I just decided this right now)
163
2. When we think or believe something about the future.
My team will not win the league this season.
I think it will rain later so take an umbrella with you.
3. To make an offer, a promise or a threat.
I'll give you a discount if you buy it right now.
I promise I will behave next time.
Exercise 1. Fill in the blanks with the words into brackets using will or be
going to.
1. My brother ____ (be) 45 in October.
2. - The phone is ringing and I’m in the shower! - Don’t worry Mark, I ___
(answer) for you.
3. James Jones ____ (probably / become) the next President.
4. Mum is unemployed but she ____ (not / apply) for that job because it isn’t
well-paid.
5. I’m so excited! We _____ (move) to a bigger house next month.
6. My parents _____ (be) very proud, I have passed all the exams.
7. I think my sister ___ (pass) the exam, she has studied very hard so far.
8. I ____ (take) the kids to the mountains this winter.
9. There isn’t any milk left in the fridge. - I know, I ___ (do) the shopping this
afternoon.
10. There isn’t any milk left in the fridge. - Oh sorry! I ___ (give) you some juice
instead.
11. Look at the clouds, it ____ (rain); you should take an umbrella!
12. There’s a knock at the door; that _____ (be) the postman.
13. Boys _____ (be) boys!
14. When the cat is away, the mice _____________ (play)
15. I’m not feeling well, I _____________ (faint).
16. It’s 11:00pm; I think I _______________ (go) to bed now.
17. She ___________________ (meet) them at 6:00pm.
18. That ______ (be) the book you are looking for.
19. There __________ (be) a gale.
20. Sally is a big girl now, we ______ (buy) her a scooter.
Exercise 2. Complete the sentences. Write the correct words from the
brackets.
1. A. Mr Harris is going to phone you at three o'clock. (will/is going to)
B. Oh, well, I'm going out, so I 'll phone him now. ('ll/'m going to)
2. A. ___ play tennis on Saturday? (Will you/ Are you going to)
B. No, I can't. We ___ look at a new flat. ('ll/'re going to)
3. A. In the future we ____ have any oil. (won't/aren't going to)
B. Maybe, but we find new kinds of energy. ('ll/'re going to)
4. A. I've decided to change my lifestyle. From now on I eat a healthy diet. ('ll/'m
going to)
164
B. Good idea. I join you. ('ll/'m going to)
5. - I've checked on the Internet. The flight be three hours late. (will/is going to) OK. We go to the airport at three o'clock, then. ('ll/’re going to)
Exercise 3. Put in be going or will.
1. Look out - we ... crush! 2. "There's the doorbell." "I ... go". 3. We promise that if
you vote for us we ... double your income in twelve months. 4. Would you excuse us?
I ... have a bath. 5. If you say that again I ... hit you. 6. The next train to arrive at
platform six ... be the delayed since thirty-two service for Bristol. 7. I wonder what
she ... do with that hammer.
Exercise 4. Add necessary words. Complete the short answers.
A.: ____ - (We, have a great picnic tomorrow afternoon)
L: Yes _____ (What, we, do, tomorrow night?)
S.: Oh, I don't know ____. (I, not make plans in advance.)
.: You always do things at the last minute! Don't you ever plan your life?
S.: Of course I do. For instance, ___ (I, come back to campus, next Monday
morning.)
.: Of course ___. But what about next semester? ___ (you, continue to study
psychology?)
S.: I have no idea ____ (you change your courses, in February?)
.: No___ (I take biology and math until June.) (Next year, I graduate.) (I apply to
grad school, next autumn.) (my girlfriend and I, get married in two years.) Then...___
(we, have our first child, in 1999.)
S.: Okay, okay!
PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE
I am/You are/He is working.
Are you/Is he working? Yes, I am./No, he isn’t.
I am not/You are not/She is not working.
Use
for actions taking place now, at the moment of speaking, or for temporary
actions; that is actions that are going on around now, but not at the actual moment of
speaking.
Helen is working hard these days. Right now she is reading a newspaper. (She is
not working at the moment of speaking).
with always when we want to express our irritation at actions which happen too
often.
You are always forgetting to pay the bill.
for actions that we have already arranged to do in the near future, especially
when the time and place have been decided.
Melanie is getting married at 3 this afternoon. (The time and place for the
165
wedding ceremony have been decided).
for changing or developing situations.
More and more forests are disappearing because of fires.
The Present Continuous is used with the following time expressions: now, at the
moment, these days, at present, tonight, nowadays, still, etc.
We do not usually use these verbs in the Present Continuous:
hear —
smell —
,
adore —
appreciate —
dislike —
enjoy —
,
agree —
believe —
expect —
taste —
see —
see —
(
suppose —
understand —
belong —
concern —
contain —
depend —
fit —
have —
know —
mean —
owe —
own —
,
possess —
need —
prefer —
require —
want —
weigh —
wish —
seem —
forgive —
hate —
like —
,
Exercise 1. Write the –ing form of the verb.
a. enjoy enjoying
e. play ____
b. hit ____
f. heat ____
c. shoot ____
g. organize ____
d. smoke ____
h. use ____
)
i. stop ____
j. shut ____
k. buy ____
l. tidy ____
Exercise 2. Use the prompts to write full sentences.
1. I/eat dinner. ____
2. You/do your homework. ___
3. She/go to the park. ___
4. John and Sven/buy new trainers. ___
5. My parents/talk to my teacher. ___
6. We/listen to CDs. ___
7. He/write a book. ___
8. It/rain today. ___
166
9. I/work hard. ___
10. He/speak with a friend. ___
Exercise 3. Underline the correct form.
1. I’m happy today. Everything goes/is going well.
2. Just a minute, I can’t hear you. I’m listening/I listen to the radio. Let me turn it
off.
3. A lot of people speak/are speaking Spanish in the USA.
4. On this space shuttle mission they study/are studying the effects of gravity in
space.
5. He is doing/does his homework now.
6. I’m liking/like the new sports hall. Do you?
7. Wake up! The teacher is asking/asks you a question.
8. You know/are knowing my friend Cindy.
9. That’s the book I’m reading/read at the moment.
Exercise 4. Use the prompts and a verb form the box to write either Present
Simple or Present Continuous.
stay
do
look
watch
listen
know understand
1. I / this question. ______
2. She / to music now. _____
3. They / Maths homework now. _____
4. You / a lot about computers._____
5. Maria and Sam / TV at the moment. _____
6. We / in a hotel near the beach. _____
Exercise 5. Put the verbs in brackets into the Present Simple or Present
Continuous.
1. Debbie ___(work) as an administrator at the university. She ___ (organize) all
the timetables and teaching schedules. She ___ (work) very long hours at the moment
because it’s the start of the academic year but she ___ (go) on a short holiday at the
end of the month.
2. Simon and Sylvia ___ (stay) in a cottage in the Yorkshire Dales this month.
The cottage ___ (belong) to a cousin of Sylvia’s but the cousin is away: she ___
(cycle) around Norfolk for a few weeks. Simon and Sylvia often ___ (use) the cottage
when Sylvia’s cousin is away. They really ___ (enjoy) being in the middle of the
countryside.
3. The International School for Languages ___ (do) very well at the moment.
About two hundred of students ___ (take) evening classes this term. Many of them
___ (need) to lean a new language to improve their job prospects but some of them
___ (learn) a new language purely for pleasure. The European languages ___ (be)
very popular but Japanese and Russian ___ (get) more popular too. The school ___
(provide) good learning facilities and ___ (organize) a range of study tours.
167
4. The world population ___ (still increase) rapidly. Many people in the world
___ (already starve) and many more ___ (suffer) from malnutrition. The population
___ (grow) fastest in the poorest countries where people ___ (need) to have children
to look after them in their old age and where many of their children ___ (die) at a
very young age.
Exercise 6. Make the Present Continuous.
1) (what time / you / go to the cinema)?
2) (why / you / study)?
3) (when / you / leave)?
4) (you / smoke)?
5) (he / play / tennis later)?
6) (you / go / shopping at the weekend)?
7) (you / drink / wine)?
8) (what / you / drink now)?
9) (what / you / think)?
10) (she / work / in an office at the moment?)?
11) (they / study / Portuguese)?
12) (what time / she/ come)?
13) (where / you / play tennis tonight)?
14) (you / meet / your friends on Friday)?
15) (you / read / now)?
16) (where / you / go now)?
17) what / you / do)?
18) (she / live / in London)?
19) (they / study now)?
20) (you / eat / cake)?
Exercise 7. Rachel is in the computer room at college. Complete her
conversation with Andrew. Put in Present Continuous form of the verb.
Andrew: What are you doing? (you/do)
Rachel: I’m writing (I/write) a letter to a friend. He’s a disc jockey. Vicky and I (1)
___ (try) to organize a disco.
Andrew: That sounds a lot of work. How (2) ___ (you/find) time for your studies?
Rachel: Well, as I said, Vicky (3) ___ (help) me. (4) ___ (we/get) on all right. (5)
___ (we/not/spend) too much time on it. (6) ___ (it/not/take) me away from my
studies, don’t worry about that. Oh, sorry, (7) ___ (you/wait) for this computer?
Andrew: Yes, but there’s no hurry.
Rachel: (8) ___ (I/correct) the last bit of the letter. I’ve nearly finished.
Exercise 8. Present Continuous or Present Simple? Put in the Present
Continuous or Present Simple of the verbs.
Mark: Are you looking (you/look) for someone?
Alan: Yes, I need (I/need) to speak to Neil. He isn’t in his office.
168
Mark: (1) ___ (he/talk) to the boss at the moment. (2) ___ (I/think) (3) ___
(they/discuss) money.
Alan: Oh, right. And what about you (4) ___ (you/look) for someone too?
Mark: Yes, Linda. (5) ___ (you/know) where she is?
Alan: Oh, she isn’t here today. She only (6) ___ (work) four days a week. (7) ___
(she/not/work) on Fridays. She’s be here on Monday.
Mark: Thank you. (8) ___ (you/know) a lot about Linda.
Alan: Well, most days (9) ___ (I/give) her a lift, or (10) ___ (she/give) me one.
(11) ___ (she/live) quite close to me. (12) ___ (it/save) petrol. Mark: Yes, of course.
Good idea. Yes, (13) ___ (I/agree). Well, (14) ___ (I/waste) my time here then. I’ll
get back to my computer.
Exercise 9. Complete the sentences. Put in the Present Continuous or Present
Simple of the verbs.
I’m writing (I/write) to my parents. I write (I/write) to the them every weekend.
1. ___ (it/snow) outside. ___ (it/come) down quite hard, look.
2. Normally ___ (I/start) work at eight o’clock, but ____ (I/start) at seven this
week. We’re very busy at the moment.
3. I haven’t got a car at the moment, so ___ (I/go) to work on the bus this week.
Usually __ (I/drive) to work.
4. The sun ___ (rise) in the east, remember. It’s behind us so ___ (we/travel) west.
5. I’m afraid I have no time to help just now. ___ (I/write) a report. But ___
(I/promise) I’ll give you some help later.
6. ___ (I/want) a new car. ___ (I/save) up to buy one.
Exercise 10. Put the verbs in brackets into the Simple Present or the Present
Continuous tense.
1. You can't see Tom now: he (have) a bath.
2. He usually (drink) coffee but today he (drink) tea.
3. What she (do) in the evenings? - She usually (play) cards or (watch) TV.
4. I won't go out now as it (rain) and I (not have) an umbrella.
5. The last train (leave) the station at 11.30.
6. He usually (speak) so quickly that I (not understand) him.
7. Ann (make) a dress for herself at the moment. She (make) all her own clothes.
8. I'm afraid I've broken one of your coffee cups. - Don't worry. I (not like) that set
anyway.
9. I (wear) my sunglasses today because the sun is very strong.
10. Tom can't have the newspaper now because his aunt (read) it.
11. I'm busy at the moment. I (redecorate) the sitting room.
12. The kettle (boil) now. Shall I make some tea?
13. You (belong) to your local library? -Yes, I do. - You (read) a lot? - Yes, quite a
lot. - How often you (change) your books? - I (change) one every day.
14. Mary usually (learn) languages very quickly but she (not seem) able to learn
modern Greek.
169
15. I always (buy) lottery tickets but I never (win) anything.
16. You always (write) with your left hand?
17. You (love) him? - No, I (like) him very much but I (not love) him.
18. You (dream) at night? - Yes, I always (dream) and if I (eat) too much supper I
(have) nightmares.
19. We (use) this room today because the window in the other room is broken.
20. He always (say) that he will mend the window but he never (do) it.
Exercise 11. Put the verbs in brackets into the Simple Present or Present
Continuous tense.
1. What Tom (think) of the Budget? - He (think) it most unfair. - I (agree) with
him.
2. What this one (cost)? - It (cost) forty pence.
3. You (hear) the wind? It (blow) very strongly tonight.
4. You (see) my car keys anywhere? - No, I (look) for them but I (not see) them.
5. He never (listen) to what you say. He always (think) about something else.
6. This book is about a man who (desert) his family and (go) to live on a Pacific
island.
7. You (understand) what the lecturer is saying? - No, I (not understand) him at all.
8. What you (have) for breakfast usually? - I usually (eat) a carrot and (drink) a
glass of cold water.
9. When the curtain (rise) we (see) a group of workers. They (picket) a factory
gate.
10. Why you (walk) so fast today? You usually (walk) quite slowly. - I (hurry)
because I (meet) my mother at 4 o'clock and she (not like) to be kept waiting.
11. I (wish) that dog would lie down. He (keep) jumping up on my lap. - I (think)
he (want) to go for a walk.
12. You (recognize) that man? - I (think) that I have seen him before but I (not
remember) his name.
13. Look at that crowd. I (wonder) what they (wait) for.
14. This message has just arrived and the man (wait) in case you (want) to send a
reply.
15. I (save) up because I (go) abroad in July.
PAST CONTINUOUS TENSE
I/He/She/It
was
working.
You/We/They
were working.
I/He/She/It wasn’t working.
You/We/They were not working.
Was he/she/it working?
Were you/we/they working?
Use
170
to talk about an activity in progress at a particular time in the past.
It was raining on Monday so we didn’t play football.
Don’t turn the radio off I was listening to it!
to talk about an activity that is interrupted by an event.
My mobile rang while I was doing my homework.
He was driving to work when the accident happened.
to describe the background scene or situation for events in the past.
Was it raining when you left university?
We often use the Present Continuous and Past Simple together when one
(shorter) action comes in the middle of another (longer) one.
As we were driving down the hill, a strange object appeared in the sky.
While Laura was sitting in the garden, it suddenly began to rain.
You drove right past me when I was waiting for the bus.
The appearance of the strange object comes in the middle of the longer action, the
drive down the hill.
Longer action:
We were driving down the hill.
Shorter action:
An object appeared.
In the three sentences above, the Past Continuous comes after as, while or when
(As we were driving…). We can also use when before the Past Simple.
We were driving down the hill when a strange object appeared in the sky.
David was making lunch when the phone rang.
But we use two Past Simple verbs for one action after another.
When we saw the spaceship, we stopped the car. (We saw it and then we stopped).
Exercise 1. Use the prompts to write a full sentence.
1. She/eat/pizza. – She was eating pizza.
2. They/go/to the cinema. –
3. We/walk/ the dog. –
4. I/shop. –
5. You/do/your homework. –
6. Steven and Amanda/drink/tea. –
7. The teachers/talk/in the staffroom. –
8. My sister/clean/the kitchen. –
9. We/listen/to music. –
10. I/play/a computer game. –
Exercise 2. Correct these sentences.
1. I was understanding the question.
2. She were cooking dinner for family.
3. He was remembering his homework yesterday.
4. They was listened to the radio.
5. I did my homework when the radio rang.
6. You were speak too loudly.
7. We did watching TV last night.
171
Exercise 3. Underline the correct form.
1. Dave arrived/was arriving at Sue’s house at 19.30, but she wasn’t there. She
did/was doing some shopping at the supermarket.
2. At this time last week, we lay/were lying on a beach in the sun.
3. –I phoned/was phoning you yesterday after school. Where were you? – Oh. My
mobile phone was off because I rehearsed/ was rehearsing for the concert on
Sunday.
4. When I walked/was walking into the class, the teacher talk/was talking about
new course.
5. –What did you do/were you doing when the alarm went off? – I did/was doing
an experiment in the science laboratory.
6. I watched/was watching the episode on TV when the electricity went off. Can
you tell me what happened/was happening?
7. Derec told me/was telling me about the match, but I did/was doing something on
the computer at the time so I can’t tell you what he said/was saying.
8. What a coincidence! When you called/were calling I thought/was thinking about
you.
9. The Titanic crossed/was crossing the Atlantic when it hit/was hitting an iceberg.
10. My uncle lived/was living in Berlin for ten years. In fact he lived/was living there
in 1999 when the Berlin wall came down.
Exercise 4. Open the brackets. Use Past Simple or Past Continuous.
1. I (to play) computer games yesterday. I (to play) computer games yesterday at 7
o’clock.
2. What Nick (to do) when you came into his room? What Nick (to do) last
Sunday.
3. We (to wash) the floor in our flat yesterday. We (to wash) the floor from 3 till 4
yesterday.
4. When I (to come) home yesterday, my little sister (to sleep).
5. When I (to go) to school, I (to meet) my friend.
6. While my sister (to read) a book, I (to watch) TV.
7. We (to meet) at the station two hours ago. Nick (to wait) for his fried when I
saw him.
8. When I (to open) the door, my friends (to sit) at the table.
9. While I (to do) my homework, my sister (to help) mother about the house.
10. What… you (to read) yesterday? … you (to read) at 6 o’clock?
11. Lena (to sweep) the floor from11 till 12 yesterday.
12. I (to go) to the theatre yesterday. At this time yesterday I (to sit) at the theatre.
13. He (to write) a letter when I came in. He (not to write) letters two days ago.
14. He (to read) a book when I (to come) in. He (to buy) that book last week.
15. While mother (to cook) dinner, I (to help) father in the garden.
Exercise 5. Use the prompts and a verb from the box to write negative sentences.
172
rain clean buy
drive study
work
1. They / for the test –
2. She / home for the weekend –
3. I / tea. It was coffee. –
4. It / yesterday. It was sunny. –
5. You / to me! –
6. Michael / more shoes –
7. We / computer games –
8. His brother / their bedroom –
9. Pierre / the car –
10. The computer / because it was broken –
play
drink
go
listen
Exercise 6. Complete the dialogue with the Present Simple, Past Simple or
Past Continuous of the verbs in the brackets.
A: Excuse me, we’re doing a survey about time use. Have you got time to answer
some questions?
B: Yes, but not too long.
A: No, don’t worry, just a couple of minutes. I want to ask you about your
activities yesterday. For example, at eight in the morning were you (sleep) ___ or
were you awake?
B: I was up. At eight o’clock I (have ___ my breakfast.
A; Do you (have) ___ breakfast at the same time every day?
B: Yes, I usually get up at half past seven.
A: Okay, mid morning, at eleven, (work) ___?
B: No, I (study) ___. I’m still at school. I (do) ___ an experiment in the science
lab.
A: At one o’clock, (have) ___ lunch?
B: Yes. We have an hour and a half for lunch and then classes again in the
afternoon.
A: Were you at school at five o’clock?
B: No, I (walk) ___ home.
A; And at eight o’clock?
B: I (do) ___ my homework. After that I watched TV for a bit and then I (go) ___
to bed.
A: So at midnight…
B: … I was asleep.
A: Thanks very much.
Exercise 7. Fill in the gaps with the Past Continuous of the verbs in brackets.
a) The teacher __________ (not talk) when Mary arrived.
b) The pupils __________(play) when the bell rang.
c) Lucy __________ (do) her homework when someone knocked the door.
d) Mark´s parents __________(write) him a letter when they heard a crash.
e) Ann __________ (not sleep) when the alarm clock rang.
173
f) They __________(not watch) TV when their parents arrived.
Exercise 8. Put the following sentences into the correct tense, Simple Past or
Past Continuous.
a) We ____ (go) down the road at 100 Km/h when the wheel ____ (fall) off.
b) She nearly ______ (have) a heart attack when she _____ (see) the lion.
c) My mother ___ (get) dressed when she _____ (feel) a pain in her chest.
d) She _____ (fill) in a questionnaire when the pen ____ (run) out of wink.
e) Susan ____ (not/see) her friend because she ____(face) the other way.
f) Mike ______(fall) off the ladder while he _______ (paint) the ceiling.
g) While Ann _______ (cook) dinner, the phone ______ (ring)
h) Susan ______ (wait) for me at home when I ______ (arrive) yesterday.
i) What ______ (you /do) at this time yesterday?
j) I _______ (see) carol at the party. She ______ (wear) a beautiful dress.
k) I _______ (break) a plate last night. I ______ (do) the washing up
l) (you/watch) TV when I _________ (arrive)?
Exercise 9. Complete the sentences below with the correct form of the tense in
brackets.
1) When her husband ____ (arrive) home, Anne ____ (watch) television.
2) I ________ (prepare) dinner when the telephone _______ (ring).
3) What __________ (you do) when the postman ________(arrive)?
4) Julie _______ (learn) to drive when she _______ (work) in London.
5) Where ________ (you sit) when the show _____ (begin)?
6) I ________ (visit) Athens while I __________ (tour) Greece.
7) It was when he _______ (cross) the street that John________ (fall).
8) What ______ (you see) while you _________ (wait) for the bus?
9) Where _______ (you go) when your car _______ (break) down?
10) Julie _______ (meet) Peter when she _______ (walk) in the park.
Exercise 10. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tense: Simple Past or
Past Continuous.
1. Peter and Ann (decide) to redecorate their sitting-room themselves.
2. They (choose) cream paint for the woodwork and apricot for the walls.
3. When John (look) in to see how they (get) on, Ann (mix) the paint, and Peter
(wash) down the walls.
4. They (be) glad to see John and (ask) if he (do) anything special that day.
5. He hastily (reply) he (go) to the theatre and (go) away at once, because he
(know) they (look) for someone to help them.
6. They (begin) painting, but (find) the walls (be) too wet.
7. While they (wait) for the walls to dry, Ann (remember) she (have) a phone call
to make.
8. Peter (start) painting while she (telephone), and (do) a whole wall before Ann
(come) back.
174
9. He (grumble) that she always (telephone).
10. Ann (retort) that Peter always (complain).
11. They (work) in silence for some time.
12. Just as they (start) the third wall, the doorbell (ring).
13. It (be) a friend of Peter's who (want) to know if Peter (play) golf the following
weekend.
14. He (stay) talking to Peter in the hall while Ann (go) on painting.
15. At last he (leave).
16. Peter (return), expecting Ann to say something about friends who (come) and
(waste) valuable time talking about golf.
17. But Ann nobly (say) nothing.
18. Then Peter (think) he would do the ceiling.
19. He just (climb) the step ladder when the doorbell (ring) again.
20. Ann (say) she (get) tired of interruptions but (go) and (open) the door.
Exercise 11. Put the verbs in brackets into the Simple Past or Past
Continuous.
1. I (walk) along Piccadilly when I (realize) that a man with a ginger beard, whom
I had seen three times already that afternoon, (follow) me.
2. To make quite sure, I (walk) on quickly, (turn) right, then left and (stop)
suddenly at a shop window.
3. In a few minutes the man with the beard (appear) and (stop) at another shop
window.
4. I (go) on.
5. Whenever I (stop) he (stop), and whenever I (look) round he (be) still there.
6. He (look) a very respectable type and (wear) very conventional clothes and I
(wonder) if he was a policeman or a private detective.
7. I (decide) to try and shake him off.
8. A 74 bus (stand) at the bus stop just beside me.
9. Then the conductor (come) downstairs and (ring) the bell; just as the bus (move)
off, I (jump) on it.
10. The man with the beard (miss) the bus but (get) into another 74, which (follow)
the first.
11. Both buses (crawl) very slowly along Knightsbridge.
12. Every time the buses (pull) up at a stop, the man (look) out anxiously to see if I
(get) off.
13. Finally, at some traffic lights, he (change) buses and (get) into mine.
14. At Gloucester Road Underground, I (leave) the bus and (buy) a ticket at a ticket
machine.
15. As I (stand) on the platform waiting for a Circle Line train, my pursuer (come)
down the stairs.
16. He (carry) a newspaper and when we (get) into the same compartment, he (sit)
in one corner reading it, and I (read) the advertisements.
17. He (look) over the top of the newspaper at every station to see if I (get) out.
175
18. I (become) rather tired of being shadowed like this, so finally I (go) and (sit)
beside the man and (ask) him why he (follow) me.
19. At first he (say) he (not follow) me at all but when I (threaten) to knock him
down, he (admit) that he was.
20. Then he (tell) me he (be) a writer of detective stories and (try) to see if it was
difficult to follow someone unseen.
Exercise 12. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tense: Simple Past and
the Past Continuous.
1. He (sit) on the bank fishing when he (see) a man's hat floating down the river. It
(seem) strangely familiar.
2. It (snow) heavily when he (wake) up. He (remember) that Jack (come) for lunch
and (decide) to go down to the station to meet him in case he (lose) his way in the
snowy lanes.
3. When I (reach) the street I (realize) that I (not know) the number of Tom's
house. I (wonder) what to do about it when Tom himself (tap) me on the shoulder.
4. As the goalkeeper (run) forward to seize the ball a bottle (strike) him on the
shoulder.
5. I (look) through the classroom window. A geometry lesson (go) on. The teacher
(draw) diagrams on the blackboard.
6. Most of the boys (listen) to the teacher but a few (whisper) to each other, and
Tom (read) a history book. Tom (hate) mathematics; he always (read) history during
his mathematics lesson.
7. Everyone (read) quietly when suddenly the door (burst) open and a complete
stranger (rush) in.
8. I (go) to Jack's house but (not find) him in. His mother (say) that she (not know)
what he (do) but (think) he probably (play) football.
9. This used to be a station and all the London trains (stop) here. But two years ago
they (close) the station and (give) us a bus service instead.
FUTURE CONTINUOUS TENSE
Positive statement: I will be speaking (I'll be speaking)
Negative statement: I will not be speaking (I won't be speaking)
Question form: Will you be speaking?
Negative question: Will you not be speaking? (Won't you be speaking?)
Use
1. The Future Continuous tense is used for activities that will be in progress at a
point of time. The action will start before that point of time and will continue after it.
The point in time can be given by time expressions or by other activities.
At 8 o'clock I will be travelling to Dorset. This time tomorrow we'll be lying on the
beach. (In these two sentences the point of time that we refer to is given by a time
expression.)
176
The shop will be closed. Will you be working? I'll be sleeping when you come
back. (In these two sentences the point of time that we refer to is given by another
action.)
2. It describes the idea that an action will happen in the normal course of events. It
refers to routine activities, not intentions, decisions or plans.
I'll be writing to you again. (I always write to you, so I'll do it again, as usual.)
They'll be leaving on Friday. You can join them. (They normally leave on Fridays.)
Everybody will be working on a computer sooner or later. (If nothing special
happens.)
Exercise 1. Make the Future Continuous negative.
1) When she arrives, I ___ (not/read).
2) When she arrives, you ___ (not/sleep) will you.
3) When she arrives, we ___ (not/work).
4) When she arrives, Julie ___ (not/watch) a film.
5) When she arrives, it ___ (not/snow).
6) When she arrives, Ann and Tom ___ (not/cook).
7) When she arrives, he ___ (not/play) computer games.
8) When she arrives, I ___ (not/study).
9) When she arrives, you ___ (not/cry). .
10) When she arrives, David ___ (not/use) the internet.
Exercise 2. Make Future Continuous questions.
1) When the boss comes, ___ (I/sit) here?
2) When the boss comes, ___ (John/use) the computer?
3) When the boss comes, ___ (Jane and Luke/discuss) the new project?
4) When the boss comes, ___ (we/work) hard?
5) When the boss comes, __ (you/talk) on the telephone?
6) When the boss comes, ___ (she/send) an email?
7) When the boss comes, ___ (they/have) a meeting?
8) When the boss comes, ___ (he/eat) lunch?
9) When the boss comes, ___ (you/type)?
10) When the boss comes, ___ (he/make) coffee?
Exercise 3. Change the verb into the correct form.
1. He ___ (wait) for quite some time.
2. Tomorrow at this time I ___ (dance) at a party.
3. Next week at this time I ___ (sunbathe) at the beach.
4. At 5 o'clock you ___ (help) you brother.
5. This evening at 8 o'clock, she ___ (watch) a movie with her friends.
6. Nicole ___ (have) a hard time.
7. We ___ (smile), and they ___ (cry).
8. Rebecca ___ (clean) the house, and John ___ (wash) the dishes.
9. Tonight they ___ (talk), ___ (dance) and ___ (have) a good time.
177
10. It ___ (rain) tonight.
11. Tomorrow we ___ (rest) and ___ (have) fun.
12. Tonight at 10 o'clock she ___ (come) home.
13. They day after tomorrow he ___ (move) his apartment.
14. At this time tomorrow, I ___ (sleep) deeply.
15. You ___ (work) very hard to get that deal.
Exercise 4. Change the verb into the correct form.
1. I ___ (wait) when she ___ (come).
2. They ___ (work) when he ___ (call).
3. He ___ (read) when I ___ (call) him.
4. When the bus ___ (arrive) we ___ (stand).
5. When the party ___ (start), we ___ (talk) outside.
6. When the police ___ (arrive), we ___ (go) north.
7. You ___ (watch) the movie when we ___ (come).
8. It ___ (rain) when she ___ (return).
9. Tiffany ___ (jog) when you ___ (meet) her.
10. The water ___ (boil) when we ___ (come) back.
11. The waiter ___ (serve) when the manager ___ (arrive).
12. When we ___ (call) him, he ___ (rest).
13. Steven ___ (fly) to Italy when his mail ___ (arrive).
14. The kids ___ (play) with the ball when I ___ (call) them.
15. You ___ (sleep) when she ___ (return).
Exercise 5. Write the verbs as Future Continuous or Future Simple.
1. I’ll be seeing (see) them tomorrow. – I’ll tell (tell) them what you said.
2. Will you be working (you work) all tomorrow evening?
3. She ___ (stay) in Leeds all weekend.
4. She ___ (visit) our office next week. – I ___ (ask) her then.
5. I ___ (see) the sales manager at the marketing meeting on Monday and I’m sure
she ___ (give) me the figures then.
6. I ___ (not be able) to lend you the car – I ___ (use) it all night.
7. Next year they ___ (live) in Spain.
8. This time next week we ___ (sit) on the beach.
9. The children ___ (stay) with their grandparents for the summer holidays.
10. At four o’clock on Tuesday afternoon we ___ (fly) over Paris.
11. What ___ (you do) early on Monday night?
12. They ___ (come) round for dinner tomorrow evening – I ___ (show) them the
photographs then.
13. Don’t phone them now: they ___ (have) dinner.
Exercise 6. Using the words in parentheses, complete the text below with the
appropriate tenses. Simple Future / Future Continuous.
1. Sandra: Where is Tim going to meet us?
178
Marcus: He (wait) ___ for us when our train arrives. I am sure he (stand) ___ on
the platform when we pull into the station.
Sandra: And then what?
Marcus: We (pick) ___ Michele up at work and go out to dinner.
2. Ted: When we get to the party, Jerry (watch) ___ TV, Sam (make) ___ drinks,
Beth (dance) ___ by herself, and Thad (complain) ___ about his day at work.
Robin: Maybe, this time they won't be doing the same things.
Ted: I am absolutely positive they (do) ___ the same things; they always do the
same things.
3. Florence: Oh, look at that mountain of dirty dishes! Who (wash) ___ all of those?
Jack: I promise I (do) ___ them when I get home from work.
Florence: Thanks.
Jack: When you get home this evening, that mountain will be gone and nice stacks
of sparkling clean dishes (sit) ___ in the cabinets.
4. Doug: If you need to contact me next week, I (stay) ___ at the Hoffman Hotel.
Nancy: I (call) ___ you if there are any problems.
Doug: This is the first time I have ever been away from the kids.
Nancy: Don't worry, they (be) ___ be fine.
5. Samantha: Just think, next week at this time, I (lie) ___ on a tropical beach in Maui
drinking Mai Tais and eating pineapple.
Darren: While you are luxuriating on the beach, I (stress) ___ out over this
marketing project. How are you going to enjoy yourself knowing that I am working
so hard?
Samantha: I'll manage somehow.
Darren: You're terrible. Can't you take me with you?
Samantha: No. But I (send) ___ you a postcard of a beautiful, white sand beach.
Darren: Great, that (make) ___ me feel much better.
Exercise 7. Using the words in parentheses, complete the text below with the
appropriate tenses.
Simple Present / Simple Future / Present Continuous / Future Continuous
1. Right now, I am watching TV. Tomorrow at this time, I (watch) ___ TV as well.
2. Tomorrow after school, I (go) ___ to the beach.
3. I am going on a dream vacation to Tahiti. While you (do) ___ paperwork and
(talk) ___ to annoying customers on the phone, I (lie) ___ on a sunny, tropical beach.
Are you jealous?
4. We (hide) ___ when Tony (arrive) ___ at his surprise party. As soon as he opens
the door, we (jump) ___ out and (scream) ___, "Surprise!"
5. We work out at the fitness center every day after work. If you (come) ___ over
while we (work) ___ out, we will not be able to let you into the house. Just to be safe,
we (leave) ___ a key under the welcome mat so you will not have to wait outside.
6. While you (study) ___ at home, Magda (be) ___ in class.
7. When I (get) ___ to the party, Sally and Doug (dance) ___, John (make) ___
drinks, Sue and Frank (discuss) ___ something controversial, and Mary (complain)
179
___ about something unimportant. They are always doing the same things. They are
so predictable.
8. When you (get) ___ off the plane, I (wait) ___ for you.
9. I am sick of rain and bad weather! Hopefully, when we (wake) ___ up tomorrow
morning, the sun (shine) ___.
10. If you (need) ___ to contact me sometime next week, I (stay) ___ at the
Sheraton in San Francisco.
Exercise 8. Put the verbs in brackets into the Future Continuous tense.
1. This time next month I (sit) on a beach.
2. When you arrive I probably (pick) fruit.
3. When we reach England it very likely (rain).
4. In a few days time we (fly) over the Pyrenees.
5. I'll call for her at eight. - No, don't; she still (have) breakfast then.
6. I (wait) for you when you come out.
7. When you next see me I (wear) my new dress.
8. My son will be in the sixth form next year. - That means that old Dr Adder
(teach) him mathematics.
9. I'll give Jack your message. I can do it easily because I (see) him tomorrow. We
go to work on the same train.
10. You (do) geometry next term.
ARTICLES
The Indefinite Article ‘A’ / ‘An’
A + consonant sound (/b/, /d/, /g/, /f/, /l/, /p/, etc.)
An + vowel sound (/a/, /e/, /i/, /o/, /u/)
with singular countable nouns after the verb to be to say what
someone/something is.
e.g. He’s a pilot. It’s a torch.
with the verb have (got).
e.g. Mary has (got) a car.
in certain expressions when we want to show how often we do something.
e.g. She goes shopping twice a month.
a/an is not used:
with uncountable nouns or plural countable nouns. We use some instead of
a/an. e.g. We need some flour and some sugar. They bought some stamps.
before an adjective if it is not followed by a noun. However, if the adjective is
followed by a noun, we use a if the adjective begins with a consonant sounds and an
if the adjective begins with a vowel sound.
e.g. It’s a house. It’s big. It’s a big
house. This is John’s car. It’s new. It’s also an expensive car.
180
The Definite Article THE
The definite article the is used with countable and uncountable nouns.
e.g. the music, the woman, the trees
The is used:
with nouns when we are talking about something specific, that is, when the
noun is mentioned for a second time or is already known. In other words, when we can
answer the question ‘Who?’ or ‘Which?’ e.g. I received a letter and a postcard on
my birthday. The letter was from my parents and the postcard was from my friend.
with nouns which are unique (the Sun, the Moon, the Earth, etc.).
with the names of rivers (the Nile), seas (the Black Sea), oceans (the Indian
Ocean), mountain ranges (the Pyrenees), deserts (the Gobi), groups of islands (the
Canary Islands) and countries when they include words such as state, kingdom,
republic, etc. (the United States).
with the names of musical instruments (the piano, the saxophone) and dances
(the tango).
with the names of hotels (the Sheraton Hotel), theatres/cinemas (the Odeon
Theatre), ships (the Queen Mary), organizations (the UN), newspapers (The Times)
and museums (the Louvre).
with nationality words (the Belgians) and names of families (the Johnsons).
with titles when the name of the person is not mentioned (the Duchess of Kent,
the Queen) but: Queen Mary.
with the words morning, afternoon and evening. e.g. He goes home in the
evening.
with the words station, shop, cinema, pub, library, city, village, etc.
e.g. She went to the station to meet Jim.
with historical periods/events (the Stone Age, the Middle Ages, the First World
War) but: World War I.
with the words only, last, first (used as adjectives).
e.g. He was the least
person to arrive.
with adjectives/adverbs in the superlative form.
e.g. She is the most intelligent woman I’ve ever met. Bob drives the most carefully
of all.
The is not used:
with uncountable and plural countable nouns when talking about something in
general, that is, when we cannot answer the question ‘Who?’ or ‘Which?’.
e.g. Trees produce oxygen. (Which trees? Trees in general.)
with proper nouns.
e.g. This is Tom.
with the names of countries (Egypt), cities (Rome), streets (Oxford Street),
parks (Hyde Park), mountains (Mont Blanc), railway stations (Victoria Station),
bridges (Tower Bridge), individual islands (Rhodes), lakes (Lake Ontario) and
continents (Asia).
181
with the names of sports, games, activities, days, months, celebrations,
colours, drinks, meals and languages (when they are not followed by the word
‘language’). e.g. I speak French. but: The French language is spoken in some parts
of Canada.
with the words this/that/these/those (this bag, those cars) NOT: the this bag
with possessive adjectives or the possessive case. E.g. That isn’t my car – it’s
Keith’s.
with titles when the person’s name is mentioned (Prince Charles, President
Reagan).
with two words names when the first word is the name of a person or place
(Luton Airport) but: the White House.
with names of pubs, shops, banks and hotels named after the people who
started them and end in –s or –‘s. Harrods, Lloyds Bank, Emma’s pub but: the Black
Bull (pub) (because ‘Black’ is not a name of a person or place).
with the words school, church, bed, hospital, college, university, court, prison
or home when we refer to the purpose for which they exist. E.g. Jack was in prison.
(He was a prisoner.) Jack’s mother went to the prison to see him. (She went to the
prison as a visitor.)
with the words home, father/mother when we talk about our own home/parents.
e.g. Father is at home.
with means of transport: by bus/car/train/plane, etc. e.g. She travelled by
plane.
with the names of illnesses. e.g. He’s got malaria. But: flu/the flu, measles/the
measles, mumps/the mumps.
Exercise 1. Fill in the gaps with a or an.
1. An open door
2. ___ apple
3. ___ large box
4. ___ building
5. ___ old man
6. ___ computer
7. ___ unusual picture
8. ___ cat
9. ___ elephant
10. ___ tall woman
Exercise 2. Choose the correct definite or indefinite article: "the", "a", "an"
or "x" (zero article).
1. I bought ___ pair of shoes.
2. I saw ___ movie last night.
3. They are staying at ___ hotel.
4. I think ___ man over there is very unfriendly.
5. I do not like ___ basketball.
6. That is ___ problem I told you about.
7. ___ night is quiet. Let's take a walk!
8. ___ price of gas keeps rising.
9. John traveled to ___ Mexico.
10. Juan is ___ Spanish.
182
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
I read ___ amazing story yesterday.
My brother doesn't eat ___ chicken.
___ love is such beautiful thing.
I live in ___ apartment. ___ apartment is new.
I would like ___ piece of cake.
I was in ___ Japanese restaurant. ___ restaurant served good food.
Sara can play ___ guitar.
Exercise 3. Decide whether to use the definite article “the” or not. If you do
not need the article “the”, use x.
1) Last year we visited ___ St. Paul's Cathedral and ___ Tower.
2) Mount Everest is ___ highest mountain on earth.
3) Loch Ness is ___ most famous lake in Scotland.
4) ___ most children like ___ sweets.
5) ___ summer of 1996 was hot and dry.
6) Plaza Hotel is on the corner of ___ 59th Street and ___ 5th Avenue.
7) My sister often stays at ___ Uncle Tim's in Detroit.
8) Our friends ___ Millers moved to Florida last August.
9) ___ smog is a problem in ___ big cities.
10) Our children go to ___ school by ___ bus.
Exercise 4. Decided whether to use the definite article “the” or not. If you do
not need the article ”the”, type an x.
Hi John,
I arrived in ___ USA last Monday. We left ___ Rome, flew over ___ Alps and
made a quick stop in ___ London. There we went shopping in ___ Harrods, visited
___ Tower and enjoyed a sunny afternoon in ___ Hyde Park. On the following day
we left for ___ New York. ___ time on board wasn't boring as there were two films to
watch on ___ monitor. ___ people on plane were all Italian. Before we landed at ___
JFK airport, we saw ___ Statue of Liberty, ___ Ellis Island and ___ Empire State
Building. ___ hotel I stayed in was on corner of 42nd Street and 5th Avenue. I don't
like ___ hotels very much, but I didn't have ___ time to rent an apartment.
Please say hello to Peter and Mandy.
Yours,
Peter
Exercise 5. Decide whether to use the definite article “the” or not. If you do
not need the article “the”, use x.
1) My grandmother likes ___ flowers very much.
2) I love ___ flowers in your garden.
3) See you on ___ Wednesday.
4) I always listen to ___ radio in the morning.
5) Alex goes to work by ___ bus.
6) Don't be late for ___ school.
183
7) Listen! Dennis is playing ___ trumpet.
8) We often see our cousins over ___ Easter.
9) She has never been to ___ Alps before.
10) What about going to Australia in ___ February?
Exercise 6. Insert the correct article (a – an – the - zero article)
1) She's got two children: _____ girl and _____ boy. ____ girl's eight and ____
boy's fourteen.
2) My brother plays _______ football.
3) There is ________ book on the table.
4) Could you give me ________ glass of water?
5) I prefer hot and strong coffee to _______ tea.
6) Our library is on _____ second floor. You can find many interesting books
there.
7) __________ Elbrus is the highest mountain in the Caucasus.
8) Usually students have no classes in __________ summer.
9) Could you give me ________ sheet of paper, please?
10) It is important sometimes to stop and look around you at all the wonderful
things in ______ nature.
11) What ________ fine weather we are having today!
12) Where are you from? I am from ______ USA, _______ Wisconsin.
13) What street do you live in? I live in _______ Green Street.
14) -What's your mom? -My mom is ___ housewife. -And what's your dad? - My
dad is ___ driver.
15) - What nationalities are your parents? - My mother is ___ English. My father is
___ Swiss.
16) _______ Pacific Ocean is _______ largest ocean in _______world.
Exercise 7. Fill in the correct article ( a/an).
1. My sister is ______ nurse.
2. He is ___ policeman and his wife is ___ engineer.
3. She is ___ good musician.
4. What _______ expensive car!
5. ___ travel agent would give you ___ information about ___ reservation.
6. It is ____ pleasure to do it.
7. He drinks wine three times ___ day.
8. He broke ___ arm in ____ skiing accident.
9. ___ hour.
10. Tom is _________ History teacher.
Exercise 8. Insert “the” if necessary.
1. ___ youngest boy has just started going to ___ school; ___ eldest boy is at ___
college.
2. She lives on ___ top floor of an old house. When ___ wind blows, all ___
184
windows rattle.
3. ___ darkness doesn't worry ___ cats; ___ cats can see in ___ dark.
4. My little boys say that they want to be ___ spacemen, but most of them will
probably end up in ___ less dramatic jobs.
5. Do you know ___ time? - Yes, ___ clock in ___ hall has just struck nine. - Then
it isn't ___ time to go yet.
6. He was sent to ___ prison for ___ six months for ___ shop-lifting. When ___ six
months are over he'll be released; ___ difficulty then will be to find ___ work. - Do
you go to ___ prison to visit him?
7. I went to ___ school to talk to ___ headmistress. I persuaded her to let Ann give
up ___ gymnastics and take ___ ballet lessons instead.
8. ___ ballet isn't much use for ___ girls; it is much better to be able to play ___
piano.
9. I am on ___ night duty. When you go to ___ bed, I go to ___ work.
10. Peter's at ___ office but you could get him on ___ phone. There's a telephone
box just round ___ corner
11. He got ___ bronchitis and was taken to ___ hospital. I expect they'll send him
home at ___ end of ___ week. - Have you rung ___ hospital to ask how he is?
12. Ann's habit of riding a motorcycle up and down ___ road early in ___ morning
annoyed ___ neighbours and in ___ end they took her to ___ court.
13. He first went to ___ sea in a Swedish ship, so as well as learning ___
navigation he had to learn ___ Swedish.
14. ___ family hotels are ___ hotels which welcome ___ parents and ___ children.
15. On ___ Sundays my father stays in ___ bed till ten o'clock, reading ___ Sunday
papers.
16. Then he gets up, puts on ___ old clothes, has ___ breakfast and starts ___ work
in ___ garden.
17. My mother goes to ___ church in ___ morning, and in ___ afternoon goes to
visit ___ friends.
18. Like many women, she loves ___ tea parties and ___ gossip.
19. My parents have ___ cold meat and ___ salad for ___ supper, ___ winter and
___ summer.
20. During ___ meal he talks about ___ garden and she tells him ___ village
gossip.
Exercise 9. Articles and possessive adjectives.
Insert a, an, the, or my, his, her, our, your, their if necessary.
1. He took off ___ coat and set to work.
2. Why are you standing there with ___ hands in ___ pockets?
3. At most meetings ___ people vote by raising ___ right hands.
4. The bullet struck him in ___ foot.
5. They tied ___ hands behind ___ back and locked him in a cellar.
6. He took ___ shoes off and entered on ___ tiptoe.
7. Someone threw ___ egg which struck the speaker on ___ shoulder.
185
8. I have ___ headache.
9. I have ___ pain in ___shoulder.
10. The windscreen was smashed and the driver was cut in ___ face by broken
glass.
11. He was ___very tall man with ___ dark hair and ___ small beard, but I
couldn't see ___ eyes because he was wearing ___ dark glasses.
12. He tore ___ trousers getting over a barbed wire fence.
13. Brother and sister were quite unlike each other. He had ___ fair wavy hair; ___
hair was dark and straight.
14. She pulled ___ sleeve to attract his attention.
15. She pulled him by ___ sleeve.
16. 'Hands up!' said the masked man, and we all put ___ hands up.
17. Ask ___ woman in front of you to take off ___ hat.
18. He stroked ___ chin thoughtfully.
19. If you're too hot why don't you take off ___ coat?
20. I saw him raise ___ right hand and take ___ oath.
Exercise 10. Choose the best variant.
1. There is ___ sand in my shoes.
a) b) a
c) the
d) an
2. The news was ___ very depressing.
a) a
b) the
c) d) an
3. ___ man and ___ woman were sitting opposite me.
a) a, the
b) the, a
) ,
d) -, 4. Paris is ___ capital of France.
a) the
b) a
c) an
d) 5. Chinese eat ___ rice every day.
a) the
b) )
d) an
6. There were ___ very few people in the shops today.
a) an
b) a
c) d) the
7. What is ___ longest river in ___ world?
a) a, a
b) the, the
c) the, a
d) a, the
8. Did you hear ___ noise just now?
a) the
b) )
d) an
9. What did you have for ___ breakfast?
a) b) the
)
d) an
10. Have you got these shoes in ___ size 43?
a) the
b) a
c) an
d) Exercise 11. Fill in the articles where necessary.
1)… Europe is the second smallest continent in 2)… world and is home to one
seventh of 3)… world’s population. 4)… longest river there is 5)… River Volga and
6)… largest freshwater lake is 7)… Lake Lodoga, in 8)… north-western 9)… Russia.
10)… highest mountain peak is 11)… Mount Elbrus in 12)… Caucasus Mountains.
186
13)… Europe is bordered towards the north by 14)… Arctic Ocean, the south by
15)… Mediterranean Sea and 16)… Black Sea, the west by 17)… Atlantic Ocean and
the east by 18)… Asia. 19)… Europeans are 20)… people who live in 21)… Europe.
22)… association which has been formed to unit 23)… countries of 24)… Europe is
called 25)… European Union.
Exercise 12. Underline the correct form.
1. Thompsons/The Thompsons live on a farm.
2. This is my friend, the Melanie/Melanie.
3. We went on a tour of Europe/ the Europe last summer.
4. The President Clinton/ President Clinton made an interesting speech.
5. John is staying at home/the home tonight.
6. The new shopping centre was opened by Mayor/the Mayor.
7. The baby sleeps in the afternoon/afternoon.
8. That the cat/cat belongs to my sister.
PRESENT PERFECT TENSE
I/You/We/You/They
have
Past Participle
He/She/It
has
Past Participle
Have
I/you/we/you/they
Past Participle?
Has
he/she/it
Past Participle?
I/You/We/You/They
have
not
Past Participle
He/She/It
has
not
Past Participle
You have seen that movie many times.
Have you seen that movie many times?
You have not seen that movie many times.
Use
1. Unspecified point in the past
I have been to Spain three times. (At some unspecified time in the past, I went to
Spain).
Compare with the Past Simple:
I went to Spain three times in 2005. (specified time in the past - the year 2005)
2. An action that occurred in the past, but has a result in the present (now)
We can't find our luggage. Have you seen it?
(The luggage was lost in the past, do you know where it is now?)
3. Talking about general experiences (ever, never)
It usually refers to an event happening at some moment in your life.
Has she ever tried Chilean wine before? (in her life)
I've never eaten monkey brains before. (in my life)
4. Events that recently occurred (just)
187
Do you want to go to a restaurant with me?
No, thanks. I've just eaten lunch. (I recently ate lunch.)
5. Events that have occurred up to now (yet)
Are Carlos and Rodrigo here? No, they haven't arrived yet. (they're still not here
now)
6. Events that occurred before you expected (already)
I've already graduated from University. (I expected to graduate at a later date.)
7. Events that began in the past and haven't changed (for, since)
Mike has worked at Woodward for 3 years.
(Mike started working at Woodward 3 years ago and he still works there now.)
Julie has worked at Woodward since September of last year.
(Julie began working at Woodward in September of last year, and that hasn't
changed - she still works here now.)
Present Perfect or Past Simple?
The Present Perfect tells us about the past and the present. - United have won
the Cp, so it’s theirs now.
The Past Simple tells us about the past, a time which is finished. – Last year is in
the past.
We use the Past Simple (not the Present Perfect) to talk about times in the past
such as yesterday, last week, in 1994, a hundred years ago.
We watched United last week. NOT We have watched United last week.
Long ago dinosaurs lived here. NOT Long ago dinosaurs have lived here.
For and since
To say how long a current situation has lasted
We use since with a point in time in the past (8 o’clock, 1975, August, last week, I
was born, he arrived).
I’ve lived here since 2004.
Things have been better since I changed schools.
We use for with a period of time that continues until now (82 years, a month, a few
minutes, half an hour, ages, hundreds of years).
I’ve lived here for four years.
My dad has had the same car for fifteen years.
You can also use for with the Past Simple. Compare theses sentences.
Present Perfect: I’ve lived in Hamburg for three years / since 1998. (I still live in
Hamburg).
Past Simple: I lived in Hamburg for three years /from 1995 to 1998. (Now I live
somewhere else).
We also use the negative form of the Present Perfect with for and since to say the
last time something happened.
The last time I spoke to David was two days ago. = I haven’t spoken to David for
two days.
188
Exercise 1. Write positive sentences in Present Perfect Simple.
The following people have just completed an action.
1. Bob / visit / his grandma
2. Jimmy / play / on the computer
3. Sue and Walter / wash / their car
4. Andrew / repair / his bike
5. Phil / help / Anne with Maths
6. Brad and Louise / watch / a film
7. Tamara / talk to / her best friend
8. Bridgette / draw / a picture
9. Carol / read / a computer magazine
10. Tom and Alice / be / to a restaurant
Exercise 2. Write negative sentences in the Present Perfect Simple.
The weather was wonderful today. So the children were in the park all afternoon
and have not done their household chores:
1. Sarah / not / wash the dishes
2. Anita / not / clean the kitchen
3. Maureen and Gavin / not / water the plants
4. Joey / not / make his bed
5. David / not / buy milk
6. Lisa / not / be to the baker's
7. Aran and Jack / not / do their homework
8. Jane and Ben / not / tidy up their rooms
9. Alex / not / feed the hamster
10. Hazel / not / empty the bin
Exercise 3. Write questions in the Present Perfect Simple.
1. you / answer / the question
2. Jenny / lock / the door
3. Walter / call / us
4. you / see / the picture
5. your parents / get / the letter
6. it / rain / a lot
7. how often / we / sing / the song
8. Maureen / watch / the film
9. how many books / Bob / read
10. ever / you / be / to London
Exercise 4. Write the Past Participle of these
necessary.
a. see ____
e. find___
i. write ___
b. buy ___
f. come ___
j. break___
c. sell ___
g. put ___
k. set ___
verbs. Use a dictionary if
m. fall ___
n. rise ___
o. meet___
189
d. do ___
h. take___
l. read ___
p. think ___
Exercise 5. Use the prompts to write a sentence.
1. The teacher/arrive. - The teacher has arrived.
2. The students/leave. –
3. The exams/finish. –
4. Danny/break/leg. –
5. I/sent/you/e-mail. –
6. She/see/this film/before. –
7. Dave and Joe/win/a scholarship. –
8. There/be/accident. –
Exercise 6. Put the words in order to make a question. Then write a short
answer.
1. You have school finished?
Have you finished school? – Yes, I have./No, I have not.
2. Rained has today it? ______. ______.
3. Done this you exercise have before? _____. _____.
4. Got better has for life people? _____. _____.
5. Have world’s risen temperatures the? _____. _____.
6. Gone petrol the price up has of? _____. _____.
7. At you have seen the play theatre? _____. _____.
8. Season football has the begun? _____. _____.
Exercise 7. Complete the sentence with a verb from the box in the Present
Perfect and any other necessary information.
do stop
rise
get
lose
arrive
change
leave
1. Half an hour ago it was raining and now it isn’t. – It has stopped raining.
2. John is at school. His homework is at home. – ___ at home.
3. Ten minutes ago you ordered a pizza by phone. The doorbell is now ringing. –
Great. My pizza ___.
4. Last year the school had 540 pupils. This year there are 600. – The number of
pupils ___ by 60.
5. You can’t find your revision notes. - ___ notes.
6. You’re doing an experiment. You did the same experiment last week and the
week before. – This is the third time ___.
7. Philip Jones goes to your university. Last year he went to a different university. ___ universities.
8. Last year your school was easy. Now it’s not. – The school work ___ more
difficult this year.
Exercise 8. Complete the sentences with for and since.
1. Kathy has been off university ___ last Thursday.
2. Tom has had his own PC ___ a few months now.
190
3. We haven’t had a holiday ___ Easter.
4. The university has had that old microscope ___ years.
5. They have been friends ___ they were at primary school.
6. I haven’t seen you ___ a while. How are things going?
Exercise 9. Complete the second sentence so it means the same as the first.
1. The last time I cooked a meal was on Saturday.
I haven’t cooked a meal since Saturday.
2. The last time I washed up was a week ago. ______ for a week.
3. The last time my dad did any gardening was six months ago.
___ for 6 months.
4. The last time we helped with the shopping was at Christmas. - ___ since
Christmas.
5. The last time I did some DIY was when I painted the sitting room.
_____ I painted the sitting room.
Exercise 10. Add a sentence. Use the Present Perfect.
E.g. I’m tired. (I/walk/miles). I’ve walked miles.
1. Emma’s computer is working now. (she/repair/it) _____
2. It’s cooler in here now. (I/open/the window) ____
3. The visitors are here at last. (they/arrive) ____
4. Mark’s car isn’t blocking us in now. (he/move/it) ____
5. We haven’t got any new videos. (we/watch/all these) ____
Exercise 11. Ask for the information in the bold part of the sentence.
1. I have been in the garden. 2. My sister has cooked dinner.
3. Sue has read the book twice. 4. My computer has crashed. 5. Jeane has been on holiday for eight days.
6. Fred has done his homework.
7. Gavin has stopped at the corner.
8. Sarah has bought five books. 9. Jason has talked to his teacher.
10. Catherine has cleaned the house because she is having a party tonight.
Exercise 12. Put the verbs into the correct form (Present Perfect Simple).
1. I (not / work) ___ today.
2. We (buy) ___ a new lamp.
3. We (not / plan) ___ our holiday yet.
4. Where (be / you) ___?
5. He (write) ___ five letters.
6. She (not / see) ___ him for a long time.
7. (be / you) at school?
191
8. School (not / start) ___ yet.
9. (speak / he) to his boss?
10. No, he (have / not) ___ the time yet.
Exercise 13. Put the verbs into the correct tense (Past Simple or Present
Perfect Simple).
A: (you / play / already) ___ the new computer game?
B: No, not yet. I only (buy) __ it yesterday and I (have / not) __ the time yet.
A: (you / go) ___ to the cinema last night?
B: Yes. I (be) ___ there with Sue and Louis. (you / be) ___ to the cinema recently?
A: I last (go) ___ to the cinema two weeks ago.
B: So you (see / not) ___ the new action film yet.
A: No, unfortunately not. (you / enjoy) ___ it?
B: Oh, I really (love) ___ it. But Sue (like / not) ___ it - too much action!
A: But why (you / take) ___ her with you? She (tell) me last week that she (hate)
___ action films.
B: I think she has an eye on Louis. She (try) ___ to flirt with him all the time. So
he (can / concentrate / not) ___ on the film.
Exercise 14. Put the verbs into the correct tense (Past Simple or Present Perfect
Simple).
1. William (tidy / already) ___ up his room.
2. Caroline (miss) ___ the schoolbus yesterday.
3. I (finish / just) ___ my homework.
4. I cannot go out tonight. My grandparents (come) ___ to see us.
5. In 2004, the Olympic Summer Games (take) ___ place in Athens.
6. We (watch / not) ___ TV last night.
7. Joanna (read / not) ___ the book yet.
8. Collin (not / go) ___ on holiday last year.
9. I (have / not) ___ any problems so far.
10. They (learn / not) ___ the new words yet.
11. (they / be / ever) to New York?
12. (you / see) Catherine a minute ago?
13. What time (you / get) ___ up today?
Exercise 15. Write replies using the Present Perfect and just.
Use these Past Participle: check, eat, make, remember, ring, tidy
We must find out the address. – It’s all right, I’ve just remembered it.
1. The children’s room looks neat. –Yes, they’ve ___.
2. Is Daniel making some coffee? – It’s ready. ___.
3. What happened to that chocolate? – Sorry, ___.
4. Has Rachel got all the answers right? – Yes, ___.
5. Have you told your sister? – Yes, I’ve ___.
192
Exercise 16. Andrew is a very hard-working student. It’s midnight and he is
still working at his computer. Write sentences with the Present Perfect and for
and since.
be/at his computer/six hours – He has been at his computer for six hours.
1. not/have/any fun/a long time - ____.
2. have/a cold/a week - ___.
3. not/see/his friends/ages - ___.
4. not/do/any sport/last year - ___.
5. be/busy with his studies/months - ___.
Exercise 17. Complete the sentences.
e.g. You ought to wash the car. You haven’t washed it for ages. I’d better have a
shower. I haven’t had one since Thursday.
1. I think I’ll ring my girlfriend. I haven’t ___ the weekend.
2. We’re going to see some old friends. We haven’t ___ five years.
3. Let’s watch a video, shall we? We haven’t ___ quite a while.
4. We could have a barbecue. We haven’t ___ last summer.
5. Shall we play tennis? We haven’t ___ our holiday.
Exercise 18. Put in the Past Participle of the verbs in brackets.
We’ve found (find) all the answers.
1. Have you ___ (wash) the car?
2. You haven’t ___ (eat) very much.
3. They’ve ___ (open) a new supermarket.
4. You’ve ___ (write) it in pencil.
5. I’ve ___ (make) the sandwiches.
6. We’ve ___ (have) our lunch.
7. United have ___ (score) a goal.
8. The balloon has ___ (land) in a field.
9. Who’s ___ (break) this glass?
10. It’s warm because the heating has ___ (be) on.
11. Have you ___ (sell) your flat yet?
12. I’ve ___ (finish) that job at last.
Exercise 19. Complete the second sentence so that it follows on from the first.
Use the Present Perfect.
e.g. My hair is tidy now. – I’ve brushed my hair.
1. The door is open. Someone ___ the door.
2. This is Oliver’s drawing, look. Oliver ___ a picture.
3. The calculator is broken. Someone ___ the calculator.
4. United are the winners. United ___ the game.
5. There is no more wine in the bottle. We ___ all the wine.
6. The floor is clean now. I ___ the floor.
7. I know my number now. I ___ my number by heart.
193
8. The guests are here now. The guests ___.
9. I’m still working on computer. I ___ with the computer yet.
Exercise 20. Decide which word is correct.
I’d like to borrow this book. Has Anna read it yet?
a) done
b) for
c) just
d) yet
1. Ben writes very quickly. He’s ___ finished his essay.
a) already
b) been
c) for
d) yet
2. What are you going to do? – I don’t know. I haven’t decided ___.
a) Just
b) long
c) since
d) yet
3. I’ve ____ to London. I went there in June.
a) been
b) gone
c) just
d) yet
4. Have you ____ done any skiing?
a) ever
b) for
c) just
d) long
5. My boyfriend hasn’t rung ___ week.
a) for
b) last
c) since
d) this
6. I haven’t seen that coat before. How ___ have you had it?
a) already
b) for
c) long
d) since
7. The girls have ___ to the cinema. They won’t be back until ten o’clock.
a) already
b) been
c) gone
d) just
8. I haven’t seen my parents ___ last Christmas.
a) already
b) before
c) for
d) since
9. This is the first ___ I’ve ever lived away from home.
a) already
b) since
c) that
d) time
10. This programme must be new. I’ve ____ seen it before.
a) ever
b) never
c) since
d) yet
Exercise 21. Put in the Present Perfect or Past Simple of the verbs in brackets.
I’ve had (have) these shoes since my eighteenth birthday.
I tidied (tidy) my desk, but know it’s in a mess again.
1. The last time I ___ (go) to Brighton was in August.
2. I’d like to meet a ghost, but I ___ (never/see) one.
3. I’ve finished my homework. I ___ (do) it before tea.
4. And the race is over! And Micky Simpson ___ (win) in a record time!
5. I ___ (work) for a computer company for a year. That was after college.
6. What time ___ (you/get) to work this morning?
7. Martin ___ (be) to Greece five times. He loves the place.
8. The President ___ (come) out of the building and is going to make a speech.
9. You won’t believe this, but I’ve got some tickets for the concert. – Oh, well
done. How ___ (you/get) them?
10. Of course I can ride a bike, but I ___ (not/ride) one for years.
11. Marilyn Monroe ___ (be) in about thirty films.
12. Janet ___ (be) very ill three years ago.
13. Rupert has left a message for you. He ___ (ring) last night.
194
14. ___ (you/see) the news today? – No, not yet. I’ll watch it at ten.
15. We moved here in 1993. We ___ (be) here a long time now.
Exercise 22. Rephrase the following sentences, using the Present Perfect tense
with for or since.
E.g. It is two years since I saw Tom. - I haven't seen Tom for two years.
1. It's two years since I had a puncture.
2. It's two months since he earned any money.
3. He last shaved the day before yesterday.
4. I last drank champagne at my brother's wedding.
5. It's two years since I was last in Rome.
6. I saw Tom last on his wedding day.
7. I last ate raw fish when I was in Japan.
8. It's years since Mary last spoke French.
9. It's ten weeks since I last had a good night's sleep.
10. He last paid taxes in 1970.
11. I last ate meat five years ago. (Omit ago.)
12. It's three months since the windows were cleaned.
13. It's years since I took any photographs.
14. I last watched TV on New Year's Day.
15. It's three months since he wrote to me.
16. I was last paid six months ago. (My pay is six months in arrears.)
17. The last time I was abroad was in the summer of 1978.
18. It's ten years since that house was lived in.
Exercise 23. Complete the sentences with the Simple Present, the Present
Continuous, the Simple Past, the Past Continuous or the Present Perfect of the
verbs in brackets and put the adverbs in the correct place.
1. Portuguese banks _________ (to open) at 8 o'clock.
2. They always ______ (to play) the piano in the evening.
3. Last year she _______ (to spend) most of her time on the beach.
4. I __________ (not/to eat) fish since I was eleven.
5. I ________ (to listen) to music when you ______ (to phone) last night.
6. _______ (she/to go) to Spain two years ago?
7. She __________ (usually/to go) to school by bus.
8. She _____ (to give) him a watch yesterday but he ___ (already/to lose) it.
9. I _________ (not/to buy) a carpet yet.
10. He _________ (to swim) three miles every day.
11. Let's go away! We _______ (to be) here for more than half an hour.
12. Where _____ (you/to go) for a holiday last year? I ___ (go) to London.
13. She is very tired because she __________ (not/to sleep) for two days.
14. My mother _______ (just/to go) to the market.
15. Mr. Morgan is the tallest man I ________ (ever/to know).
195
PAST PERFECT TENSE
I/You/ He/She/It/We/You/They
had
Past Participle
Had
I/you/he/she/it/we/you/they
Past Participle?
I/You/He/She/It/We/You/They
had
not
Past Participle
Use
1. We use the Past Perfect to make it clear that an action was completed before
another action in the past.
The door bell rang at last. I had been in the room since breakfast.
(The bell rang at noon. I came in the morning - before that.)
When I arrived there Sarah had already left. (I arrived after lunch. Sara went before
lunch.)
I was so hungry! I had not eaten anything since the morning. (It was late at night.)
2. It is used to refer to an activity that was completed before a point of time in the
past.
In 2005 I had lived in the same place for ten years. Had you ever travelled by plane
before your holiday in Spain?
Past Perfect vs Present Perfect Simple
1. The past perfect is often used with expressions indicating that the activity took
some time, such as: for 10 years, since 1995, all week, all the time, always, ...
When the plane landed Tim had travelled all day. My parents moved away from
Leeds. They had lived there since they got married. In 2005 Derek started to work in
Berlin. He had always planned it.
These expressions are also used with the Perfect. The difference is, however,
that the Present Perfect refers to events that started in the past and still continue, the
Past Perfect expresses events that began before a point of time (or another action) in
the past and continued to that point of time in the past.
I have been in Paris for a week. (the Present Perfect - I came a week ago and I am
still in Paris.)
When I met Annie I had been in Paris for a week. (the Past Perfect - I came to
Paris a week before I met Annie and I am not there anymore.)
2. If we use the Past Perfect Simple it does not always mean that an activity
continued up to a point of time in the past. The event can end a long time before the
point of time in the past that we refer to.
In 2001 Angie worked in Glasgow. In 1980's she had worked in Wales.
(Angie left her job in Glasgow in 1989. In 2001 she worked in Glasgow. But we do
not know what she did in the meantime.)
Past Perfect vs Past Simple
1. The Past Simple is used for actions that happened some time ago. The Past
Perfect is used for actions that happened before a point of time in the past.
Jim returned at 4 o'clock. He had called Jane on the way back home and now she
appeared at the door.
In this story the sentences are in a reversed order, because in reality, first Jim
called Jane and then he returned. If we want to keep this sentence order, we must use
196
the past perfect to make it clear that Jim called Jane first.
2. If the sentence order is the same as the order of the events, we can use the Past
tense.
Jim called Jane on the way back home. He returned at 4 o'clock and now she
appeared at the door.
This difference is important. In some situations these two tenses have a completely
different meaning.
I arrived at the garage. They told me to pay in cash. But I only had my credit card.
I couldn't pay.
I arrived at the garage. They had told me to pay in cash. I paid and left
immediately.
In the first case I did not know that I had to pay in cash. They told me after my
arrival.
In the second case I was informed before my arrival and had no problems.
Exercise 1. Make the Past Perfect Simple - 'wh' or 'yes/no' questions.
1) (you/go) there before we went together?
2) (she/see) the film already?
3) Why (he/forget) about the meeting?
4) (it/be) cold all week?
5) (I/read) the book before the class?
6) When she arrived (we/eat) already?
7) Where (you/be) when I saw you?
8) (they/travel) by bullet train before?
9) (John/meet) Lucy before they worked together?
10) (you/do) your homework before I saw you?
11) Where (she/work)?
12) (I/pay) the bill before we left?
13) (we/visit) my parents already that winter?
14) When you called, (they/eat) dinner?
Exercise 2. Choose the correct tense (Simple Past or Past Perfect).
1. The wind (blow) ___ away the leaves that we (collect) ___.
2. She (throw) ____away the letter that she (write) ____.
3. They (show) ___me the pictures, they (take) ____during their holidays.
4. In the evening, the children (tell) ____ their daddy what they (see) ___at the
zoo.
5. The boy (be) ____ very sorry for what he (do) _____.
Exercise 3. Put the verbs into the correct tense (Simple Past or Past Perfect).
1. My friend (eat) _____ up all the biscuit we (bake) ___.
2. The teacher (correct) _____ the tests we (write) _____.
3. I (give) ____ them some of the candies I (buy) ____.
4. My sister (see/not) __ the note that I (lay) ___ on the kitchen table for her.
197
4. We (want) ___ to watch a film that we (see/not) ____ before.
5. When Simon (go) ____ out to play, he (do) _____ his homework.
6. Jenny (come) ____ home, (sit) ____ down and (read) ___ a good book
7. Before that day in winter, the African boy (see) ____ snow in his life.
8. She (give) ____ me the book that she (read) _____.
9. We (visit) __ the museum that our friend (tell) __ us about a month before.
10. When he (wake up) ___, his mother (already/prepare) ____ breakfast.
11. We (go) ____ to London because the Queen (invite) ___ us for tea.
12. He (hear) ___ the news, (go) ___ to the telephone and (call) __ a friend.
13. When she (start) ____ to learn English, she (already/learn) ___ French.
15. Jane (already/type) ____ ten pages when her computer (crash) ____.
16. By the time he (arrive) _____ at the pub, they (run) ____ out of beer.
17. Before that day we (never / think) _____ of going to Japan.
18. I (know) _____ him for a long time before I (meet) ____ his family.
19. They (not/know) ___ where to meet because nobody (tell) ___ them.
20. It (be) ____cloudy for days before it finally (begin) ____ to rain.
Exercise 4. Put the verbs in brackets into the gaps in the correct tense Past
Perfect or Simple Past.
Example: Pat (to live) in London before he (to move) to Rome.
Answer: Pat had lived in London before he moved to Rome.
1) After Fred (to spend) his holiday in Italy he (to want) to learn Italian.
2) Jill (to phone) Dad at work before she (to leave) for her trip.
3) Susan (to turn on) the radio after she (to wash) the dishes.
4) When she (to arrive) the match already (to start).
5) After the man (to come) home he (to feed) the cat.
6) Before he (to sing) a song he (to play) the guitar.
7) She (to watch) a video after the children (to go) to bed.
8) After Eric (to make) breakfast he (to phone) his friend.
9) I (to be) very tired because I (to study) too much.
10) They (to ride) their bikes before they (to meet) their friends.
Exercise 5. Choose the Past Simple or the Past Perfect tense.
1) We had already eaten when John (come) home.
2) Last year Juan (pass) all his exams.
3) When I (get) to the airport I discovered I had forgotten my passport.
4) I went to the library, then I (buy) some milk and went home.
5) I opened my handbag to find that I (forget) my credit card.
6) When we (arrive) at the station, the train had already left.
7) We got home to find that someone (break) into the house.
8) I opened the fridge to find that someone (eat) all my chocolate.
9) I had known my husband for three years when we (get) married.
10) Julie was very pleased to see that John (clean) the kitchen.
11) It (rain) all summer, so the grass was completely dead.
198
12) When he (arrive) at the party, Julie had just left.
13) After arriving home, I realised I (buy) any milk.
14) The laundry was wet - it (rain) while I was out.
15) William felt ill last night because he (eat) too many cakes.
16) Keiko (meet) William last September.
17) First I tidied the flat, then I (sit) down and had a cup of coffee.
18) John (play) the piano when he was a child, but he doesn't play now.
19) When I opened the curtains the sun was shining and the ground was white. It
(snow) during the night.
Exercise 6. Simple Past or Past Perfect?
I can't believe I _____ (get) that apartment. I _____ (make) my application last
week, but I didn't think I had a chance of actually getting it. When I _____ (arrive) to
take a look around, there were at least twenty other people who _____ (arrive) before
me. Most of them _____ (fill, already) out their applications before I arrived, and
they were already leaving. The landlord said I could still apply, so I did.
I _____ (try) to fill out the form, but I couldn't answer half of the questions. They
_____ (want) me to give references, but I didn't want to list my previous landlord
because I _____ (have) some problems with him and I knew he wouldn't recommend
me. I _____ (use) my father as a reference!
It was total luck that he _____ (decide) to give me the apartment. It was because
the landlord and my father _____ (go) to high school together. He _____ (decide) that
I could have the apartment before he _____ (look) at my references. I was really
lucky!
Exercise 7. Write the sentences, putting one verb in each sentence into the Past
Simple, and the other verb into the Past Perfect.
1. When the police (arrive), the car (go). – When the police arrived, the car had
gone.
2. When I (get) to the shop, it (close).
3. They (eat) everything by the time I (arrive) at the party.
4. When we (leave) the beach, the rain (already start).
5. I (try) telephoning her several times but she (leave the country).
6. When I (find) my purse, someone (take) the money out of it.
7. The car (go) when I (look) into the street.
8. All the garages (close) by the time we (cross) the border.
9. (You already leave) when the trouble (start)?
10. The post (not arrive) when I (leave) the house this morning.
Exercise 8. Put the verbs in brackets into the Past Simple or Past Perfect
Simple.
James sat (sit) outside the office waiting for the interview. He ___ (feel) so
nervous that he ___ (not know) what to do with himself. The person who ___ (go in)
before him ___ (be) in there for nearly an hour. Not like James. He ___ (feel) sure
199
that she ___ (already get) the job. The problem ___ (be) that he ___ (want) this job so
much. It ___ (mean) everything to him. He ___ (think) about it such a lot before the
day of the interview. He ___ (imagine) himself performing brilliantly at the interview
and being offered the job immediately. But now here he ___ (be) feeling terrible. He
___ (cannot remember) all those things he ___ (plan) to say. At the moment, he ___
(almost decide) to get up and leave. But no - he ___ (have to do) this. He ___ (spend)
so much time thinking about that he ___ (cannot give up) like that. His hands ___
(be) hot and sticky and his mouth ___ (feel) dry. Finally the door of the office ___
(open). The woman who ___ (go in) an hour earlier __ (come out) looking very
pleased with herself. She ___ (smile) sympathetically at James. At that moment
James ___ (hate) her. The managing director then ___ (appear) at the office door.
‘Would you like to come in now, Mr Davis? I’m sorry to have kept you waiting’.
James ___ (suddenly wish) that he ___ (go) home after all.
FUTURE PERFECT TENSE
I/You/He/She/It/We/They
will have
worked
I/You/He/She/It/We/They
won’t (will not)
have solved
Will I/you/he/she/it/we/they
have
worked?
Use
We use the Future Perfect Simple for events that will be completed before or at a
certain time. It is often used with a time expression beginning with by: by then, by
that time, by midnight, by the end of the year.
The time can also be given by other time expressions (on Sunday, before 31 June)
or other activities expressed in different Future tenses.
I will have sent the project by Friday.
On 11 August this year we will have been married for five years.
When the mountaineers get back to the base, they'll have been in the snowstorm
for two days.
We'll have reached the top before noon.
How long will she have worked here by the end of this year?
In all these examples, at a given time the Future Perfect actions will be in the past.
Exercise 1. Make the Future Perfect.
1. I (leave) by six.
2. (you/finish) the report by the deadline?
3. When (we/do) everything?
4. She (finish) her exams by then, so we can go out for dinner.
5. You (read) the book before the next class.
6. She (not/finish) work by seven.
7. When (you/complete) the work?
200
8. They (arrive) by dinner time.
9. We (be) in London for three years next week.
10. (she/get) home by lunch time?
11. (you/do) everything by seven?
12. We (not/eat) before we come, so we'll be hungry.
13. (he/finish) his exams when we go on holiday?
14. He (not/complete) the project by July.
Exercise 2. Put the verbs in brackets into the Future Perfect tense.
1. In a fortnight's time we (take) our exam.
2. I (finish) this book by tomorrow evening.
3. By this time tomorrow we (have) our injections.
4. By the end of next year I (be) here twenty-five years.
5. I'll still be here next summer but Tom (leave).
6. I (finish) this job in twenty minutes.
7. By next winter they (build) four houses in that field.
8. When we reach Valparaiso we (sail) all round the world.
9. At the rate he is going he (spend) all his money by the time he is twenty-one.
10. By this time next year I (save) € 250.
11. By the time we get to the party everything (be) eaten.
12. The train (leave) before we reach the station.
13. If I continue with my diet I (lose) 10 kilos by the end of the month.
14. By the end of my university course I (attend) 1,200 lectures.
15. When you come back I (finish) all the housework.
Exercise 3. Fill in the correct form verb in either the Future Perfect Simple
tense.
E.g. Tamara will have completed her Bachelor’s Degree by June. (complete)
1. Sheila ___ the scholarship by the time she starts school in September. (get)
2. By this time next month, I hope they ____building the community center. (finish)
3. By this time tomorrow night we ______ in Australia. (arrive)
4. ______ he ____ the message by the time your flight takes off? (receive)
5. Dana ____ the night shift by the time you get up in the morning. (not finish)
6. By the time we get on the plane, they ___ already ___ the luggage. (load)
7. By 2025, I hope researchers ______ a cure for cancer. (find)
Exercise 4. Choose the correct form of the verb, given in brackets.
1. I ___________ (work) in the garden all day long tomorrow.
2. I __________ (finish) the book by the evening.
3. __________ (be) tired after his work.
4. We _________ (write) the article by five o'clock.
5. He can't come at two o'clock tomorrow because he ___ (work) at that time.
6.
_______ (send) us a telegram as soon as the steamer arrives.
7. While my mother is having her breakfast. I _____ (read) the newspaper.
201
8. By the end of the year she ______ (learn) to speak English.
9. He ____ (ring) you up and tell you everything about the forthcoming meeting.
10. They ________ (not, play) football on Sunday afternoon.
11. He _________ (carry) this bag for you.
12. In June that firm ______ (carry) on negotiations for the purchase of software.
13. In summer the director ______ (still, work) on her new film.
14. We _________ (not, find) the material by tomorrow.
15. She __________ (not, go) to the party with us.
Exercise 5. Fill in the spaces with the correct form of the verb in parentheses
in the Future Perfect tense.
Example: Buyers cannot look at the condominiums next week. The carpenters (not,
finish) will not have finished the kitchen cabinets yet.
1) Samuel wants to drive to the beach in July, but he (not, receive) ____ his
driver’s license yet.
2) Li Ming will need a shower when she gets home from camping. She (not, take)
____ one for three days.
3) We don’t want to leave the pool at noon. We (not, swim) ___ long enough by
then.
4) The runners will all need some water when they get here. They (not, drink)
____ anything for the last four miles
5) When I go to work out at the gym on Wednesday, I (not, exercise) ____ for a
week!
6) Sarah would like to go diving tomorrow, but she (not, take) ___ lessons by then.
7) When the company moves its offices in September, it (not, move) ___ them for
75 years.
8) Tom is learning to fly small planes, but he (not, fly) ___ enough hours by spring
to begin flying solo.
COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES
We use Comparatives and Superlatives to compare two or more nouns.
The formation of the comparative and superlative depends on the number of
syllables in the adjective:
One-syllable Adjectives
To form the comparative, we add -er to the end of the adjective.
To form the superlative, we add -est to the end of the adjective.
Adjective
Comparative
Superlative
small
smaller
the smallest
cold
colder
the coldest
light
lighter
the lightest
short
shorter
the shortest
202
Remember that comparatives are often followed by than.
London is bigger than Santiago.
Mike is taller than John but James is the tallest.
Two-syllable Adjectives ending in -Y
To form the comparative, we remove the -y and add -ier to the end of the
adjective.
To form the superlative, we remove the -y and add -iest to the end of the adjective.
Adjective
Comparative
Superlative
crazy
crazier
the craziest
happy
happier
the happiest
early
earlier
the earliest
It was the happiest day of my life.
My joke was funnier than your one.
Adjectives with Two or more Syllables
For Adjectives with 2 syllables (that don't end in -y) and higher (3, 4 syllables etc),
we use more for comparatives and the most for superlatives.
Adjective
Comparative
Superlative
handsome
more handsome
the most handsome
nervous
more nervous
the most nervous
enthusiastic
more enthusiastic
the most enthusiastic
My girlfriend is more beautiful than yours.
Alex is more intelligent than you but I am the most intelligent.
Irregular Forms Adjective
Comparative
Superlative
good
better
the best
bad
worse
the worst
far
further / farther the furthest / farthest
I am a better tennis player than you but Marcelo is the best.
Steve is a worse liar than me but Adrian is the worst.
Note: Further / farther, furthest / farthest are all used for distance.
Only Further / furthest are used to mean 'additional' or 'more advanced'.
Puerto Montt is further / farther than Valdivia is from here (in Santiago).
If you require further information, please contact reception.
Remember that the opposites of 'more' and 'most' are 'less' and 'least'.
Comparative
Superlative
One syllable adjectives:
younger,
shorter,
youngest,
young, short, big
bigger
shortest, biggest
Two-syllable
adjectives
lovelier,
prettier,
loveliest,
ending in –y: lovely, pretty, funnier
prettiest, funniest
funny
most pleasant
more pleasant
Other
two-syllable
most modern
more modern
adjectives:
pleasant,
most careful
more careful
annoyed, modern, careful,
203
careless
more careless
most careless
Adjectives of three or
more expensive
most expensive
more syllables: expensive,
more attractive
most attractive
attractive, exciting
more exciting
most exciting
better,
worse,
best,
worst,
Adjectives with irregular
furthest/farthest
comparatives
and further/farther
superlatives: good, bad, far
Less and least can be used in comparative and superlative sentences: Travelling
by train is less tiring than driving. This must be the least attractive part of the coast.
Least is sometimes used in the expression ‘not in the least’ meaning ‘not at all’: It
doesn’t matter in the least if you can’t come. I’ll see you next week.
An adjective with a negative prefix forms its comparative and superlative in the
same way as the adjective without the negative prefix:
kind – kinder – kindest
unkind – unkinder - unkindest
happy – happier – happiest
unhappy – unhappier – unhappiest
honest – more honest - most honest
dishonest – more dishonest – most dishonest
however, it is more common to say not as kind as…, not as happy as… than it is to
say unkinder, more dishonest.
When than is followed by a personal pronoun, it can be a subject pronoun +
auxiliary or a subject pronoun + whole clause. - She works harder than I do. She
works harder than me. (informal)
Exercise 1. Pam, who lives in London, is on the phone to her friend Debbie, who
has recently moved to the countryside.
Pam: So how are you enjoying living in the new place?
Debbie: Oh, it’s very nice. The house is much ___ (spacious) than the flat we had
in London and one of the ___ (good) things is being able to walk out of the back door
into our own garden.
Pam: Mm, that must be lovely. So all in all, it’s much ___ (good) than London, is
it?
Debbie: Well, I’m not sure I would say that. It’s certainly ___ (polluted) here and I
suppose it’s ___ (stressful) and that must be good for me. But it’s just so much ___
(quit) here and that takes some time to get used to. I suppose I miss the cultural
diversity of London. Going out shopping in London was so much ___ (interesting)
that it is here. The people here are so much ___ (varied) than they are in London.
Pam: I suppose that’s true. But it’s so much ___ (busy) on the streets here in
London. It must be nice to walk around somewhere that’s much ___ (crowded).
Debbie: Well, sometimes it is. Anyway, at least I’m coming up to London next
weekend. I’m ___ (excited) about that than I am about anything happening round
here.
Pam: Oh dear. You seem to be thinking that haven’t made the ___ (good) decision.
Debbie: well, perhaps I’ll fee ___ (settled) here after a few months. Who knows?
Pam: Yes, probably. I personally think you’re lucky to be where you are. When I
came to visit you, I thought it was one of one ___ (beautiful) places I’d ever seen.
204
Exercise 2. Fill the blanks with the right form of the adjective in brackets:
1. Your bag’s zip is ____________ (easy) to close than mine.
2. My mother’s advice is always _____________ (useful).
3. This summer is _____________ (dry) than ever.
4. It is ___________ (difficult) rule of all.
5. This pen writes _______________ (good) than my previous one.
6. This athlete is _______________ (strong) than his competitor.
7. This pupil is _____________ (clever) in the class.
8. This is ______________ (old) castle in Britain.
9. Health is _____________ (important) than money.
10. This path is ______________ (narrow) than the parallel one.
11. This actor is _________________ (famous) actor in Spain.
12. Kenyans are ________________ (good) sprinters.
13. Luxurious hotels are___________ (expensive) than economic ones.
14. My _____________ (old) sister is afraid of mice.
15. Saturn is _______ 2nd ________ (large) planet in our solar system.
16. We have ________ (much) homework today than we had yesterday.
17. If you need any ______ (far) information, please contact our assistant.
18. The second part of the film is ________ (boring) than the first.
19. In childhood my aunt was ________ (thin) than she is now.
20. This highway is ________ (wide) than that highway.
Exercise 3. Put the adjectives into the comparative adjective or comparative
adverb form.
1. I sleep much more heavily (heavy) than I used do.
2. She’s become much ___ (happy) since she stopped seeing Dominic.
3. I always feel ___ (healthy) when I’m on holiday than when I’m at work.
4. It all happened ___ (sudden) than I was expecting.
5. I think the meal’s going to be a lot ___ (expensive) than we anticipated.
6. This child ate ___ (hungry) than any child I’ve ever seen.
7. This curry tastes ___ (hot) than you usually make it.
8. I occasionally go to the gym but I should go ___ (frequent) than I do.
9. He was injured ___ (serious) than any of the others.
10. He made me ___ (furious) than I’ve ever been in my life.
11. He treats her ___ (considerate) now than he used to.
12. The weather’s turned ___ (cold) recently.
13. Your hair looks much ___ (nice) like that.
14. I hope this exam is ___ (easy) than the one I did yesterday.
15. She took the news ___ (calm) than I thought she would.
Exercise 4. Read and choose the correct option.
1. A desktop computer is _________________ a laptop computer.
a. more expensive than
b. the most expensive
205
c. cheaper than
2. A toaster is _________________________ a refrigerator.
a. bigger than
b. the cheapest
c. smaller than
3. A coffee maker is ______________________ a mp3 player.
a. newer than
b. bigger than
c. the smallest
4. A refrigerator is _________________________ a hair dryer.
a. smaller than
b. more expensive than
c. cheaper than
5. A cell phone_________________________ a vacuum cleaner.
a. bigger than
b. the oldest
c. newer than
Exercise 5. Fill in the correct form of the words in brackets (comparative or
superlative).
1. My house is __________________(big) than yours.
2. This flower is ______________ (pretty)than that one.
3. Non-smokers usually live ______________ (long) than smokers.
4. Who is the __________________(rich) woman on earth?
5. He was the __________________(clever) thief of all.
6. New York is __________________(big) Paris.
7. English milk is __________________(strong) French milk.
8. An elephant is __________________(heavy) a fly.
9. A Mini is __________________(cheap) a Jaguar.
10. Rugby is __________________(funny) than football.
11. Mary is the __________________ (pretty) of all.
12. Tom is the __________________ (tall) of class.
13. They are the __________________ (ugly) boys in the world.
14. Susan is __________________ (happy) than Bob.
Exercise 6. Complete these sentences.
1. The weather is much warmer than it usually is at this time. (warm)
2. Going by car took twice as long as going by train. (long)
3. It was by far the worst time of my life. (bad)
4. The train’s a lot ___ all the other ways of getting there. (fast)
5. This exam was a bit ___ all the other tests.(easy)
6. I think English spelling is by far ___. (difficult)
7. The food isn’t nearly ___ it has been in the past.(good)
206
8. She’s a bit ___ her brother. (sensitive)
9. Flying is a lot ___ going by car. (quick)
10. First class is much ___ second. (expensive)
11. This is easily ___ restaurant in London. (good)
12. Ellen was a bit ___ she usually is. (cheerful)
13. He’s not nearly ___ his sister. (intelligent)
14. The journey was three times ___ we had expected. (long)
15. The film wasn’t ___ I had thought it would be. (good)
Exercise 7. Complete the sentences using a comparative and than.
1. She’s much younger than her husband. (young)
2. It’s a warmer day than yesterday. (warm)
3. The vegetables in this shop are ___ the ones in the supermarket. (fresh)
4. The train is ___ the bus. (expensive)
5. This new TV programme is much ___ the old one. (funny)
6. Mr Davies is a ___ teacher ___ Mr Andrews. (good)
7. My office is ___ Helen’s. (near)
8. The traffic is ___ it was last year. (noisy)
9. You have a ___ life ___ I have. (busy)
10. Drivers in this country are ___ drivers in my country. (careless)
11. The exam today was ___ last year’s exam. (difficult)
12. She’s much ___ her sister. (kind)
13. The North is ___ the South. (rich)
14. The students ask ___ questions ___ they did before. (intelligent)
15. Her second book is ___ her first. (interesting)
COMPARISON OF ADVERBS
Only gradable adverbs, that are adverbs that can be modified, can have
comparative and superlative forms. We cannot modify adverbs such as sometimes,
never, there, now, almost.
Adverbs ending in –ly and a few other adverbs can be put into comparative and
superlative forms:
Adverb
Comparative
Superlative
Adverbs ending
carefully
more carefully
most carefully
in -ly
quickly
more quickly
most quickly
fastest
faster
fast
Adverbs
with
hardest
harder
hard
same
form as
earliest
earlier
early
adjective
worse
worst
Irregular
badly
well
better
best
207
little
less
least
much
more
most
She drives more carefully than he does.
I think Sarah works the hardest of us all.
He helps me less than he used to.
We can also make adverbial comparisons using:
(not) – as + adverb + as: You walk as fast as your brother does. I can’t speak
English as well as you can.
the + comparative adverb, the + comparative adverb or adjective: The harder
I try, the worse I seem to do. The more carefully you do it, the better it will be.
Comparative adverb + and + comparative adverb: As the exams got nearer, he
worked harder and harder.
It’s happening more and more regularly.
superlative adverbs are not used very often.
We often use comparative + than ever, anyone, anything: You can do the job
better than anyone can.
Quickly, slowly, badly: adverbs of manner
She’s a slow-learner.
She learns slowly.
She’s a carful driver.
She drives carefully.
He’s a quick worker.
He works quickly.
Adjective + ly
beautiful – beautifully
careful – carefully
qick - quickly
Irregulars:
Good-well
Late-late
Hard-hard
Early-early
Fast-fast
Spelling:
y-ily - angry-angrily; happy-happily
Word order
Adverbs of manner usually go after the verb:
She drives carefully.
Or after the verb + object
You speak Spanish well.
Types of adverbs and adverbial phrases
Adverbs of manner: carefully, badly, quickly, in a friendly way: You must pick
the grass up very carefully.
Adverbs of place (location and direction); in London, to Egypt, abroad,
downstairs, over there, at my brother’s: They are staying abroad.
Adverbs of time: on Sunday, now, for a long time, eventually: I’ll see you on
Wednesday.
208
Adverbs of frequency: always, often, sometimes, twice a week, monthly, again:
I often meet him in the park.
Adverbs of degree: almost, a bit, quite, hardly, very much, only, even: I quite
like that dress.
Sentence adverbs (modifying the whole sentence or clause and often expressing
degrees of certainly and/or the speaker’s opinion): obviously, definitely, probably,
luckily, naturally: The new system is definitely an improvement an the old one.
Hopefully, I’ll be there before 10 o’clock.
Notes
Adverbs often add to the meaning of a verb. They tell us how, when, where, etc.
something was done. However, they do not always modify a verb. They can modify
adjectives, nouns, other adverbs, phrases and sentences.
When, where, why, etc. are interrogative adverbs.
The second word in a phrasal verb is often an adverb, e.g. lie down.
Adverbs of manner, place and time can sometimes be placed at the beginning of
a sentence for emphasis: Slowly, the door started to open. Last weekend, I stayed in
and did lots of work.
It is also possible to place adverbs of manner and adverbs of indefinite time
between the subject and the verb: Ben stupidly went out without locking the door. I
recently changed my job.
If there is more than one kind of adverbs in a sentence, the order is usually:
manner, place, time: She waited anxiously (manner) at the airport (place) for five
hours (time).
Adverbs of definite frequency, e.g. once, twice, three times a week, daily,
every afternoon, on Saturdays, again, are usually placed at the end of a sentence: I go
swimming twice a week. I get up at seven o’clock every morning.
But they can also go at the beginning of a sentence: On Saturdays, I do my
shopping.
Adverbs of indefinite frequency, e.g. always, usually, sometimes, often, never,
usually go after an auxiliary or verb to be and before a full verb: I am usually in bed
before midnight. I have always wanted to go there. We sometimes meet for lunch.
The adverbs frequently, generally, normally, occasionally, ordinary, sometimes,
usually, quite/very often, always/never (in the imperative), can also go at the
beginning of a sentence for special emphasis: Sometimes he agrees to help me with
my homework. Never do it again.
Adverbs of degree, e.g. quite, hardly, too, usually go before the words they
modify: quite nice, quite slowly. I quiet enjoyed it.
Sentence adverbs, e.g. clearly, generally, evidently, honestly, can go at the
beginning of a sentence:
Clearly, the situation is very serious.
Or they can go before the verb (or after the verb to be or an auxiliary):
I honestly believe that this is the best thing we can do.
Me Jameson is evidently very happy with the result.
209
Exercise 1. Write the sentences with the adverbs/adverbial phrases in
brackets in the correct position.
I’ve been working (in my office/all morning/hard).
I’ve been working hard in my office all morning.
1. He speaks to me (in the morning/never/nicely).
2. We were listening (all evening/carefully).
3. She’s been sleeping (in that chair/all afternoon/soundly).
4. He is (at this time of day/usually/at the college).
5. The postman comes (in the morning/very early).
6. I thought you spoke (in that meeting/very well/yesterday).
7. We go swimming (on Saturdays/generally/at the local pool).
8. I bought these jeans (in the sales/very cheaply/last week).
Exercise 2. What's the best word to complete the sentence?
a. hard
b. hardly
1. Ann walks ___.
9. Mei Li dresses ___.
a. heavy
b. heavily
a. beautiful b. beautifully
2. Betty is ___.
10. I like to live in a ___ house.
a. beautiful
b. beautifully
a. clean
b. cleanly
3. Jin speaks Chinese ___.
11. The soup tastes ___.
a. fluent
b, fluently
a. good
b. well
4. David arrived ___.
12. The orchestra sounds ___.
a. late
b. lately
a. bad
b. badly
5. Sue learned Japanese ___.
13. Eric likes to sing ___ songs.
a. quick
b. quickly
a. sad
b. sadly
6. Sharon usually sings ___.
14. The eagle sees ___.
a.sad
b. sadly
a. good
b. well
7. Bill understands Spanish ___.
15. Adriana ran ___.
a. good
b. well
a. fast
b. fastly
8. The women work ___.
Exercise 3. In each of the following pairs, indicate whether the highlighted
word is an adverb or an adjective:
1a. My train arrived late, as usual
Adverb/ Adjective
1b. I'm watching the late film
Adverb/ Adjective
2a. My brother loves fast cars
Adverb/ Adjective
2b. He drives too fast
Adverb/ Adjective
3a. This exercise is harder than I thought
Adverb/ Adjective
3b. I hope you'll try harder in future
Adverb/ Adjective
4a. The Times is published daily
Adverb/ Adjective
4b. The Times is a daily newspaper
Adverb/ Adjective
5a. You've just ruined my best shirt
Adverb/ Adjective
5b. Computers work best if you kick them
Adverb/ Adjective
Exercise 4. Choose the correct item.
210
1. He (correct, correctly) defined the terms. The answer sounded (correctly,
correct).
2. She (quickly, quick) adjusted the fees. She adapted (quick, quickly) to any
situation.
3. He measured the floor (exact, exactly). They proved to be (perfectly, perfect)
(exact, exactly) measurements.
4. The stillness of the tomb was (awfully, awful). The tomb was (awfully, awful)
still.
5. It was a (dangerously, dangerous) lake to swim in. The man was (dangerous,
dangerously) drunk. The gas smelled (dangerously, dangerous).
6. She performed (magnificent, magnificently). It was a (magnificent,
magnificently) beautiful performance.
7. Her voice sounds (beautifully, beautiful). She sang the song (exact, exactly) as it
was written. We heard it (perfectly, perfect).
8. He was a very (sensibly, sensible) person. He acted very (sensible, sensibly).
9. Mike wrote too (slow, slowly) on the exam. He always writes (slow, slowly).
10. Talk (softly, soft) or don't talk at all. The music played (softly, soft).
11. Andrea knows the material very (good, well). She always treats us (good,
well).
12. You must send payments (regular, regularly). We deal on a (strictly, strict) cash
basis.
13. The mechanic's tools were (well, good). The foreman said that his work was
(good, well) done.
14. She worked (careful, carefully) with the sick child. She was a very (careful,
carefully) worker.
15. He did not pass the course as (easy, easily) as he thought he would.
Exercise 5. Choose the correct word: Adjective or Adverb.
1. She studied hard / hardly last year and she passed.
2. Doris carefully / careful repaired the antique coffee cup with special glue.
3. A child cried noise / noisily in the third row of the theatre.
4. Selin speaks English good / well.
5. Mustafa asked me an easy / easily question.
6. My sister told me to speak quiet / quietly. She said she wanted to sleep.
7. The man looked at me angry / angrily.
8. The man looks angry / angrily.
9. I felt sad / sadly when I heard the news.
10. She seems cheerfully / cheerful because she is happy / happily married.
Exercise 6. Fill in the blanks with the correct word.
1. The tennis star played so ___ that he lost the match. (bad / badly)
2. Please try to behave more ___ than you did last week. (polite / politely)
3. It is very ___ to swim in this river. (dangerous / dangerously)
4. Jeff plays the violin very ___ (good / well)
211
5. Chris felt very ___ (thirsty / thirstily) after the match.
6. I love these boots. I can walk ___ (comfortably / comfortable) in them.
7. Mary is a good student. She always writes ___ (correctly / correct) sentences.
8. Gina looked very ___ (anxious / anxiously) when she were in the office.
9. Everyone danced ___ (happy / happily) in the party.
10. He slept ___ (lazily / lazy) all summer.
Exercise 7. Use the correct form of the words in parentheses to fill in the
blanks. (You don’t need to change all the words.)
Yesterday I did something wrong and I feel ___ (terribly) today. Our teacher
was in the classroom and I was ___ (lately) as usual. The teacher was writing
something on the board, so without knocking the door I opened it ___ (slow) and
entered the room ___ (quietly). When my teacher turned round, she saw me and
looked at my face ___ (angry). “She is going to shout at me ___ (loud)” I thought. I
was really embarrassed. Then, the teacher started to speak. Her voice was very ___
(soft). She spoke to me ___ (polite) and said: “Please try to be in the class before we
start”. I was so embarrassed that I couldn’t look into her eyes. I stood up ___ (slow)
and walked to her ___ (hesitant). “I’m sorry, I’ll be more careful next time.” I said in
a ___ (quietly) way. She didn’t say anything, just looked into my eyes and smiled ___
(happy).
Exercise 8. Fill in an adverb to complete the sentences below.
1. I think you’re working too hard. You need a holiday.
2. She sang beautifully.
3. You speak German ___ - just like a German.
4. Please talk ___. I don’t want the baby to wake up.
5. She had no problems at all with the exam. She passed it ___.
6. Don’t drive so ___. It’s dangerous.
7. I understood what to do because she explained everything very ___.
8. Please carry the glasses ___. They were very expensive.
Exercise 9. Rewrite the sentences using a verb and an adverb.
1. They’re slow workers. – They work slowly.
2. He’s a dangerous driver. – He drives dangerously.
3. She’s a careful writer.
4. I’m a loud singer.
5. She’s a fast swimmer.
6. He’s a bad actor.
7. Jill’s a beautiful painter.
Exercise 10. Circle the correct word (adjective or adverb).
1. This music is too loud/loudly. We can’t talk.
2. She played bad/badly and she lost the game.
3. We waited patient/patiently for the letter but it never came.
212
4. Please don’t be angry/angrily with him.
5. She asks intelligent/intelligently questions.
6. The children are playing together very nice/nicely today.
7. She’s a very warm/warmly person and everyone likes her.
8. She surprised me when she opened the door sudden/suddenly.
9. You speak English very good/well.
10. It’s dangerous/dangerously to swim in the sea here.
11. He usually speaks quiet/quietly.
12. I always try to do things correct/correctly.
13. They're a happy/happily family.
14. Why do you walk so quick/quickly?
15. Our new neighbours are a bit noisy/noisily.
Exercise 11. Select the correct form in the following sentences.
1. Of the four dresses, I like the red one (better/best). 2. Phil is the
(happier/happiest) person that we know. 3. Pat's car is (faster/fastest) than Dan's. 4.
This the (creamier/creamiest) ice cream I have had in a long time. 5. This poster is
(colourfuler/more colourful) than the one in the hall. 6. Does Fred feel (weller/better)
today than he did yesterday? 7. This vegetable soup tastes very (good/well). 8. While
trying to balance the baskets on her head, the woman walked (awkwarder/more
awkwardly) than her daughter. 9. Jane is the (less/least) athletic of all the women. 10.
My cat is the (prettier/prettiest) of the two. 11. This summary is (the better/the best)
of the pair. 12. Your heritage is different (from/than) mine. 13. This painting is (less
impressive /least impressive) than the one in the other gallery. 14. The colder the
weather gets (sicker/the sicker) I feel. 15. No sooner had he received the letter
(when/than) he called Maria.16. A mink coat costs (twice more than/twice as much
as) a sable coat. 17. Jim has as (little/few) opportunities to play tennis as I. 18. That
recipe calls for (many/much) more sugar than mine does. 19. The museum is the
(farther/farthest) away of the three buildings. 20. George Washington is
(famouser/more famous) than John Jay.
PASSIVE VOICE
The Passive Voice is used in English when the person or thing that is receiving the
action is more important than the person or thing that is performing the action.
The structure of a sentence in the passive is as follows:
Object + To Be + Past Participle
Look at the structure of the following sentences in the active and the passive voice
to understand the difference in structure.
I sent Christmas cards to all my friends. (Active) - Christmas cards were sent to all
my friends. (Passive)
213
In these examples, you can see it is the action/result that is the most important
factor in the passive sentences.
When to use the Passive Voice
1. It is used when the person/thing performing the action is unimportant or
unknown.
e.g. Our car was stolen last night.
2. It is used when it is obvious who/what is performing the action.
e.g. Cameron was sacked last week.
3. It is used to describe factual information, especially when describing a process.
e.g. The lasagna is baked in an oven for 35 minutes at 250 degrees Celsius.
4. It is used in news reports and to give instructions.
e.g. Five people were arrested at a nightclub last night.
Present Simple
Past Simple
Future Simple
Letters are written every The letter was written
The letter will be
yesterday
day
written tomorrow
Am, is, are + past participle (- Was, were + past participle (-ed)
Will (shall) be + past
ed)
participle (-ed)
Present Continuous
Past Continuous
The letter is being The letter was being
written now
written at 5 o'clock yesterday
Am, is, are + being +
Was, were + being +
past participle (-ed)
past participle (-ed)
Present Perfect
Past Perfect
Future Perfect
The letter has already The letter had been
The letter will have
been written
written by 5 o'clock been written by 5
Have, has + been + past yesterday
o'clock tomorrow
Had + been + past participle (- Will + have + been + past
participle (-ed)
ed)
participle (-ed)
1. Shevchenko wrote this poem.
2. Pupils do a lot of exercises at the lessons.
3. They showed this film on Sunday.
4. They sell milk in this shop.
5. I have translated the whole text.
6. They broke the window last week.
7. By 6 o'clock they had finished the work.
8. They have forgotten the story.
9. By the middle of autumn we had planted all the trees.
Exercise 1. Make the sentences Passive:
1. Somebody has cleaned the kitchen. - The kitchen has been cleaned.
2. Somebody has watered the plants. _____________________
3. Somebody has taken the money. _______________________
4. Somebody has bought the presents. ______________________
5. Somebody has finished the report. ______________________
214
6. Somebody has killed the President. _______________________
7. Somebody has repaired the road. ______________________
8. Somebody has elected that man. ______________________
9. Somebody has learned lessons. _______________________
10. Somebody has fired John. _________________________
Exercise 2. Change the sentences into the Passive.
1. The police shouldn't allow people to park there.
2. They are watching my house.
3. The examiner will read the passage three times.
4. Candidates may not use dictionaries.
5. You need not type this letter
6. You mustn't move this man; he is too ill. You'll have to leave him here.
7. They searched his house and found a number of stolen articles.
8. Nobody has used this room for ages.
9. They took him for a Frenchman, his French was so good.
10. You should have taken those books back to the library.
11. Someone broke into his house and stole a lot of his things.
12. They handed round coffee and biscuits.
Exercise 3. Put the verbs into the Passive voice.
1. They haven't stamped the letter.
2. They didn't pay me for the work; they expected me to do it for nothing.
3. She didn't introduce me to her mother.
4. They threw away the rubbish.
5. A Japanese firm makes these television sets.
6. An earthquake destroyed the town.
7. A machine could do this much more easily.
8. Visitors must leave umbrellas and sticks in the cloakroom.
9. We can't repair your clock.
10. We cannot exchange articles which customers have bought during the sale.
Exercise 4. Put the transitive verbs into the Passive voice.
1. The milkman brings the milk to my door but the postman leaves the letters in the
hall.
2. People steal things from supermarkets every day; someone stole twenty bottles
of whisky from this one last week.
3. Normally men sweep this street every day, but nobody swept it last week.
4. The postman clears this box three time a day. He last cleared it at 2.30.
5. Someone turned on a light in the hall and opened the door.
6. Women clean this office in the evening after the staff has left; they clean the
upstairs offices between seven and eight in the morning.
7. Someone left this purse in a classroom yesterday; the cleaner found it.
215
8. We build well over 1,000 new houses a year. Last year we built 1,500.
9. We serve hot meals till 10.30, and guests can order coffee and sandwiches up to
11.30.
10. An ambulance took the sick man to hospital.
11. They are repairing my piano at the moment.
12. Passengers shouldn't throw away their tickets as inspectors may check these
during the journey.
Exercise 5. Put the following into the Passive Voice.
1. You should open the wine about three hours before you use it.
2. Previous climbers had cut steps in the ice.
3. Somebody had cleaned my shoes and brushed my suit.
4. We use this room only on special occasions.
5. You must not hammer nails into the walls without permission.
6. In some districts farmers use pigs to find truffles.
7. Someone switched on a light and opened the door.
8. Somebody had slashed the picture with a knife.
9. They are pulling down the old theatre.
10. Someone will serve refreshments.
11. People must not leave bicycles in the hall.
12. Someone has already told him to report for duty at six.
13. They rang the church bells as a flood warning.
14. The organizers will exhibit the paintings till the end of the month.
15. The judge gave him two weeks in which to pay the fine.
Exercise 6. Put the following into the Passive.
They gave her a clock. - She was given a clock.
They advised employing part-time workers. - They advised that part-time workers
should be employed.
1. They feed the seals at the zoo twice a day.
2. Who wrote it?
3. Compare clothes which we have washed with clothes which any other laundry
has washed.
4. He expected us to offer him the job.
5. They showed her the easiest way to do it.
6. Lightning struck the old oak.
7. The author has written a special edition for children.
8. Judges used to carry sweet herbs as a protection against jail-fever.
9. What did he write it with? ~ He wrote it with a matchstick dipped in blood.
10. An uneasy silence succeeded the shot.
11. Did the idea interest you?
12. The lawyer gave him the details of his uncle's will.
13. Most people opposed this.
14. Students are doing a lot of the work.
216
15. The Prime Minister was to have opened the dry dock.
Exercise 7. Turn the following sentences into the Active voice.
School notice: This door must be kept shut. - Students must keep this door shut.
1. Why don't you have your eyes tested?
2. This speed limit is to be introduced gradually.
3. The runways are being lengthened at all the main airports.
4. It is now 6 a.m. and at most of the hospitals in the country patients are being
wakened with cups of tea.
5. Byron is said to have lived on vinegar and potatoes.
6. By tradition, any sturgeon that is caught by British ships must be offered to the
Queen.
7. This notice has been altered.
8. The damaged ship was being towed into harbour when the towline broke.
9. Have a lift put in and then you won't have to climb up all these stairs.
10. Someone will have to be found to take her place.
11. He was made to surrender his passport.
12. This rumour must have been started by our opponents.
13. My paintings are to be exhibited for the first time by New Arts Gallery.
14. This scientific theory has now been proved to be false.
15. The house where the dead man was found is being guarded by the police to
prevent it from being entered and the evidence interfered with.
16. Why wasn't the car either locked or put into the garage?
17. Your money could be put to good use instead of being left idle in the bank.
Exercise 8. Rewrite these sentences, putting the verbs in the Passive. We clean
the garages every day. – The garages are cleaned every day.
1. Someone has given him a lot of money. – He has been given a lot of money.
2. The police arrested two hundred people.
3. We check every car engine thoroughly.
4. We export this computer to seventy different countries.
5. They have cancelled the meeting.
6. We opened the factory at nine o’clock.
7. They send two million books to America every year.
8. We have invited all the students in the school.
9. We have told him not to be late again.
10. They posted all the letters yesterday.
11. The machine wraps the bread automatically.
12. They paid me a lot of money to do the job.
13. Fortunately, they didn’t damage the machinery.
14. We send the newspapers to Scotland by train.
217
MODAL VERBS
Modal verbs are auxiliary verbs which lack infinitive and participle forms. Other
verbs with similar meaning are used in tenses where those forms are necessary.
We use the modal verbs can, may, must in the English language to express various
meanings - ability, possibility, permission, attitudes, opinions, etc.
Modal (auxiliary) verb CAN
1. Can is used to describe the ability to do something.
I can swim very well.
Can he speak English fluently? - No, he can't.
We cannot sing at all!
2. Can expresses the possibility to do something.
We can go to the seaside at last. Our holidays start next week.
3. We use can to say that something is probable.
It can be John. He has blond hair and he is wearing glasses.
4. Can expresses the permission to do something.
Why not? You can marry her. She is a nice girl.
Modal (auxiliary) verb MAY
1. May is used for permissions.
You may borrow my car. I won't need it.
May I smoke here? - No, you can't, I'm sorry.
2. May is used for expressing probability or prediction.
They may call tomorrow. I hope so.
The main difference between may and can is in style. May is more formal than can.
Can is typical of spoken English.
3. The opposite of may is must not or may not.
May I smoke here?
- You mustn't smoke here. (strong prohibition)
- You may not smoke here. (more polite, very formal)
- You can't smoke here. (informal spoken English)
Modal (auxiliary) verb MUST
1. Must is used for strong obligations. It is personal, because it shows the speaker's
opinion or will.
I must clean my teeth. I want to be healthy.
You must go there. And do it right now!
2. Must expresses strong recommendation.
You must see it. It's the best film I've ever seen.
3. We use must to express certainty of the speaker.
They must be at school by now. It's already 9 o'clock. 4. The opposite of must is
need not.
Mum, must I wash up? - No, you needn't. I've already done it.
Must not has a different meaning. It is used to express prohibition that involves the
speaker's will.
218
We mustn't come late today. Or the teacher will be very angry.
He mustn't enter this room. It is dangerous.
CAN / BE ABLE TO
Can/be able to express possibility and ability.
Can/could have no infinitive or participle forms. So we use be able to in tenses
where an infinitive or “perfect” form is required.
Ask the policeman over there. He should be able to help you.
Will I be able to travel to different planets in the future?
CAN / BE ALLOWED TO
Can/ be allowed to express permission. Be allowed to – a passive structure – is
used when we talk about permission in tenses where the infinitive or a ‘perfect form”
is required. Not to be allowed to is related to prohibition.
In your opinion, will people be allowed to travel to any foreign country without a
visa in the future? You’re not allowed to smoke in this restaurant.
MUST / HAVE TO
We use must/have to when we want to express obligation to do something. Have to
can be used in any tense. It is always used in tenses where the infinitive or the
participle are necessary. In British English must is related to the speaker’s feelings of
obligation and have to is used to express obligations that come from outside.
I must lose weight. We have to ask her if she needs anything. I couldn’t see you
yesterday. I had to work late. Have you ever had to phone your doctor late night?
SHOULD /OUGHT TO
Both modals are used to give advice or to express what is expected from
someone.
In British English ought to is slightly stronger.
He ought to be punished.
You ought not to work so hard.
We should be at the airport before 6 a.m.
BE SUPPOSED TO
Be supposed to (as well as should) is used to talk about what people have the
responsibility to do.
The negative form – not to be supposed to is related to prohibition.
Students are supposed to be at school at 8:15 am.
You’re not supposed to park here.
Could, would, might
+ infinitive
Could= ability or possibility in the present or future:
I could do it if you wanted me to.
Would= conditional intention in the present or future:
I would do it if I were able to.
Might= possibility in the present or future: I might do it.
+ perfect infinitive
Could = ability or possibility in the past:
He could have gone early, but he didn’t.
219
Would = intention in the past:
He would have gone early if they had let him.
Might = possibility in the past:
He might have gone early – I don’t know.
Indirect speech:
Can-could: We knew that he could be annoying.
Will-would: We knew that he would be annoying
May/might – might: we knew that he might be annoying.
Requests:
Could you open the door for me, please?
Would you open the door for me, please?
Offers - Could I do it for you?
Exercise 1. Complete the following class rules with must or mustn’t.
-You…………………. be quiet when someone else is speaking.
-You……………………..listen to the teacher.
-You…………………….arrive in class on time.
-You…………………….eat in class.
-You………………….…use a telephone in class.
-You…………………....answer the teacher’s questions.
-You…………………….bring your books to class.
-You…………………….do homework.
Exercise 2. Kay and Evelyn are talking about the future:
K: Do you think I can / I’ll be able to speak many languages when I’m 18?
E: I think you’re supposed to /you can study hard to learn many foreign
languages. You should / must start studying other languages now. Anyway, do you
think we’ll be allowed to/we’ll have to fly to other planets when we’re older?
K: I’m sure we will. When we’re 18 we’re supposed to / we’ll be allowed to live
on our own. By the way, I have to go now.
E: Can/Should you help me with my homework?
Exercise 3. Gina and Kay’s parents, Jake and Ellen went out for lunch:
E: You’re allowed to/ must work flexible hours, aren’t you?
J: Yes, but I’m able/ supposed to be at work between 10 am. and 3 pm. You’re a
doctor too, We must/can’t be available almost 24 hours a day.
E: But I don’t have to/mustn’t take work home like you do. You ought to/can’t give
more attention to our daughters.
J: I was thinking about our summer holidays. You should /’re able to start
buying new luggage and summer clothes.
E: Fantastic! We can/ ‘re supposed to finally have fun together as a happy
family.
Exercise 4. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the structures
220
below. CAN / MUST / SHOULD / HAVE TO / BE ALLOWED TO
1. I _____ finish the report yesterday as my boss asked me to do so.
2. You _____ come back in the afternoon. All the lessons have been cancelled.
3. I _____ take a break! I´ve been working on this project for too long.
4. _____ you speak French when you were 12?
5. You _____ have a ticket when you travel on a bus.
6. I don ´t think Tom _____ accept that offer. This one is much better.
7. Yesterday I _____ go to work because it was Saturday.
8. _____ you lend me your coursebook for a while, please?
10. Peter _____ help with the housework every day.
11. We _____ play computer games only an hour a day when we were children.
Exercise 5. Underline the correct structure to complete the second sentence so
that it has the same meaning as the first one.
1. I advise you to try it again.
You should / ´re allowed to try it again.
2. Do you think I could use your dictionary?
May I/ Do I have to use your dictionary?
3. We are forbidden to leave our car here.
We don´t have to / mustn´t leave our car here.
4. I recommend this film to you. It´s fantastic.
You have to / must see this film. It´s fantastic.
5. If I were you, I wouldn´t go there.
You shouldn´t / don´t have to go there.
6. His parents don´t let him go out late at night.
He isn´t able to / isn´t allowed to go out late at night.
7. I was very good at chess when I was younger.
I could / had to play chess very well when I was younger.
8. Diving isn´t possible at this holiday resort.
You shouldn´t / can´t dive at this holiday resort.
9. It´s not necessary to come too early tomorrow.
You don´t have to / mustn´t come too early tomorrow.
10. Is it OK if I turn on the heating?
Can / Would I turn on the heating?
Exercise 6. Use must not or need not to fill the spaces.
1. You ___ ring the bell; I have a key.
2. Notice in cinema: Exit doors ___ be locked during performances.
3. You ___ drink this: it is poison.
4. We ___ drive fast; we have plenty of time.
5. You ___ drive fast; there is a speed limit here.
6. Candidates ___ bring books into the examination room.
7. You ___ write to him for he will be here tomorrow.
221
8. We ___ make any noise or we'll wake the baby.
9. You ___ bring an umbrella. It isn't going to rain.
10. You ___ do all the exercise. Ten sentences will be enough.
11. We ___ reheat the pie. We can eat it cold.
12. Mother to child: You ___ tell lies.
13. You ___ turn on the light; I can see quite well.
14. You ___ strike a match; the room is full of gas.
15. You ___ talk to other candidates during the exam.
16. We ___ make any more sandwiches; we have plenty now.
17. You ___ put salt in any of his dishes. Salt is very bad for him.
18. You ___ take anything out of a shop without paying for it.
19. You ___ carry that parcel home yourself; the shop will send it.
20. You ___ clean the windows. The window-cleaner is coming tomorrow.
Exercise 7. Complete the sentences with the correct words: 'must' or 'have to'.
1. My boss needs this report urgently. I _______ finish it now.
2. "You ____ arrive on time every morning" said the shopkeeper to the new trainee.
3. Julie __________ go to work on foot. The buses are on strike. .
4. Secretaries _____ answer the phone. That's part of their job.
5. "You ________ do your homework" said the teacher.
6. "We______ invite our neighbours for dinner one day" said my husband.
7. David ____ leave home at 7.30 a.m. in order to get to the office at 9 a.m.
8. "I _______ hurry or I'll miss my flight!"
9. Employees ____ attend all personnel meetings - it's written in their contracts.
10. "I ________ call my mother - it's her birthday today."
Exercise 8. Circle the correct word.
1. This is a no-smoking area. You (mustn’t/won’t) smoke here.
2. (Can/Ought) I help you?
3. It’s very cold. You (should/will) wear a coat.
4. I can go home by train. You (needn’t/couldn’t) wait for me.
5. It’s very cloudy. It (might/can) rain.
6. (Could/Must) you help me, please?
7. It’s late. We (ought to/shall) go.
8. It’s eight o’clock. He (will/dare) be here soon.
9. (Would/Shall) I open the door for you?
10. She’s busy at the moment. She (must/may) be late.
Exercise 9. Put the correct form of must or have to in these sentences.
1. I had to leave the party early last night – I wasn’t very well.
2. I’m sorry, you mustn’t smoke in here.
3. The children are happy because they __ do any homework today.
4. You ___ get up early tomorrow if you want to catch the bus.
5. ___ (you) have a visa to come here?
222
6. It was a very bad accident. You ___ be more careful in future.
7. He’s been ill. He ___ stay in bed since last month.
8. I’ve told the children that they ___ come home before ten on Saturday nights.
9. ___ (you) do military service in your country when you were young?
10. It was a lovely holiday. We ___ do anything.
11. They were very rude. They ___ apologize the next day.
12. The teacher told us that we ___ work harder.
13. You ___ get a passport before you go abroad next month.
14. We ___ come back by boat because the airport was closed by fog.
15. You ___ borrow my books without asking.
Exercise 10. Put should, ought to, must or have to in the sentences below, using
negatives or questions if necessary. Sometimes more than one answer is possible,
but you should write one only.
1. They should/ought to be arriving in a few hours.
2. We have to go home at twelve because my mother wants the car.
3. They insisted that we ___ have a meal.
4. There are no trains today, so we ___ to go by car.
5. I think you __ tell your parents you’re going to be late. They’ll be worried.
6. You ___ never do that again!
7. The manger suggested that we __ try to find another hotel.
8. You ___ see that film if you get the chance.
9. According to our information, the President ___ be re-elected.
10. Do you think we ___ ask before we borrow the car?
11. You ___ come if you don’t want to.
12. You ___ be smoking at your age.
13. Do you think I __ tell the teacher what happened?
14. My boss told me that I ___ be late.
Exercise 11. Write the correct form of need to complete these sentences.
1. The teacher says we needn’t go to school tomorrow. (negative)
2. Do I need to have a license to drive a car in this country? (question)
3. I’ve have told her that she ___ to work harder. (positive)
4. We -__ take any equipment – the school provides it. (negative)
5. ___ I ___ phone you before I come to see you? (question)
6. My mother says I ___ do the washing-up today. (negative)
7. You ___ have more experience before you apply for this job. (positive)
8. You can go home now, you ___ stay any longer. (negative)
9. You ___ work here to be able to use the tennis court. (negative)
10. You ___ say any more: I agree with you. (negative)
Exercise 12. Put could, would or might in the correct form.
1. I might have seen Janice at the party last night. What does she look like?
2. I’m sure I (not) wouldn’t have done it if I hadn’t been so angry.
223
3. We thought that he could/would/might be disappointed.
4. I ___ give it to her tomorrow.
5. The train __ be an hour or two late.
6. Put some food in your bag – the journey ___ take hours.
7. She told me that the children ___ be very noisy in the evening.
8. I thought that the shop ___ be closed by seven o’clock.
9. ___ you work if you weren’t paid for it?
10. We didn’t know what the noise was – it __ been anything.
11. I ___ spoken to your boss if I’d seen her.
12. There ___ be several reasons for the accident.
13. By half-past eight I knew that she (not) ___ come.
14. ___ you hold my coat for a minute?
15. Be careful when you go abroad – anything __ happen.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES
(„if” sentences)
There are 4 main types of if sentences in English, often called conditional
sentences.
These sentences are in two halves (clauses):
the if part (if clause)
the other part where you can use words such as can, will, may, might, could
and would (main clause)
ZERO CONDITIONAL is a structure used for talking about general truths -things which always happen under certain conditions (note that most zero conditional
sentences will mean the same thing if "when" is used instead of "if"). The zero
conditional is used to talk about things which are always true -- scientific facts,
general truths, and so on.
if clause
main clause
If + Present Simple
Present Simple
If you heat the water to 100 degrees,
it boils.
1st CONDITIONAL is a structure used for talking about possibilities in the
present or in the future. The first conditional is used to talk about things which are
possible in the present or the future -- things which may happen.
if clause
main clause
If + Present Simple
Future Simple, can, may
If you study hard,
you will pass the test.
2nd CONDITIONAL is a structure used for talking about unreal situations in the
224
present or in the future. The second conditional is used to talk about things which are
unreal (not true or not possible) in the present or the future -- things which don't or
won't happen.
if clause
main clause
If + Past Simple
would, could, might
If I had a million dollars,
I would buy a big house.
3rd CONDITIONAL is a structure used for talking about unreal situations in the
past. The third conditional is used to talk about things which DID NOT HAPPEN in
the past. If your native language does not have a similar construction, you may find
this a little strange, but it can be very useful. It is often used to express criticism or
regret.
if clause
main clause
If + Past Perfect
would/could/might have +
Past Participle
If I had studied
I would have passed the I failed the exam, because I
harder,
exam.
didn’t study hard enough
Conditionals
Meaning
TYPE
IF-CLAUSE
Result
Example
Clause
True in the Zero
Simple
Simple
If you add two and
present/future
present
present
two, you get four.
Will + bare
If my son gets
First
Pesent tense
infinitive
worse tonight, I’ll
(present
take hime to hospital.
simple, present
continuous,
present perfect)
Untrue in the Secon Past Simple or Would + bare
If I had a lot of
present/future
d
Past Continuous infinitive
money, I’d buy a big
house by the sea.
Would+have
If he’d arrived on
Untrue in the Third
Past perfect
time, we could have
past
simple o past +V3
caught the plane.
perfect
continuous
Would
+
If I had taken a
Untrue in the Mixed
Past Perfect
painkiller, I would be
past and its
Simple o Past bare infinitive
better now.
result
Perfect
Continuous
Would+have If she had enough
Mix
Past Simple
Untrue in the
money, she could
or
past +V3
present and its ed
have done this trip to
Continuous
past result
Paris.
225
If the "if" clause comes first, a comma is usually used. If the "if" clause comes
second, there is no need for a comma –
Water boils if you heat it to 100 degrees. You will pass the test if you study hard. I
would buy a big house if I had a million dollars. I would have passed the exam if I
had studied harder.
Exercise 1. Make Zero Conditional sentences, use cues.
Jane / eat / too much chocolate / she /get / sick
You / not / eat / you / die
You / heat / ice / it / melts
Make 1st Conditional sentences, put the verbs in brackets in correct form.
If you _________________ (not study), you _____________ (fail) the test.
I _____________ (lend) you my umbrella if you _____________ (need) it.
If I ________________ (be late), I _______________ (call) you.
Write 2nd Conditional sentences, put the verbs in brackets in correct form.
If you ______ (leave) your job, you ______ (travel) around the world.
If you _______ (be) nicer to him, he _______(lend) you the money
It ______(be) nice if the rain ______(stop)!
Write 3rd Conditional sentences, put the verbs in brackets in correct order.
He crashed his car, because he fell asleep while driving.
If he _____ (fall) asleep while driving, he _____ (crash) his car.
I lost my job because I was late for work.
I _____ (loose) my job if I ______ (be) late for work.
We couldn't go to the concert, because we didn't have enough money.
If we ____ (have) enough money, we ____ (go) to the concert.
Exercise 2. Put the verb in brackets in correct form.
If I __________ (be) you, I wouldn’t risk.
If they had waited another month, they could probably ______ (get)a better price
for their house.
It's quite simple really. When it's cold, water _________ (freeze).
If he decides to accept that job, he ______ (regret) it for the rest of his life.
If he hadn't been driving so fast, he ______ (hit) the motorcyclist.
If he ___________ (be) more careful, he would have spotted the mistake.
If she goes on passing her exams, ____ (be) qualified to practise as a lawyer.
If I pay you twice as much, will you ______ (able) to finish by Tuesday?
If only I'd invested in that company, I _____ (become) a millionaire by now.
Exercise 3. Complete the following sentences with the correct form of the verb
in brackets.
1. If Peter _____ (have) more money, he _____ (buy) a new car.
2. What _________ (you do) if you __________ (see) an accident?
3. Where _________ (you live) if you ___________ (have) a choice?
226
4. If Caroline ____ (arrive) late for a meeting, her boss ____ (be) angry.
5. If his parents ____ (come) to visit him, John ____ (bring) them to the theatre.
6. Where _____ (you go) if you ______ (can take) a week's holiday?
7. If Julie _____ (speak) better English, she ____ (find) a better job.
8. If Paul's boss _____ (invite) him to lunch, he ______ (accept).
9. If I ______ (lose) my wallet, I _______ (report) it to the police.
10. What _________ (happen) if you ______ (miss) your flight?
TYPES 0, I, II:
1. If I ___ (meet) a ghost, I ___(be) frightened.
2. If I ___ (have) a noisy party in my flat, I ___ (not be) annoyed.
3. If Peter ___ (be) shipwrecked on a desert island, he ___ (be) unhappy.
4. If Jill's firm goes bankrupt, he ___ (not have) money.
5. If I ___ (be) you, I ___ (not throw) that stone to that child.
6. What ___ you ___ (do) if you had a penfriend in China?
7. If you ___ (see) a lightning in the sky, you ___ (hear) a thunder.
8. If you _____ (shout) loudly in a cave, you ___ (hear) echo.
9. I ______ (go) to see the Big Ben, if I ___ (travel) to London.
TYPE II:
1. If I ___ (have) any money, I'd give you some.
2. If I had to go to hospital, I __ ___ (not go) to this one.
3. I wouldn't mind having children if we ___ (live) in the country.
4. What ___ you ___ (do) if you suddenly ___ (win) half a million pounds?
5. I could help you if you _ ___ (trust) me more.
6. If I ___ (be) you, I ___ (not worry) about going to university.
7. Where ___ you ___ (like) to live if you ___ (not live) in Paris?
8. If you ___ (sell) more products, you _____ _ (earn) more money.
9. Your parents ___ (be) a lot happier if you ___ (phone) them more often.
10.The children ___ (be) better swimmers if they ___ (go) swimming more
frequently.
TYPE III:
1. If you ___ (ask) me for more tickets I ___ (buy) some for you.
2. I ___ (not come) to this school if I ___ (know) what it was like.
3. I ___ (not go out) yesterday if you ___ (ask) me not to.
4. I ___ (visit) you in hospital if I ___ (know) you were there.
5. She ___ (not marry) him if she ___ (know) what he was like.
6. If John ___ (pass) the examination, he ___ (go) to Art College in
London.
7. If they ___ (ask) me I ___ (lend) them my car.
8. I wouldn't have been so upset if July _____ (write) to me earlier.
9. We ___ (miss) the train if we ___ (be) two minutes later.
10. Unless they ___ (arrive) on time, the shop ___ (close) immediately.
227
Exercise 4. Complete the sentences.
1. If we don't hurry, we ___ (be) late.
2. If I see her, I ___ (give) her your message.
3. If you're hungry, I ___ (make) you a sandwich.
4. If he ___ (not come) to the party, I will be very upset
5. If she ___ (go) to Paris, she'll send me a postcard.
6. If we ___, ___ (not be) busy, we'll come with you.
7. If he does that again, dad ___ (be) very angry.
8. If he ___ (not finish) his homework, he won't go out.
9. If he ___ (come), I'll talk to him.
10 . If she ___ (hurry), she won't be late.
Exercise 5. Complete the following sentences with the correct form of the verb
in brackets.
1. If John had come to the football, he (like) it.
2. I'll do it if he (ask) me.
3. I wouldn't have been so upset if Judy (write) to me earlier.
4. If we offered him more money, (he stay) here?
5. If she's gone out, we (ask) Peter to do it for us.
6. I (look after) the children if you carry the suitcases.
7. We would have missed the train if we (be) 2 minutes later.
8. It's a pity Terry wasn't at the party. He (love) it.
9. Phone the police if you (see) anything strange.
10. I'm going to scream if you (not stop) playing that guitar.
11. The children always (get) frightened if they watch horror films.
12. (you let me know) what happens if I don't get to the meeting?
13. I don't know what I'd do if John (be) in an accident.
14. There (be) trouble if they try to stop him leaving.
15. Can I take the typewriter if you (finish) with it?
16. It's a pity David isn't here. He (be) very amused.
17. Shout if you (see) anything unusual.
18. If you (look after) the car, if will never break down.
19. If you (look after) the car, it wouldn't break down so much.
20. If you (look after) the car, we'd be able to sell it now.
Exercise 6. Complete the sentences about these situations.
1. You went out for a walk without an umbrella. It rained, you got very wet and
then you caught a cold.
a) If I _______(take) an umbrella with me, I _________(not get) wet.
b) If I _______(know) it was going to rain, I ________(not go) out.
c) If I _______(not go) out, I _________(not catch) a cold.
2. You went to bed late last night. This morning you woke up late. Then you
missed your bus and you were late for work.
a) I ___(not wake up) late this morning if I ___(not go) to bed late last night.
228
b) If ________(not wake up) late, I _____(not miss) my bus.
c) If I ____(not miss) my bus, I _____(not be) late for work.
Exercise 7. There are mistakes in some of these sentences. Find the mistakes
and correct them.
1. Janet will be disappointed if she'll fail the exam.
2. If Peter had been more careful, he wouldn't break the camera.
3. You can use my car tomorrow if I don't need it.
4. If I won't have much time, I usually have a sandwich for lunch.
5. If I were you, I won't lend John any money.
6. If the bus doesn't come soon, I'll walk home.
7. I'd be happier if I don't have to work so hard.
Exercise 8. Put the correct verb tense in these conditional clauses.
1. If he (not take) his gloves off, he (not get) frost bitten, the doctor said.
2. I'll look for your notebook. If I (find) it, I (give) you a ring.
3. I'm not going to give her a diamond. If I (give) her one, she (sell) it.
4. If you (see) Tom, (tell) him to come.
5. It's a pity he never patented his invention. If he (patent) it, he (make) a lot of
money.
6. If he (work) all night he (finish) it, but he has no intention of that.
7. Unless Tom (take) his library book tomorrow, he (have) to pay a fine.
8. If the earth suddenly (stop) spinning, we all (fly) off it.
9. A university degree is very useful. If I (have) one I (not be) sitting in this office.
Exercise 9. Put the verb into the correct form and write which conditional it
is.
1. If you ___ (pay) to much income tax, you ___ (not be) able to afford holidays
abroad this year.
2. If only I ___ (have) money, I ___ (lend) you some.
3. If you ___ (not eat) healthy food, you ___ (get) sick.
4. If I ___ (get) up early in the morning, I usually ___ (go) swimming.
5. The view was wonderful. If I ___ (have) a camera, I ___ (take) some pictures.
6. If the economy ___ (be) healthy, there ___ (be) enough jobs for everyone.
7. What ___ you ___ (do), if you ___ (be) rich?
8. I had not seen you on the street yesterday! If only I ___ (see) you, I ___ (say)
hello!
9. This is too expensive! If this house ___ (be) cheaper, we ___ (buy) it.
10. If I ___ (see) John, I ___ (tell) him to e-mail you.
11. Unfortunately, I am very busy. If I ___ (have) more time, I ___ (help) you with
your homework.
12. If I ___ (be) Prime Minister, I ___ (reduce) taxes.
13. If I ___ (be) you, I ___ (go) to bed now. You look awful!
14. I really don’t know what I ___ (do) if I ___ (win) the lottery.
229
15. I wish I ___ (be) better at Maths!
16. I ___ (not leave) unless he ___ (ask) me to.
15. I ___ (go) on a blind date if I ___ (be) desperate.
Exercise 10. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tenses.
1. If I see him I (give) him a lift.
2. The table will collapse if you (stand) on it.
3. If he (eat) all that he will be ill.
4. If I find your passport I (telephone) you at once.
5. The police (arrest) him if they catch him.
6. If he (read) in bad light he will ruin his eyes.
7. Someone (steal) your car if you leave it unlocked.
8. What will happen if my parachute (not open)?
9. If he (wash) my car I'll give him 10.
10. If she (need) a radio she can borrow mine.
11. If you (not go) away I'll send for the police.
12. I'll be very angry if he (make) any more mistakes.
13. If he (be) late we'll go without him.
14. She will be absolutely furious if she (hear) about this.
15. If you put on the kettle I (make) the tea.
16. If you give my dog a bone he (bury) it at once.
17. If we leave the car here it (not be) in anybody's way.
18. He'll be late for the train if he (not start) at once.
19. If you come late they (not let) you in.
20. If he (go) on telling lies nobody will believe a word he says.
Exercise 11. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tenses.
1. If I had a typewriter I (type) it myself.
2. If I (know) his address I'd give it to you.
3. He (look) a lot better if he shaved more often.
4. If you (play) for lower stakes you wouldn't lose so much.
5. If he worked more slowly he (not make) so many mistakes.
6. I shouldn't drink that wine if I (be) you.
7. More tourists would come to this country if it (have) a better climate.
8. If I were sent to prison you (visit) me?
9. If someone (give) you a helicopter what would you do with it?
10. I (buy) shares in that company if I had some money.
11. If he (clean) his windscreen he'd be able to see where he was going.
12. If you drove your car into the river you (be able) to get out?
13. If you (not belong) to a union you couldn't get a job.
14. If I (win) a big prize in a lottery I'd give up my job.
15. What you (do) if you found a burglar in your house?
16. I could tell you what this means if I (know) Greek.
17. If everybody (give) 1 we would have enough.
230
18. He might get fat if he (stop) smoking.
19. If he knew that it was dangerous he (not come).
20. If you (see) someone drowning what would you do?
Exercise 12. Put the verbs in brackets into the correct tenses.
1. If I had known that you were in hospital I (visit) you.
2. The ground was very soft. But for that, my horse (win).
3. If you (arrive) ten minutes earlier you would have got a seat.
4. You would have seen my garden at its best if you (be) here last week.
5. But for his quickness I (be) killed.
6. I shouldn't have believed it if I (not see) it with my own eyes.
7. If he had slipped he (fall) 500 metres.
8. If he had asked you, you (accept)?
9. If I (had) a map 1 would have been all right.
10. If I (know) that you were coming I'd have baked a cake.
11. I (offer) to help him if I had realized that he was ill.
12. If you had left that wasp alone it (not sting) you.
13. If I (realize) what a bad driver you were I wouldn't have come with you.
14. If I had realized that the traffic lights were red I (stop).
15. But for the fog we (reach) our destination ages ago.
16. If you had told me that he never paid his debts I (not lend) him the money.
17. If you (not sneeze) he wouldn't have known that we were there.
18. The hens (not get) into the house if you had shut the door.
19. If you (speak) more slowly he might have understood you.
20. If he had known the whole story he (not be) so angry.
231
Part 4
Workshop IT Glossary
Short forms
[C] countable adv adverb
[U]
uncountable
prep preposition
[pl] plural sb somebody
adj
adjective sth something
A
access verb to be able to open a file, website, program, database, etc.
accessory noun [C] an extra item that is added to sth and is useful or attractive
but important
according to before vowels / prep in a way that matches, follows or depends on
sth
adaptor noun [C] a device for connecting pieces of electrical equipment that
were not designed to be fitted together
adjust verb to change sth slightly
affect verb to make sb/sth change in a particular way; to influence sb/sth
algorithm noun [C] a set of steps or instructions for solving a particular problem
align verb to arrange things in a straight line
animation noun [C] a moving cartoon
antenna noun [C] a piece of equipment on a mobile phone, etc. that is used for
sending and receiving communications signals
appear verb to come into view so that you can see sb/sth
application noun [C] a program that is designed to do a particular job
ASCII abbr American Standard Code for Information Interchange;
a code used to represent English characters as numbers so that data can be moved
between computers that use different programs
attachment noun [C] a document or file that you send to sb using e-mail
audio adj connected with the recording of sound
automatically adv happening by itself, without needing a person to operate any
controls
B
background noun [C] the picture or colour on the first screen that appears when
you turn on the computer (= the desktop)
back-up noun [U,C] a copy of a computer file, etc. that can be used if the original
is lost or damaged > back sth up phrasal verb to make a copy of a computer file,
program, etc. that can be used in case the main one fails or needs extra support
band mode noun [C] a control or setting on a mobile phone which can be set at
‘digital’ or ‘dual’
bandwidth noun [C,U] the amount of data that can be sent or received in a fixed
amount of time by a communications channel, for example wires or radio waves.
The higher the bandwidth, the faster the communications channel can transmit the
data.
232
bill noun [C] a piece of paper that shows you how much money you owe sb for
goods or services
binary adj using only 0 and 1 as a system of numbers; the binary system
blink verb (used about a light, text etc.) to come on and go off again quickly
Broadband noun [U] a communications medium that allows several channels of
information, such as cable TV and Internet access, to pass through a single cable at
the same time
browse verb to look for or look at information on the Internet
browser (also Web browser) noun [C] a program that lets you look at
documents on the Internet
button noun [C] (on computer screens) a small box that a user clicks, using a
mouse, to tell the computer to do sth. A mouse also has left and right buttons.
C
carbon copy noun [C] (abbr cc) a copy of a letter, an e-mail, etc. that is sent to sb
else as well as the person it is addressed to
categorize verb to divide people or things into groups
CD-rewriter noun [C] (abbr CD-RW) a device that can be attached to a
computer and that can read and write to writable disks
CD-ROM abbr compact disc read-only memory; a CD, for use on a computer,
which has data recorded on it. The data cannot be changed or removed, unlike CDRW disks, on which data can be changed.
character noun [C] a single letter, number or space that is typed in a computer
document
chat room noun [C] a virtual room on the Internet where people can
communicate with each other
click verb click (sth/ on sth) to press one of the buttons on a mouse to start an
action on screen: to click (on) a button/a hyperlink
client noun [C] 1 a computer that is linked to a server and so can connect to a
network to ask for files such as e-mail messages, Web pages and programs, and can
also access stored data 2 a person who uses the services or advice of a professional
person or an organization
clip art noun [U] electronic images which you can download from the Internet or
copy from CD-ROMs
clipboard noun [C] a file or memory area where computer data is kept for a short
time while the user cuts or copies sth from an open document
code noun [U] a set of written computer instructions
coding system noun [C] a way of representing data
combine verb to join or mix two or more things together
command noun [C] an instruction that tells a computer what to do
commerce noun [C] the business of buying and selling things
communication noun [U] the act of sharing or exchanging information, ideas or
feelings
compatible adj able to be used together
component noun [C] one of several parts of which a machine, etc. is made
233
compose verb to produce a piece of writing, etc.
computer programmer noun [C] a person whose job is to write programs for a
computer
confident adj feeling or showing that you are sure about your own abilities,
opinions, etc.
confusing adj difficult to understand; not clear
connection noun [C,U] a point, especially in an electrical system, where two
parts connect; the state of being connected together
consistent adj not changing; always having the same opinions, standards, etc.
consumer noun [C] a person who buys things or uses services
convenient adj suitable or practical for a particular purpose; not causing
difficulty
copyright law noun [C,U] a law which gives sb the legal right to print, copy, etc.
a piece of original work
counter noun [C] an electronic device or computer program for counting sth
CPU abbr central processing unit; the part of a computer that controls all the
other parts of the system, such as memory, speed and power supply
crash verb (used about a computer) to suddenly stop working
cross-platform adj (used about programs or hardware) that can be used in
different operating systems
cursor noun [C] the small flashing mark on a computer screen that shows where
the next character (= letter or number) on the screen will be displayed
custom noun [C,U] a way of behaving which a particular group or society has
had for a long time
cut verb to remove sth or part of sth on a computer screen
cyberspace noun [U] the virtual place where electronic messages, pictures, etc.
exist while they are being sent between computers
D
data noun [U] information that is stored by a computer
database noun [C] a collection of data organized in a way that allows you to
access, retrieve and use it
database administrator noun [C] a person whose job is to design and manage a
database
deal with sth phrasal verb to carry out a task or take care of sth
decrease verb to make sth smaller or less
default ; noun [U, C] what usually happens or appears on a computer screen if
you do not make any other choice or change: You can change the default settings >
default verb
delete verb to remove sth that has been stored on a computer
design noun [C,U] (the process or skill of making) a drawing or plan that shows
how sth new will be made, how it will work, etc.
desktop noun [C] the first screen that appears when you turn on your computer
and which displays icons that represent files, folders, documents, etc.
234
desktop publishing (abbr DTP ) noun [U] using a personal computer to produce
books, magazines, etc.
detachable adj that can be taken off
develop verb to make sth grow slowly, increase or change into sth else
device noun [C] a tool or a piece of equipment made for a particular purpose
dialog box noun [C] a box that appears on a computer screen asking you to
choose what you want to do next by typing or clicking buttons
digital adj using an electronic system that uses the numbers 1 and 0 to store data:
a digital camera
dimension noun [C] a measurement in space, for example the height, width or
length of sth
directory noun [C] a list of the files or programs stored on a computer’s hard
drive
Display noun [sing] a particular feature of Windows® that lets you change the
way your computer screen looks by choosing your own background, screen saver,
etc.
display screen noun [C] the window where words, pictures, etc. are shown on a
mobile phone
distance learning noun [U] the act of studying a subject or preparing for an exam
from your home, away from a school or university
DNS abbr Domain Name Service; an Internet service that reads an e-mail
address and translates it into a number (the IP address) that matches the e-mail
address
domain name noun [C] an IP (= Internet Protocol) address, written using text.
It must have at least two parts, for example ‘hotmail.com’.
double-click verb (double-click sth/on sth) to press one of the buttons on a
mouse twice quickly in order to start an action on screen: double-click (on) a
button/hyperlink
download verb to copy data, such as a file, Web page or computer program from
the Internet onto your computer
draft noun [C] a piece of writing, etc. which will probably be changed and
improved before the final version
drive noun [C] the part of the computer that reads and stores information on disks
drop-down menu noun [C] a list of possible choices that appears on a computer
screen when you click on a title at the top
dual adj having or using two parts or aspects
E
e-commerce noun [U] the buying and selling of goods and services on the
Internet
edit verb to prepare a piece of text to be published, making sure that it is correct,
the right length, etc.
else adv (used after words formed with any-, no-, some-, and after question
words) another, different person, thing or place
235
e-mail (also email) noun [C,U] 1 [U] a way of sending electronic messages or
data from one computer to another 2 [C,U] a message or messages sent by e-mail >
e-mail verb
emoticon noun [C] a group of keyboard symbols that represent the expression on
sb’s face, used in e-mail, etc. to show the feelings of the person sending the
message, for example :-) represents a smiling face
empty adj with nothing inside
EPS abbr Encapsulated Post Script; EPS is part of the Adobe® Systems file
format that you can use with most desktop publishing and image editing
programs
erase verb to remove all or part of an image in an image editing program
exclude verb to leave out or not include sb/sth in sth
existing adj that is already there or being used; present
export verb to format data so that it can be used by another application
e-zine noun [C] an interactive magazine on the Internet
F
faceplate noun [C] the front part of a mobile phone
FAQ abbr (used in writing) frequently asked question(s)
feature noun [C] something important, interesting or typical of a place or thing
fee noun [C] the money you pay for a service or for professional advice
field noun [C] a text box where you type in words or data
file noun [C] a collection of information, such as a Word document or a picture,
which is stored in a computer, under a particular name
file extension noun [C] the last part of a file name, which shows you the format
of the file, for example .avi for video, .doc for MS Word files, etc.
fit verb to be the right size or shape for sb/sth
flame noun [C] (slang) a hurtful or insulting message that is sent to sb on the
Internet > flame verb
FlashTM noun [U] an interactive animation technology developed by
Macromedia Inc
flip cover noun [C] a cover for a mobile phone that you can open or close by
turning it over
floppy disk noun [C] a flat disk inside a plastic cover, that is used to store
information (data) in a form that a computer can read, and that can be removed
from the computer
folder noun [C] a place where a number of computer files or documents can be
stored together
font noun [C] the particular style of a set of letters that are used in printing, etc.,
such as Times New Roman
format verb to change or arrange text in a particular way on a page or screen
frame noun [C] 1 (in videoconferencing) a single image in a video clip 2 (in
HTML) a box which divides a browser into different sections. Each frame is a
different Web page. 3 (in DTP applications) a box containing text or pictures
236
freeware noun [U] software which you can download free from the Internet,
without having to pay for it
FTP abbr File Transfer Protocol; a set of rules that lets you move files from one
place to another over a network. An FTP server is the computer that uploads and
downloads files.
function noun [C] the purpose or special activity of sth/sb
G
generate verb to create or produce sth
GIF abbr Graphics Interchange Format; a file format that is good for pictures
or images that only use a few colours
gigabyte noun [C] (abbr GB) a unit of measurement used to measure the size of
the hard disk. 1 gigabyte = 1,024 megabytes.
gigahertz noun [C] (abbr GHz) a unit for measuring the speed of a CPU. One
GHz represents one billion cycles per second.
graphics noun [pl] pictures or images that are used especially in the design of
magazines, Web pages, etc.
guarantee noun [C] a firm promise that sth will be done or that sth will happen
H
hard disk noun [C] a disk inside a computer that stores all the data and programs
in the computer
hardware noun [U] the machinery and electronic parts of a computer system that
you can touch, such as the keyboard, the CPU, etc.
high level language noun [C] a programming language which is closer to human
language than low-level computer languages, such as machine language
highlight verb to mark part of a text with a special coloured pen, or to mark an
area on a computer screen to emphasize it or make it easier to see
home page noun [C] the first of a number of pages of information on the Internet
that belongs to a person or an organization. A home page contains connections
(links) to other pages of information.
HTML abbr Hyper Text Markup Language; a system (a Web authoring
language) used to create documents for the World Wide Web
HTTP abbr Hyper Text Transfer Protocol; the protocol (= rules) used to send
and receive data on the World Wide Web
hyperlink noun [C] a connection to a Web page or part of a Web page
I
icon noun [C] a small symbol on a computer screen which represents a program,
or a file
illegal adj against the law
import verb to use data produced by another application
income noun [C,U] the money that you receive regularly as payment for your
work
incoming adj arriving somewhere, or being received
increase verb to make sth bigger or greater
237
information technology (abbr IT ) noun [U] the study or use of electronic
equipment, especially computers, for collecting, storing and sending out information
input noun [U] the act of putting information into a computer
insert verb to put sth into sth or between two things
instead of adv, prep in the place of sb/sth
integrate verb to join things together so that they become one thing or work
together
interact verb (used about a computer system and its user) to communicate
directly with each other > interaction noun [U,C]
interactive adj involving direct communication between a computer and the
person using it
Internet noun [sing] (the Internet) a worldwide network that connects millions
of computers
Internet Protocol Address (also IP address) noun [C] a number used to identify
a computer or device on a network
invasion noun [C] the action of entering a place where you are not wanted and
disturbing sb: Such actions are an invasion of privacy.
ISDN abbr Integrated Services Digital Network; an international
communications standard for sending data over digital telephone lines
J
JavaScript noun [U] a simple programming language that allows Web authors
to design interactive Web pages
JPEG abbr Joint Photographic Expert Group; a file type for storing
photographs and images
junk mail noun [U] advertisements, etc. sent by post to people who have not
asked for them
K
keyboard noun [C] the set of buttons (keys) that you press to operate a computer
keypad noun [C] a very small keyboard or set of buttons used for operating a
small electronic device such as a mobile phone
keyword noun [C] a word or phrase that you type in when using a search engine
to look for information on the Internet
L
LAN abbr local area network; a network of computers within a single building
or group of nearby buildings
link verb to make a connection between two or more people or things
locate verb to find the exact position of sb/sth
location noun [C] a place where sth happens or exists
logical operator noun [C] a word (such as and, or, not) that is used in
programming languages, when using search engines, etc. to give a computer more
exact instructions about what it should look for or do
M
machine language noun [C] a low-level computer language that is only made up
of 1s and 0s. It is the only language that a computer understands.
238
mail server noun [C] a computer and/or software that runs an e-mail system
manual adj done or controlled by hand rather than automatically
maximize verb to make one window on a computer screen bigger in size, so that
it covers the whole screen
megabyte noun [C] (abbr MB) a unit for measuring computer memory. 1
megabyte = 1,048,576 bytes. 1 byte = 1 single typed letter, number or space
(character).
megahertz / / noun [C] (pl megahertz) (abbr MHz) a unit for measuring the
speed of a CPU. One MHz represents one million cycles per second.
menu bar noun [C] a row of words or commands (File, Edit, etc.) that are shown
at the top of a computer screen
minimize verb to make a window on a computer into an icon
mobile phone (also mobile) noun [C] a small telephone without any wires that
works by radio and that you can carry around with you
modem noun [C] a device that connects a computer to the Internet. It changes
computer data into sound which can be sent over telephone lines.
monitor noun [C] a separate part of a PC with a large screen that shows
information from the computer
mouse noun [C] a small device that you move across a surface with your hand to
control the movement of the cursor
multilingual adj for or including people of many different languages and races
multimedia adj using sound, pictures and video in addition to text on a screen
multiple adj involving more than one person or thing; having many parts
N
navigate verb to use a map, etc. to move around a place or find your way
somewhere
navigation noun [U] the ability to find your way easily around
somewhere/something
navigation bar noun [C] the list of words or images at the top, bottom or side of
a home page that shows you where to find everything on a website
network noun [C] a number of computers and other devices that are connected
together so that equipment and information can be shared
notebook noun [C] (also laptop ) a small personal computer that you can carry
O
offline adj, adv not connected to the Internet
online adj, adv connected to the Internet
online community noun [C] a group of people who all have sth in common and
who meet and communicate regularly on the Internet
operate verb to manage or use sth; to do business
optional adj that you can choose to do or not do
organize verb to put sth in order; to tidy sth
original adj new and interesting; different from its type
originate verb to happen or appear for the first time in a particular place or
situation
239
outgoing adj going away from a particular place, or being sent
output noun [U,C] the information that a computer produces
P
paint verb to electronically fill an area with colour using an image editing tool
password noun [C] a secret word or series of numbers that you type into a text
box in order to use a program or a computer
paste verb to copy or move text or graphics into a document from somewhere
else
PC abbr personal computer; the general term used for a computer, which
usually consists of a monitor, a tower, a keyboard and a mouse
peer-to-peer adj from one individual computer user to another, without using a
central server
performance noun [U] how well or badly a computer, machine, etc. works or
does sth
peripheral noun [C] any piece of hardware (= machinery, etc. that forms part of
or connects to a computer) apart from the CPU and the working memory (RAM)
personalize verb to design or change sth so that it is suitable for the needs of one
particular person
PICT abbr a file format for graphics, designed for Apple Macintosh computers
plug-in noun [C] a program, a file or hardware component that adds a specific
feature to a computer system
pointer noun [C] a small arrow on a computer screen that you move by moving
the mouse
pop-up ad noun [C] an advertisement that suddenly appears when you are surfing
the Internet
privacy noun [U] the state of not being seen or disturbed by other people
privacy policy noun [C] a plan of action agreed by a company, which promises
that any personal information you give to that company will not be passed on to
anyone else
process verb (used about a computer) to read data and use it to perform a series
of tasks (operations)
program verb to give a set of instructions to a computer to make it perform a
particular task
protocol noun [C] a system of rules for transmitting data between two devices,
for example Post Office Protocol
R
RAM abbr random access memory; computer memory in which data can be
changed or removed and then looked at in any order. When you switch the computer
off, you lose all the data in the RAM.
random adj done, chosen, etc. without sb thinking or deciding in advance what is
going to happen
real time noun [U] the fact that there is only a very short time between a
computer system receiving information and dealing with it, so that things almost
happen live
240
recipient noun [C] a person who receives sth
Recycle Bin noun [sing] the folder in Microsoft Windows® where files or
programs that have been deleted or removed are stored
register verb to put your name on an official list to ask for or join sth
relevant adj connected with what is happening or being talked about
removable disk noun [C] a disk that stores data and that can be taken out of the
computer and carried about with you
restore verb to put sth back into the position or condition it was in before
retailer noun [C] a person or company who sells goods to the public
retrieve verb (used about a computer) to find information that has been stored
ring tone noun [C] the sound or music that you program your mobile phone to
play in order to tell you that sb is phoning you
rotate verb to make sth turn in a circle around a central point
run verb to use a computer program
S
Save as type noun [U] the instruction or command that tells a computer how (=
in what file format) you want it to store a particular file
Save in noun [U] the instruction or command that tells a computer where (= on
which drive, in which folder, etc.) you want it to store or keep a file
scanner noun [C] a piece of computer hardware that can read images on paper
and change the information into data that a computer can use
screen saver noun [C] a program that runs a moving image on a computer screen
when the keyboard and the mouse are not being used
scroll bar noun [C] a tool on a computer screen that you use to move the text up
and down or left and right
scroll key noun [C] one of the buttons (keys) on a mobile phone which you press
in order to move up or down inside the display screen
search verb to examine sth carefully because you are looking for sth > search n.
[C]
search engine noun [C] a program (such as GoogleTM or Alta VistaTM) that lets
you search the World Wide Web for information
secure adj safe; well protected or locked
security noun [U] the state of being safe and protected from danger, thieves, etc.
server noun [C] a central computer that lets people access information on a
network and that stores data and programs centrally. There are many types of
servers, such as POP3 servers, network servers and Web servers.
setting noun [C] one of the positions of the controls of a computer that control
the way sth looks or works and that can be changed by the user: paragraph settings
share verb to divide sth between two or more people
shareware noun [U] software which you can download from the Internet
without having to pay for it until you have tried it for a time and decided that you
want to continue to use it
241
shortcut noun an icon that opens a program. A shortcut key is a keyboard
operation that starts a command (for example pressing Cntl and S together to save a
document).
An underscore (e.g. Save) shows a shortcut key in the menu bar. Shortcuts vary
between computers and programs.
simulation noun [C,U] the creating of certain conditions that exist in real life
using computers, etc., usually for study or training purposes
SMS abbr Short Message Service (or Simple Message Service); a service for
sending text messages on mobile phones
software noun [U] the programs used by a computer
source noun [C] a place, person or thing where sth comes or starts from or where
you can get sth
spam noun [U] advertising material, etc. that is sent by e-mail to people who
have not asked for it
special effects noun [pl] effects that can be created by computer graphics
specification noun [C] a detailed description of how sth is, or should be, designed
or made
stand for sth phrasal verb to be an abbreviation or symbol of sth
stand-alone adj able to be operated on its own without being connected to a
larger system
standard adj normal or average
store verb to keep information or data in a computer’s memory
stylish adj fashionable and attractive
subject noun [C] the topic or heading of an e-mail; the person or thing that is
being talked about
surf verb to look for or look at information on the Internet
swap verb to give sth to sb else in exchange for sth
T
techno-nerd noun [C] a person who spends all his/her time on the Internet or
working with new technology
template noun [C] a plan of sth that is used as a model for producing other
similar examples
text box noun [C] a box that appears on a computer screen where a user can type
in text or information
text editor noun [C] a program, such as Notepad, that allows you to write and
edit text files
text wrap noun [U] the act or process of arranging words around a picture or
inside a shape in DTP programs
thesaurus noun [C] a book that is like a dictionary, but in which words are
arranged in groups that have similar meanings
3-D adj having length, width and height
TIFF abbr Tagged Image File Format; a file format for storing photographs
and images
tool noun [C] a thing that helps you to do your job or to achieve sth
242
toolbar noun [C] a row of symbols (icons), usually below the menu bar, that
represent the different commands or tools that a user needs to use a program
tower noun [C] a metal box that contains the CPU, hard disk drive and power
supply for a PC
transaction noun [C] a piece of business that is done between people
transfer verb to move sth from one place to another
transmission noun [U] the action of sending sth out from one person, machine or
thing to another
trial membership noun [C] the state of being a member of a group, club,
organization, etc. for a short period of time as a test, so that you can decide if you
would like to continue permanently
U
underscore verb to underline sth > underscore noun [C]
unsolicited adj not asked for
untitled adj having no title or name. A graphics program will usually store a
file as ‘untitled’ if no other name is given.
upload verb to copy a computer file from one computer system to another,
usually on the Internet
URL abbr Uniform/Universal Resource Locator; the address of a World Wide
Web page. URLs connect files across the Web.
utility noun [C] a program or part of a program that does a particular task or
service
V
videoconferencing noun [U] a system that allows people in different parts of the
world to have a meeting by watching and listening to each other using video screens
virtual reality noun [U] images created by a computer that appear to surround
the person looking at them and seem almost real
virus noun [C] a computer program that attaches itself to another program in
order to destroy files or damage the hard disk of the computer
voicemail noun [U] an electronic system which can store telephone messages, so
that sb can listen to them later
W
Web page noun [C] a collection of text, pictures, sound etc. that you see in a
window on your screen when you visit a website. A website consists of several
Web pages.
Web-authoring noun [U] the process of creating Web pages by writing HTML
code (= an authoring language)
Web-based adj connected to, or made available via, the Internet and the World
Wide Web
website noun [C] a place connected to the Internet, where a company, an
organization, etc. puts information that can be found on the World Wide Web
wire cable noun [C] a type of cable used to connect computers
word processor noun [C] a program or computer that lets you carry out wordprocessing functions
243
………………………………………………………………………
PART 1.
Unit 1. My Family and myself. Appearance and Character..…………..……
Unit 2. Higher Education…………………………………………………..…….
Unit 3. National University of Food Technologies……………………….……
Unit 4. My Future Speciality…………………………………………………......
PART 2.
Unit 5. Computers and Their Functions………………………………….……..
Unit 6. Types of Computers and Their Functions……………………………..
Unit 7. Computer Essentials……………………………………………………..
Unit 8. Storage Devices……………………………………………….…….……
Unit 9. Input and Output Devices………………………………………………..
Unit.10. Operating Systems………………………………………………………
Unit 11. Graphic User Interface…………………………………………............
Unit 12. Electronic Processing of the Text…………………………….….........
Unit 13. Program Design and Computer Language……………………...................
Unit 14. The Internet……………………………………………………..….........
Revisions……………………………………………………………………………
PART 3.
Grammar……………………………………………………….……………..........
PART 4.
Glossary…………………………………………………………………….…........
244
1.
.,
.
2.
.,
.,
.– :
1.
.
, 2002.
.
.
2.
;
.
.,
.– :
, 2003.
3. Santiago Remacha Esteras. Infotech. English for computer users. – Cambridge
University Press, 2011.
4. Santiago Remacha Esteras, Elena Marcon Fabre. Professional English in Use. Cambridge University Press, 2010.
5. Thomson A.J., Marinet A.V. A Practical English Grammar, Exercises 1,2 - Oxford
University Press, 1999.
6. Duckworth M. Oxford Business English Grammar and Practice - Oxford University
Press, 1998.
7. Jenny Dooley, Virginia Evans. Grammarway 2. – English Grammar Book. –
Express Publishing, 2011.
8. Jenny Dooley, Virginia Evans. Grammarway 3. – English Grammar Book. –
Express Publishing, 1999.
9. Keith Boeckner, P. Charles Brown. Oxford English for Computing. – Oxford
University Press, 2000.
10. Eric H. Glendinning, John McEwan. Oxford English for Information
Technology. – Oxford University Press. – 1999.
11. Dinos Demetriades. Information Technology. Oxford University Press. – 2010.
12. Eric H. Glendinning, John McEwan. Basic English for computing. – Oxford
University Press. – 2002.
13. Jon marks. Check Your English Vocabulary for Computers and Information
Technology. Third edition. – Galigraving (UK). – 2007.
14. Mark Harrison. Grammar Spectrum 2. English Rules and Practice. - Oxford
University Press. – 2002.
15. George Yule. Oxford Practice Grammar. - Oxford University Press. – 2000.
16.
.
2
./
. – .:
.:
,
,
.
, 2006. – 125 .
.
.
17.
2
”
– :
/
.:
,
, 2012. – .93.
245